Patent Application
20050271663
This application is a continuation in part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/744,774, filed Dec. 23, 2003 and of WO 2004/003019 (PCT/GB2003/002804) filed Jun. 30, 2003 (which designated the U.S. and was published in English on Jan. 8, 2004), which claims priority to PCT/GB2002/03014, filed Jun. 28, 2002 (which designated the U.S. and was published in English on Jan. 9, 2003), and GB 0230202.4, filed Dec. 27, 2002. This application also claims the priority of GB application GB 115841.9, filed Jun. 28, 2001. This application further claims the priority of PCT/GB2004/002829, filed Jun. 30, 2004, which designated the U.S, and of U.S. provisional application No. 60/535,076, filed Jan. 8, 2004, and of PCT/GBO3/005646, filed Dec. 24, 2003, and of GB 0327706.8, filed Nov. 28, 2003, and of U.S. provisional application 60/509,613, filed Oct. 8, 2003. The disclosure of each of these priority applications is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
The present invention relates to methods of treatment of diseases, including rheumatoid arthritis using antibody polypeptide constructs including single domain antibody ligands and dual specific ligands, compositions of such ligands, and methods of making and using such ligands. In particular, the invention provides methods for the preparation of single domain antibodies that bind inflammatory cytokines including TNF-α and VEGF. Also disclosed are dual-specific ligands comprising a first single immunoglobulin variable domain which binds to a first antigen or epitope, and a second single immunoglobulin variable domain which binds to a second antigen or epitope. More particularly, the invention relates to dual-specific ligands wherein binding to at least one of the first and second antigens or epitopes acts to increases the half-life of the ligand in vivo. Open and closed conformation ligands comprising more than one binding specificity are described. Methods for treating rheumatoid arthritis are disclosed that use single domain antibody constructs and dual specific ligands that bind first and second antigens that can comprise any combination of, for example, TNF-α, VEGF and HSA.
TNF-α:
As the name implies, Tumor Necrosis Factor-a (TNF-α) was originally described as a molecule having anti-tumor properties, but the molecule was subsequently found to play key roles in other processes, including a prominent role in mediating inflammation and autoimmune disorders. TNF-α is a key proinflammatory cytokine in inflammatory conditions including, for example, rheumatoid arthritis (RA), Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis and other bowel disorders, psoriasis, toxic shock, graft versus host disease and multiple sclerosis.
The pro-inflammatory actions of TNF-α result in tissue injury, such as inducing procoagulant activity on vascular endothelial cells (Pober, et al., J. Immunol. 136:1680 (1986)), increasing the adherence of neutrophils and lymphocytes (Pober, et al., J. Immunol. 138:3319 (1987)), and stimulating the release of platelet activating factor from macrophages, neutrophils and vascular endothelial cells (Camussi, et al., J. Exp. Med. 166:1390 (1987)).
TNF-α is synthesized as a 26 kD transmembrane precursor protein with an intracellular tail that is cleaved by a TNF-α-converting metalloproteinase enzyme and then secreted as a 17 kD soluble protein. The active form consists of a homotrimer of the 17 kD monomers which interacts with two different cell surface receptors, p55 TNFR1 and p75 TNFR2. There is also evidence that the cell surface bound precursor form of TNF-α can mediate some biological effects of the factor. Most cells express both p55 and p75 receptors which mediate different biological functions of the ligand. The p75 receptor is implicated in triggering lymphocyte proliferation, and the p55 receptor is implicated in TNF-mediated cytotoxicity, apoptosis, antiviral activity, fibroblast proliferation and NF-κB activation (see Locksley et al., 2001, Cell 104: 487-501).
The TNF receptors are members of a family of membrane proteins including the NGF receptor, Fas antigen, CD27, CD30, CD40, Ox40 and the receptor for the lymphotoxin α/β, heterodimer. Binding of receptor by the homotrimer induces aggregation of receptors into small clusters of two or three molecules of either p55 or p75. TNF-α is produced primarily by activated macrophages and T lymphocytes, but also by neutrophils, endothelial cells, keratinocytes and fibroblasts during acute inflammatory reactions.
TNF-α is at the apex of the cascade of pro-inflammatory cytokines (Reviewed in Feldmann & Maini, 2001, Ann. Rev. Immunol. 19: 163). This cytokine induces the expression or release of additional proinflammatory cytokines, particularly IL-1 and IL-6 (see, for example, Rutgeerts et al., 2004, Gastroenterology 126: 1593-1610). Inhibition of TNF-α inhibits the production of inflammatory cytokines including IL-1, IL-6, IL-8 and GM-CSF (Brennan et al., 1989, Lancet 2: 244).
Because of its role in inflammation, TNF-α has emerged as an important inhibition target in efforts to reduce the symptoms of inflammatory disorders. Various approaches to inhibition of TNF-α for the clinical treatment of disease have been pursued, including particularly the use of soluble TNF-α receptors and antibodies specific for TNF-α. Commercial products approved for clinical use include, for example, the antibody products Remicade™ (Infliximab; Centocor, Malvern, Pa.; a chimeric monoclonal IgG antibody bearing human IgG4 constant and mouse variable regions), Humira™ (adalimumab or D2E7; Abbott Laboratories, described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,090,382) and the soluble receptor product Enbrel™ (etanercept, a soluble p75 TNFR2 Fc fusion protein; Immunex).
The role of TNF-α in inflammatory arthritis is reviewed in, for example, Li & Schwartz, 2003, Sringer Semin. Immunopathol. 25: 19-33. In RA, TNF-α is highly expressed in inflamed synovium, particularly at the cartilage-pannus junction (DiGiovine e tal., 1988, Ann. Rheum. Dis. 47: 768; Firestein et al., 1990, J. Immunol. 144: 3347; and Saxne et al., 1988, Atrhritis Rheum. 31: 1041). In addition to evidence that TNF-α increases the levels of inflammatory cytokines IL-1, IL-6, IL-8 and GM-CSF, TNF-α can alone trigger joint inflammation and proliferation of fibroblast-like synoviocytes (Gitter et al., 1989, Immunology 66: 196), induce collagenase, thereby triggering cartilage destruction (Dayer et al., 1985, J. Exp. Med. 162: 2163; Dayer et al., 1986, J. Clin. Invest. 77: 645), inhibit proteoglycan synthesis by articular chondrocytes (Saklatvala, 1986, Nature 322: 547; Saklatvala et al., 1985, J. Exp. Med. 162: 1208) and can stimulate osteoclastogenesis and bone resorption (Abu-Amer et al., 2000, J. Biol. Chem. 275: 27307; Bertolini et al., 1986, Nature 319: 516). TNF-o: induces increased release of CD14+ monocytes by the bone marrow. Such monocytes can infiltrate joints and amplify the inflammatory response via the RANK (Receptor Activator or NF-κB)—RANKL signaling pathway, giving rise to osteoclast formation during arthritic inflammation (reviewed in Anandarajah & Richlin, 2004, Curr. Opin. Rheumatol. 16: 338-343).
TNF-α is an acute phase protein which increases vascular permeability through its induction of IL-8, thereby recruiting macrophage and neutrophils to a site of infection. Once present, activated macrophages continue to produce TNF-α, thereby maintaining and amplifying the inflammatory response.
Titration of TNF-α by the soluble receptor construct etanercept is effective for the treatment of RA, but not for treatment of Crohn's disease. In contrast, the antibody TNF-α antagonist infliximab is effective to treat both RA and Crohn's disease. Thus, the mere neutralization of soluble TNF-α is not the only mechanism involved in anti-TNF-based therapeutic efficacy. Rather, the blockade of other pro-inflammatory signals or molecules that are induced by TNF-α also plays a role (Rutgeerts et al., supra). For example, the administration of infliximab apparently decreases the expression of adhesion molecules, resulting in a decreased infiltration of neutrophils to sites of inflammation. Also, infliximab therapy results in the disappearance of inflammatory cells from previously inflamed bowel mucosa in Crohn's disease. This disappearance of activated T cells in the lamina propria is mediated by apoptosis of cells carrying membrane-bound TNF-α following activation of caspases 8, 9 and then 3 in a Fas dependent manner (see Lugering et al., 2001, Gastroenterology 121: 1145-1157). Thus, membrane- or receptor-bound TNF-α is an important target for anti-TNF-α therapeutic approaches. Others have shown that infliximab binds to activated peripheral blood cells and lamina propria cells and induces apoptosis through activation of caspase 3 (see Van den Brande et al., 2003, Gastroenterology 124: 1774-1785).
Intracellularly, the binding of trimeric TNF-α to its receptor triggers a cascade of signaling events, including displacement of inhibitory molecules such as SODD (silencer of death domains) and binding of the adaptor factors FADD, TRADD, TRAF2, c-IAP, RAIDD and TRIP plus the kinase RIP1 and certain caspases (reviewed by Chen & Goeddel, 2002, Science 296: 1634-1635, and by Muzio & Saccani in: Methods in Molecular Medicine: Tumor Necrosis Factor, Methods and Protocols,” Corti and Ghezzi, eds. (Humana Press, New Jersey), pp. 81-99. The assembled signaling complex can activate either a cell survival pathway, through NF-κB activation and subsequent downstream gene activation, or an apoptotic pathway through caspase activation.
Similar extracellular downstream cytokine cascades and intracellular signal transduction pathways can be induced by TNF-α in other diseases. Thus, for other diseases or disorders in which the TNF-α molecule contributes to the pathology, inhibition of TNF-α presents an approach to treatment.
VEGF:
Angiogenesis plays an important role in the active proliferation of inflammatory synovial tissue. RA synovial tissue, which is highly vascularized, invades the periarticular cartilage and bone tissue and leads to joint destruction.
Vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF) is the most potent angiogenic cytokine known. VEGF is a secreted, heparin-binding, homodimeric glycoprotein existing in several alternate forms due to alternative splicing of its primary transcript (Leung et al., 1989, Science 246: 1306). VEGF is also known as vascular permeability factor (VPF) due to its ability to induce vascular leakage, a process important in inflammation. The identification of VEGF in synovial tissues of RA patients highlighted the potential role of VEGF in the pathology of RA (Fava et al., 1994, J. Exp. Med. 180: 341: 346; Nagashima et al., 1995, J. Rheumatol. 22: 1624-1630). A role for VEGF in the pathology of RA was solidified following studies in which anti-VEGF antibodies were administered in the murine collagen-induced arthritis (CIA) model. In these studies, VEGF expression in the joints increased upon induction of the disease, and the administration of anti-VEGF antisera blocked the development of arthritic disease and ameliorated established disease (Sone et al., 2001, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 281: 562-568; Lu et al., 2000, J. Immunol. 164: 5922-5927).
Antibody Polypeptides:
Antibodies are highly specific for their binding targets and although they are derived from nature's own defense mechanisms, antibodies face several challenges when applied to the treatment of disease in human patients. Conventional antibodies are large multi-subunit protein molecules comprising at least four polypeptide chains. For example, human IgG has two heavy chains and two light chains that are disulfide bonded to form the functional antibody. The size of a conventional IgG is about 150 kD. Because of their relatively large size, complete antibodies (e.g., IgG, IgA, IgM, etc.) are limited in their therapeutic usefulness due to problems in, for example, tissue penetration. Considerable efforts have focused on identifying and producing smaller antibody fragments that retain antigen binding function and solubility.
The heavy and light polypeptide chains of antibodies comprise variable (V) regions that directly participate in antigen interactions, and constant (C) regions that provide structural support and function in non-antigen-specific interactions with immune effectors. The antigen binding domain of a conventional antibody is comprised of two separate domains: a heavy chain variable domain (VH) and a light chain variable domain (VL: which can be either Vκ or Vλ). The antigen binding site itself is formed by six polypeptide loops: three from the VH domain (H1, H2 and H3) and three from the VL domain (L1, L2 and L3). In vivo, a diverse primary repertoire of V genes that encode the VH and VL domains is produced by the combinatorial rearrangement of gene segments. C regions include the light chain C regions (referred to as CL regions) and the heavy chain C regions (referred to as CH1, CH2 and CH3 regions).
A number of smaller antigen binding fragments of naturally occurring antibodies have been identified following protease digestion. These include, for example, the “Fab fragment” (VL—CL—CH1-VH), “Fab′ fragment” (a Fab with the heavy chain hinge region) and “F(ab′)2 fragment” (a dimer of Fab′ fragments joined by the heavy chain hinge region). Recombinant methods have been used to generate even smaller antigen-binding fragments, referred to as “single chain Fv” (variable fragment) or “scFv,” consisting of VL and VH joined by a synthetic peptide linker.
Single Domain Antibodies:
While the antigen binding unit of a naturally-occurring antibody (e.g., in humans and most other mammals) is generally known to be comprised of a pair of V regions (VL/VH), camelid species express a large proportion of fully functional, highly specific antibodies that are devoid of light chain sequences. The camelid heavy chain antibodies are found as homodimers of a single heavy chain, dimerized via their constant regions. The variable domains of these camelid heavy chain antibodies are referred to as VHH domains and retain the ability, when isolated as fragments of the VH chain, to bind antigen with high specificity ((Hamers-Casterman et al., 1993, Nature 363: 446-448; Gahroudi et al., 1997, FEBS Lett. 414: 521-526). Antigen binding single VH domains have also been identified from, for example, a library of murine VH genes amplified from genomic DNA from the spleens of immunized mice and expressed in E. coli (Ward et al., 1989, Nature 341: 544-546). Ward et al. named the isolated single VH domains “dAbs,” for “domain antibodies.” The term “dAb” will refer herein to a single immunoglobulin variable domain (VH, VHH or VL) polypeptide that specifically binds antigen. A “dAb” binds antigen independently of other V domains; however, as the term is used herein, a “dAb” can be present in a homo- or heteromultimer with other VH or VL domains where the other domains are not required for antigen binding by the dAb, i.e., where the dAb binds antigen independently of the additional VH, VHH or VL domains.
Single immunoglobulin variable domains, for example, VHH, are the smallest antigen-binding antibody unit known. For use in therapy, human antibodies are preferred, primarily because they are not as likely to provoke an immune response when administered to a patient. As noted above, isolated non-camelid VH domains tend to be relatively insoluble and are often poorly expressed. Comparisons of camelid VHH with the VH domains of human antibodies reveals several key differences in the framework regions of the camelid VHH domain corresponding to the VH/VL interface of the human VH domains. Mutation of these residues of human VH3 to more closely resemble the VHH sequence (specifically Gly 44→Glu, Leu 45→Arg and Trp 47→Gly) has been performed to produce “camelized” human VH domains that retain antigen binding activity (Davies & Riechmann, 1994, FEBS Lett. 339: 285-290) yet have improved expression and solubility. (Variable domain amino acid numbering used herein is consistent with the Kabat numbering convention (Kabat et al., 1991, Sequences of Immunological Interest, 5th ed. U.S. Dept. Health & Human Services, Washington, D.C.)) WO 03/035694 (Muyldermans) reports that the Trp 103→Arg mutation improves the solubility of non-camelid VH domains. Davies & Riechmann (1995, Biotechnology N.Y. 13: 475-479) also report production of a phage-displayed repertoire of camelized human VH domains and selection of clones that bind hapten with affinities in the range of 100-400 nM, but clones selected for binding to protein antigen had weaker affinities.
The antigen binding domain of an antibody comprises two separate regions: a heavy chain variable domain (VH) and a light chain variable domain (VL: which can be either Vκ or Vλ). The antigen binding site itself is formed by six polypeptide loops: three from VH domain (H1, H2 and H3) and three from VL domain (L1, L2 and L3). A diverse primary repertoire of V genes that encode the VH and VL domains is produced by the combinatorial rearrangement of gene segments. The VH gene is produced by the recombination of three gene segments, VH, D and JH. In humans, there are approximately 51 functional VH segments (Cook and Tomlinson (1995) Immunol Today, 16: 237), 25 functional D segments (Corbett et al. (1997) J. Mol. Biol., 268: 69) and 6 functional JH segments (Ravetch et al. (1981) Cell, 27: 583), depending on the haplotype. The VH segment encodes the region of the polypeptide chain which forms the first and second antigen binding loops of the VH domain (H1 and H2), whilst the VH, D and JH segments combine to form the third antigen binding loop of the VH domain (H3). The VL gene is produced by the recombination of only two gene segments, VL and JL. In humans, there are approximately 40 functional Vκ segments (Schable and Zachau (1993) Biol. Chem. Hoppe-Seyler, 374: 1001), 31 functional Vλ segments (Williams et al. (1996) J. Mol. so Biol., 264: 220; Kawasaki et al. (1997) Genome Res., 7: 250), 5 functional Jκ segments (Hieter et al. (1982) J. Biol. Chef,., 257: 1516) and 4 functional Jλ segments (Vasicek and Leder (1990) J. Exp. Med., 172: 609), depending on the haplotype. The VL segment encodes the region of the polypeptide chain which forms the first and second antigen binding loops of the VL domain (L1 and L2), whilst the VL and JL segments combine to form the third antigen binding loop of the VL domain (L3). Antibodies selected from this primary repertoire are believed to be sufficiently diverse to bind almost all antigens with at least moderate affinity. High affinity antibodies are produced by “affinity maturation” of the rearranged genes, in which point mutations are generated and selected by the immune system on the basis of improved binding.
Analysis of the structures and sequences of antibodies has shown that five of the six antigen binding loops (H1, H2, L1, L2, L3) possess a limited number of main-chain conformations or canonical structures (Chothia and Lesk (1987) d: Mol. Biol., 196: 901; Chothia et al. (1989) Nature, 342: 877). The main-chain conformations are determined by (i) the length of the antigen binding loop, and (ii) particular residues, or types of residue, at certain key position in the antigen binding loop and the antibody framework. Analysis of the loop lengths and key residues has enabled us to the predict the main-chain conformations of H1, H2, L1, L2 and L3 encoded by the majority of human antibody sequences (Chothia et al. (1992) J. Mol. Biol., 227: 799; Tomlinson et al. (1995) EMBO J., 14: 4628; Williams et al. (1996) J. Mol. Biol., 264: 220). Although the H3 region is much more diverse in terms of sequence, length and structure (due to the use of D segments), it also forms a limited number of main-chain conformations for short loop lengths which depend on the length and the presence of particular residues, or types of residue, at key positions in the loop and the antibody framework (Martin et al. (1996) J. Mol. Biol., 263: 800; Shirai et al. (1996) FEBS Letters, 399: 1.
Bispecific Antibodies:
Bispecific antibodies comprising complementary pairs of VH and VL regions are known in the art. These bispecific antibodies must comprise two pairs of VH and VLS, each VH/VL pair binding to a single antigen or epitope. Methods described involve hybrid hybridomas (Milstein & Cuello, Nature 305:537-40), minibodies (Hu et al., (1996) Cancer Res 30 56:3055-3061;), diabodies (Holliger et al., (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90, 6444 6448; WO 94/13804), chelating recombinant antibodies (CRAbs; (Neri et al., (1995) J. Mol. Biol. 246, 367-373), biscFv (e.g. Atwell et al., (1996) Mol. Immunol. 33, 1301 1312), “knobs in holes” stabilized antibodies (Carter et al., (1997) Protein Sci. 6, 781 788). In each case, each antibody species comprises two antigen-binding sites, each fashioned by a complementary pair of VH and VL domains. Each antibody is thereby able to bind to two different antigens or epitopes at the same time, with the binding to EACH antigen or epitope mediated by a VH and its complementary VL domain. Each of these techniques presents its particular disadvantages; for instance in the case of hybrid hybridomas, inactive VH/VL pairs can greatly reduce the fraction of bispecific IgG.
Furthermore, most bispecific approaches rely on the association of the different VH/VL pairs or the association of VH and VL chains to recreate the two different VH/VL binding sites. It is therefore impossible to control the ratio of binding sites to each antigen or epitope in the assembled molecule and thus many of the assembled molecules will bind to one antigen or epitope but not the other. In some cases it has been possible to engineer the heavy or light chains at the sub-unit interfaces (Carter et al., 1997) in order to improve the number of molecules which have binding sites to both antigens or epitopes, but this never results in all molecules having binding to both antigens or epitopes.
There is some evidence that two different antibody binding specificities might be incorporated into the same binding site, but these generally represent two or more specificities that correspond to structurally related antigens or epitopes or to antibodies that are broadly cross-reactive. For example, cross-reactive antibodies have been so described, usually where the two antigens are related in sequence and structure, such as hen egg white lysozyme and turkey lysozyme (McCafferty et al., WO 92/01047) or to free hapten and to hapten conjugated to carrier (Griffiths AD et al. EMBO J 1994 13:14 3245-60). In a further example, WO 02/02773 (Abbott Laboratories) describes antibody molecules with “dual specificity”. The antibody molecules referred to are antibodies raised or selected against multiple antigens, such that their specificity spans more than a single antigen. Each complementary VH/VL pair in the antibodies of WO 02/02773 specifies a single binding specificity for two or more structurally related antigens; the VH and VL domains in such complementary pairs do not each possess a separate specificity.
The antibodies thus have a broad single specificity which encompasses two antigens, which are structurally related. Furthermore natural autoantibodies have been described that are polyreactive (Casali & Notkins, Ann. Rev. Immunol. 7, 515-531), reacting with at least two (usually more) different antigens or epitopes that are not structurally related. It has also been shown that selections of random peptide repertoires using phage display technology on a monoclonal antibody will identify a range of peptide sequences that fit the antigen binding site. Some of the sequences are highly related, fitting a consensus sequence, whereas others are very different and have been termed mimotopes (Lane & Stephen, Current Opinion in Immunology, 1993, 5, 268-271). It is therefore clear that a natural four-chain antibody, comprising associated and complementary VH and VL domains, has the potential to bind to many different antigens from a large universe of known antigens. It is less clear how to create a binding site to two given antigens in the same antibody, particularly those which are not necessarily structurally related.
Protein engineering methods have been suggested that may have a bearing on this. For example, it has also been proposed that a catalytic antibody could be created with a binding activity to a metal ion through one variable domain, and to a hapten (substrate) through contacts with the metal ion and a complementary variable domain (Barbas et al., 5 1993 Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA 90, 6385-6389). However in this case, the binding and catalysis of the substrate (first antigen) is proposed to require the binding of the metal ion (second antigen). Thus the binding to the VH/VL pairing relates to a single but multi component antigen.
Methods have been described for the creation of bispecific antibodies from camel antibody heavy chain single domains in which binding contacts for one antigen are created in one variable domain, and for a second antigen in a second variable domain. However the variable domains were not complementary. Thus a first heavy chain variable domain is selected against a first antigen, and a second heavy chain variable domain against a second antigen, and then both domains are linked together on the same chain to give a bispecific antibody fragment (Conrath et al., J. Biol. Chem. 270, 27589-27594). However the camel heavy chain single domains are unusual in that they are derived from natural camel antibodies which have no light chains, and indeed the heavy chain single domains are unable to associate with camel light chains to form complementary VH and VL pairs.
Single heavy chain variable domains have also been described, derived from natural antibodies which are normally associated with light chains (from monoclonal antibodies or from repertoires of domains; see EP-A-0368684). These heavy chain variable domains have been shown to interact specifically with one or more related antigens but have not been combined with other heavy or light chain variable domains to create a ligand with a specificity for two or more different antigens. Furthermore, these single domains have been shown to have a very short in vivo half-life. Therefore, such domains are of limited therapeutic value.
It has been suggested to make bispecific antibody fragments by linking heavy chain variable domains of different specificity together (as described above). The disadvantage with this approach is that isolated antibody variable domains may have a hydrophobic interface that normally makes interactions with the light chain and is exposed to solvent and may be “sticky” allowing the single domain to bind to hydrophobic surfaces. Furthermore, in the absence of a partner light chain, the combination of two or more different heavy chain variable domains and their association, possibly via their hydrophobic interfaces, may prevent them from binding to one or both of the ligands they are able to bind in isolation. Moreover, in this case the heavy chain variable domains would not be associated with complementary light chain variable domains and thus may be less stable and readily unfold (Worn & Pluckthun, 1998 Biochemistry 37, 13120-7).
The inventors have described, in their copending international patent application WO 03/002609 as well as in copending unpublished UK patent application 0230203.2, dual specific immunoglobulin ligands which comprise immunoglobulin single variable domains where each variable domain may have a different specificity. The domains may act in competition with each other or independently to bind antigens or epitopes on target molecules.
The present invention describes methods of treating a TNF-α-elated inflammatory disorder in an individual suffering from such a disorder. The method comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a single domain antibody polypeptide cosntruct, preferably a human single domain antibody construct, to such an individual, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNF-α, and whereby the TNF-α-related disorder is treated.
In one aspect, the inflammatory disorder is rheumatoid arthritis, and the method comprises the use of one or more single domain antibody polypeptide constructs, wherein one or more of the constructs antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor. The present invention describes compositions comprising one or more single domain antibody polypeptide constructs that antagonize human TNFα's binding to a receptor, and dual specific ligands in which one specificity of the ligand is directed toward TNFα and a second specificity is directed to VEGF or HSA. The present invention further describes dual specific ligands in which one specificity of the ligand is directed toward VEGF and a second specificty is directed to HSA.
In one aspect, the invention encompasses a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis, the method comprising administering to an individual in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor, whereby the rheumatoid arthritis is treated.
In one embodiment, the composition prevents an increase in arthritic score when administered to a mouse of the Tg197 transgenic mouse model of arthritis.
In another embodiment, the administration of the composition to a Tg197 transgenic mouse comprises the following steps: a) administer weekly intraperitoneal injections of the composition to a heterozygous Tg197 transgenic mouse, b) weigh the mouse of step a) weekly, and c) score the mouse weekly for macrophenotypic signs of arthritis according to the following system: 0=no arthritis (normal appearance and flexion), 1=mild arthritis (joint distortion), 2=moderate arthritis (swelling, joint deformation), 3=heavy arthritis (severely impaired movement).
In another embodiment, the composition is administered to the mouse before the onset of arthritic symptoms is manifested. In another embodiment, the composition is first administered when the mouse is three weeks of age. In another embodiment, the composition is first administered when the mouse is six weeks of age
In another embodiment, the composition has an efficacy in the Tg197 transgenic mouse arthritis assay that is greater or equal, within the realm of statistical significance, to that of an agent selected from the group consisting of Etanercept, Infliximab and D2E7.
In another embodiment, the composition has an efficacy in the Tg197 transgenic mouse arthritis assay, such that the treatment results in an arthritic score of 0 to 0.5. In another embodiment, the composition has an efficacy in the Tg197 transgenic mouse arthritis assay, such that the treatment results in an arthritic score of 0 to 1.0. In another embodiment, the composition has an efficacy in the Tg197 transgenic mouse arthritis assay, such that the treatment results in an arthritic score of 0 to 1.5. In another embodiment, the composition has an efficacy in the Tg197 transgenic mouse arthritis assay, such that the treatment results in an arthritic score of 0 to 2.0.
In another embodiment, the treating comprises inhibiting the progression of the rheumatoid arthritis. In another embodiment, the treating comprises preventing or delaying the onset of rheumatoid arthritis.
In another embodiment, the administering results in a statistically significant change in one or more indicia of RA. In another embodiment, the one or more indicia of RA comprise one or more of erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR), Ritchie articular index and duration of morning stiffness, joint mobility, joint swelling, x ray imaging of one or more joints, and histopathological analysis of fixed sections of one or more joints.
In another embodiment, the one or more indicia of RA comprises a decrease in the macrophenotypic signs of arthritis in a Tg197 transgenic mouse, wherein the composition is administered to a Tg197 transgenic mouse, wherein the Tg197 transgenic mouse is scored for the macrophenotypic signs of arthritis, and wherein the macrophenotypic signs of arthritis are scored according to the following system: 0=no arthritis (normal appearance and flexion), 1=mild arthritis (joint distortion), 2=moderate arthritis (swelling, joint deformation), 3=heavy arthritis (severely impaired movement).
In another embodiment, the one or more indicia of RA comprises a decrease in the histopathological signs of arthritis in a Tg197 transgenic mouse, wherein the composition is administered to a Tg197 transgenic mouse, wherein the Tg197 transgenic mouse is scored for the histopathological signs of arthritis, and wherein the histopathological signs of arthritis are performed on a joint and scored using the following system: 0=no detectable pathology, 1=hyperplasia of the synovial membrane and presence of polymorphonuclear infiltrates, 2=pannus and fibrous tissue formation and focal subchondral bone erosion, 3=articular cartilage destruction and bone erosion, 4=extensive articular cartilage destruction and bone erosion.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises a human single domain antibody polypeptide. In another embodiment, the human single domain antibody polypeptide binds TNFα. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα with a Kd of <100 nM. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα with a Kd in the range of 100 nM to 50 pM. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα with a Kd of 30 nM to 50 pM. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα with a Kd of 10 nM to 50 pM. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα with a Kd in the range of 1 nM to 50 pM.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct antagonizes human TNFα as measured in a standard L929 cytotoxicity cell assay.
The invention further encompasses a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis, the method comprising administering to an individual in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct inhibits the binding of human TNFα to a TNFα receptor, and whereby the rheumatoid arthritis is treated.
In one embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct specifically binds to human TNF-α which is bound to a cell surface receptor.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tα-half life in the range of 15 minutes to 12 hours. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tβ-half life in the range of 1 to 6 hours. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tβ-half life in the range of 2 to 5 hours. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tβ-half life in the range of 3 to 4 hours. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tβ-half life in the range of 12 to 60 hours. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tβ-half life in the range of 12 to 48 hours. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tβ-half life in the range of 12 to 26 hours.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo AUC half-life value of 15 mg.min/ml to 150 mg.min/ml. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo AUC half-life value of 15 mg.min/ml to 100 mg.min/ml. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo AUC half-life value of 15 mg.min/ml to 75 mg.min/ml. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo AUC half-life value of 15 mg.min/ml to 50 mg.min/ml.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct is linked to a PEG molecule. In another embodiment, the PEG-linked single domain antibody polypeptide construct has a hydrodynamic size of at least 24 kDa, and wherein the total PEG size is from 20 to 60 kDa. In another embodiment, the PEG-linked single domain antibody polypeptide construct has a hydrodynamic size of at least 200 kDa and a total PEG size of from 20 to 60 kDa. In another embodiment, the PEGylated proteins of the invention may be linked, on average, to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 20, or more polyethylene glycol molecules.
In another embodiment, the antibody construct comprises two or more single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptides that bind human TNFα. In another embodiment, the antibody construct comprises a homodimer of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide that binds human TNFα. In another embodiment, the antibody construct comprises a homotrimer of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide that binds human TNFα. In another embodiment, the antibody construct comprises a homotetramer of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide that binds human TNFα.
In another embodiment, the construct further comprises an antibody polypeptide specific for an antigen other than TNFα. In another embodiment, the antibody polypeptide specific for an antigen other than TNFα comprises a single domain antibody polypeptide. In another embodiment, the binding of the antigen other than TNFα by the antibody polypeptide specific for an antigen other than TNFα increases the in vivo half-life of the antibody polypeptide construct. In another embodiment, the antigen other than TNFα comprises a serum protein. In another embodiment, the serum protein is selected from the group consisting of fibrin, α-2 macroglobulin, serum albumin, fibrinogen A, fibrinogen, serum amyloid protein A, heptaglobin, protein, ubiquitin, uteroglobulin and β-2-microglobulin. In another embodiment, the antigen other than TNFα comprises HSA.
In another embodiment, the treating further comprises administration of at least one additional therapeutic agent.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of CDR3 of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30, TAR1-2m-1, TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-5-461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30, TAR1-2m-1, TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-5-461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19 or an amino acid sequence at least 85% identical thereto.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30, TAR1-2m-1, TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-5-461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19 or an amino acid sequence at least 90% identical thereto.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30, TAR1-2m-1, TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-5-461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19 or an amino acid sequence at least 92% identical thereto.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30, TAR1-2m-1, TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-5-461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1l-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19 or an amino acid sequence at least 94% identical thereto.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30, TAR1-2m-1, TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19 or an amino acid sequence at least 96% identical thereto.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30, TAR1-2m-1, TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19 or an amino acid sequence at least 98% identical thereto.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30, TAR1-2m-1, TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-5-461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19 or an amino acid sequence at least 99% identical thereto.
The invention further encompasses a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis, the method comprising administering to an individual in need thereof, a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor, wherein the composition prevents an increase in arthritic score when administered to a mouse of the Tg197 transgenic mouse model of arthritis, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα with a Kd of <100 nM, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct neutralizes human TNFα as measured in a standard L929 cell assay, and wherein the rheumatoid arthritis is treated.
The invention further encompasses a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor, and that prevents an increase in arthritic score when administered to a mouse of the Tg1 97 transgenic mouse model of arthritis, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct neutralizes human TNFα as measured in a standard L929 cell assay.
The invention further encompasses a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor, that prevents an increase in arthritic score when administered to a mouse of the Tg197 transgenic mouse model of arthritis, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct inhibits the progression of the rheumatoid arthritis.
The invention further encompasses a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor, that prevents an increase in arthritic score when administered to a mouse of the Tg197 transgenic mouse model of arthritis, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα with a Kd of <100 nM.
The invention further encompasses a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor, that prevents an increase in arthritic score when administered to a mouse of the Tg197 transgenic mouse model of arthritis, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct neutralizes human TNFα as measured in a standard L929 cell assay, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct inhibits the progression of the rheumatoid arthritis, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα with a Kd of <100 nM.
In a further embodiment of the preceding 3 embodiments, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of CDR3 of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30,TAR1-2m-1,TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701,TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-1 1, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-5-461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19.
In a further embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30,TAR1-2m-1,TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-5-461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19 or an amino acid sequence at least 85% identical thereto.
In a further embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30, TAR1-2m-1, TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-5-461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19 or an amino acid sequence at least 90% identical thereto.
In a further embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30, TAR1-2m-1, TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-5-461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19 or an amino acid sequence at least 92% identical thereto.
In a further embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30, TAR1-2m-1, TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-5-461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19 or an amino acid sequence at least 94% identical thereto.
In a further embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30, TAR1-2m-1, TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-5-461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19 or an amino acid sequence at least 96% identical thereto.
In a further embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30, TAR1-2m-1, TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-5-461, TAR1-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19 or an amino acid sequence at least 98% identical thereto.
In a further embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30, TAR1-2m-1, TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-5-461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-100-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19 or an amino acid sequence at least 98% identical thereto.
In a further embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR1-2m-9, TAR1-2m-30, TAR1-2m-1, TAR1-2m-2, TAR1-5, TAR1-27, TAR1-261, TAR1-398, TAR1-701, TAR1-5-2, TAR1-5-3, TAR1-5-4, TAR1-5-7, TAR1-5-8, TAR1-5-10, TAR1-5-11, TAR1-5-12, TAR1-5-13, TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-20, TAR1-5-21, TAR1-5-22, TAR1-5-23, TAR1-5-24, TAR1-5-25, TAR1-5-26, TAR1-5-27, TAR1-5-28, TAR1-5-29, TAR1-5-34, TAR1-5-35, TAR1-5-36, TAR1-5-464, TAR1-5-463, TAR1-5-460, TAR1-5-461, TAR1-5-479, TAR1-5-477, TAR1-5-478, TAR1-5-476, TAR1-5-490, TAR1h-1, TAR1h-2, TAR1h-3, TAR1-100-29, TAR1-100-35, TAR1-100-43, TAR1-100-47, TAR1-100-52, TAR1-109, TAR1-100, TAR1-100-34, TAR1-100-36, TAR1-100-38, TAR1-100-39, TAR1-100-40, TAR1-100-41, TAR1-100-45, TAR1-100-60, TAR1-100-62, TAR1-100-64, TAR1-100-65, TAR1-100-75, TAR1-100-76, TAR1-100-77, TAR1-100-78, TAR1-100-80, TAR1-100-82, TAR1-100-83, TAR1-100-84, TAR1-100-89, TAR1-100-90, TAR1-100-91, TAR1-100-92, TAR1-100-93, TAR1-100-94, TAR1-100-95, TAR1-100-96, TAR1-100-97, TAR1-100-98, TAR1-100-99, TAR1-100-100, TAR1-100-101, TAR1-100-102, TAR1-100-103, TAR1-100-105, TAR1-100-106, TAR1-100-107, TAR1-100-108, TAR1-100-109, TAR1-100-110, TAR1-100-111, TAR1-112, TAR1-100-113 and TAR1-5-19 or an amino acid sequence at least 99% identical thereto.
The invention further encompasses a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis, the method comprising administering to an individual in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human VEGF's binding to a receptor, whereby the rheumatoid arthritis is treated.
In one embodiment the composition prevents an increase in arthritic score when administered to a mouse from a collagen induced arthritis (CIA) mouse model. Immunization of DBA/1 mice with murine type II collagen induces a chronic relapsing polyarthritis that provides a strong model for human autoimmune arthritis. The model is described, for example, by Courtenay et al., 1980, Nature 282:666-668, Kato et al., 1996, Ann. Rheum. Dis. 55:535-539 and Myers et al., 1997, Life Sci. 61:1861-1878, each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
In one embodiment the administration of the composition to the mouse comprises the following steps: a) administer weekly intraperitoneal injections of the composition to the CIA mouse, b) weigh the mouse of step a) weekly, and c) score the mouse weekly for macrophenotypic signs of arthritis according to the following system: 0=no arthritis (normal appearance and flexion), 1=mild arthritis (joint distortion), 2=moderate arthritis (swelling, joint deformation), 3=heavy arthritis (severely impaired movement).
In one embodiment the treating comprises inhibiting the progression of the rheumatoid arthritis.
In one embodiment the treating comprises preventing or delaying the onset of rheumatoid arthritis.
In one embodiment the administering results in a statistically significant change in one or more indicia of RA. The change is preferably by at least 10% or more.
In one embodiment the one or more indicia of RA comprise one or more of erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR), Ritchie articular index (described in Ritchie et al., 1968, Q. J. Med. 37: 393-406) and duration of morning stiffness, joint mobility, joint swelling, analysis by x ray imaging of one or more joints, and histopathological indications by analysis of fixed sections of one or more joints. Disease activity and change effected with treatment can also be evaluated using the disease activity score (DAS) and/or the chronic arthritis systemic index (CASI), see Carotti et al., 2002, Ann. Rheum. Dis. 61:877-882, and Salaffi et al., 2000, Rheumatology 39: 90-96.
In one embodiment the one or more indicia of RA comprises a decrease in the macrophenotypic signs of arthritis in a mouse from a collagen induced arthritis mouse model, wherein the composition is administered to the mouse, wherein the mouse is scored for the macrophenotypic signs of arthritis, and wherein the macrophenotypic signs of arthritis are scored according to the following system: 0=no arthritis (normal appearance and flexion), 1=mild arthritis (joint distortion), 2=moderate arthritis (swelling, joint deformation), 3=heavy arthritis (severely impaired movement).
In one embodiment the one or more indicia of RA comprises a decrease in the histopathological signs of arthritis in a mouse from a collagen induced arthritis mouse model, wherein the composition is administered to the mouse, wherein the mouse is scored for the histopathological signs of arthritis, and wherein the histopathological signs of arthritis are performed on a joint and scored using the following system: 0=no detectable pathology, 1=hyperplasia of the synovial membrane and presence of polymorphonuclear infiltrates, 2=pannus and fibrous tissue formation and focal subchondral bone erosion, 3=articular cartilage destruction and bone erosion, 4=extensive articular cartilage destruction and bone erosion.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises a human single domain antibody polypeptide.
In one embodiment the human single domain antibody polypeptide binds VEGF.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human VEGF with a Kd of <100 nM.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human VEGF with a Kd in the range of 100 nM to 50 pM.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human VEGF with a Kd of 30 nM to 50 pM.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human VEGF with a Kd of 10 nM to 50 pM.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human VEGF with a Kd in the range of 1 nm to 50 pM.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct neutralizes human VEGF as measured in a VEGF receptor 1 assay or a VEGF receptor 2 assay.
The invention further encompasses a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis, the method comprising administering to an individual in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human VEGF's's binding to a receptor, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct inhibits the binding of human VEGF to a VEGF receptor, and whereby the rheumatoid arthritis is treated.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct specifically binds to human VEGF which is bound to a cell surface receptor.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct is linked to a PEG molecule.
In one embodiment the PEG-linked single domain antibody polypeptide construct has a hydrodynamic size of at least 24 kDa, and wherein the total PEG size is from 20 to 60 kDa.
In one embodiment the PEG-linked single domain antibody polypeptide construct has a hydrodynamic size of at least 200 kDa and a total PEG size of from 20 to 60 kDa.
In one embodiment the PEGylated proteins of the invention may be linked, on average, to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 20, or more polyethylene glycol molecules.
In one embodiment the antibody construct comprises two or more single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptides that bind human VEGF.
In one embodiment the antibody construct comprises a homodimer of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide that binds human VEGF.
In one embodiment the antibody construct comprises a homotrimer of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide that binds human VEGF.
In one embodiment the antibody construct comprises a homotetramer of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide that binds human VEGF.
In one embodiment the construct further comprises an antibody polypeptide specific for an antigen other than VEGF.
In one embodiment the antibody polypeptide specific for an antigen other than VEGF comprises a single domain antibody polypeptide.
In one embodiment the binding of the antigen other than VEGF by the antibody polypeptide specific for an antigen other than VEGF increases the in vivo half-life of the antibody polypeptide construct.
In one embodiment the antigen other than VEGF comprises a serum protein.
In one embodiment the serum protein is selected from the group consisting of fibrin, α-2 macroglobulin, serum albumin, fibrinogen A, fibrinogen, serum amyloid protein A, heptaglobin, protein, ubiquitin, uteroglobulin and β-2-microglobulin.
In one embodiment the antigen other than VEGF comprises HSA.
In one embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tα-half life in the range of 15 minutes to 12 hours. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tβ-half life in the range of 1 to 6 hours.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tβ-half life in the range of 2 to 5 hours. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tβ-half life in the range of 3 to 4 hours.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tβ-half life in the range of 12 to 60 hours. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tβ-half life in the range of 12 to 48 hours.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tβ-half life in the range of 12 to 26 hours. In another embodiment, single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo AUC half-life value of 15 mg.min/ml to 150 mg.min/ml. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo AUC half-life value of 15 mg.min/ml to 100 mg.min/ml. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo AUC half-life value of 15 mg.min/ml to 75 mg.min/ml. In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo AUC half-life value of 15 mg.min/ml to 50 mg.min/ml.
In one embodiment the treating further comprises administration of at least one additional therapeutic agent.
In one embodiment the therapeutic agent is selected from the group consisting of Etanercept, inflixmab and D2E7.
In one embodiment the therapeutic agent is selected from the group consisting of Corticosteroids, Proteolytic enzymes, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NTHES), Acetylsalicylic acid, pyrazolones, fenamate, diflunisal, acetic acid derivatives, propionic acid derivatives, oxicams, mefenamic acid, Ponstel, meclofenamate, Meclomen, phenylbutazone, Butazolidin, diflunisal, Dolobid, diclofenac, Voltaren, indomethacin, Indocin, sulindac, Clinoril, etodolac, Lodine, ketorolac, Toradol, nabumetone, Relafen, tolmetin, Tolectin, ibuprofen, Motrin, fenoprofen, Nalfon, flurbiprofen, Anthe, carprofen, Rimadyl, ketoprofen, Orudis, naproxen, Anaprox, Naprosyn, piroxicam and Feldene.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of CDR3 of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-19, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR15-30.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-19, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR15-30 or an amino acid sequence at least 85% identical thereto.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-19, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR15-30 or an amino acid sequence at least 90% identical thereto.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-19, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR15-30 or an amino acid sequence at least 92% identical thereto.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-19, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR15-30 or an amino acid sequence at least 94% identical thereto.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-19, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR15-30 or an amino acid sequence at least 96% identical thereto.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-19, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR15-30 or an amino acid sequence at least 98% identical thereto.
In one embodiment the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises the amino acid sequence of an antibody polypeptide selected from the group consisting of clones TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-19, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR15-30 or an amino acid sequence at least 99% identical thereto.
The invention further encompasses a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human VEGF binding to a receptor, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises a CDR3 sequence selected from the group consisting of TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-19, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR15-30.
The invention further encompasses a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human VEGF binding to a receptor, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-19, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR15-30 or a sequence at least 85% identical thereto.
The invention further encompasses a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human VEGF binding to a receptor, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR15-30 or a sequence at least 90% identical thereto.
The invention further encompasses a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human VEGF binding to a receptor, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-19, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR1 5-30 or a sequence at least 92% identical thereto.
The invention further encompasses a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human VEGF binding to a receptor, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-19, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR15-30 or a sequence at least 94% identical thereto.
The invention further encompasses a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human VEGF binding to a receptor, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-19, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR15-30 or a sequence at least 96% identical thereto.
The invention further encompasses a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human VEGF binding to a receptor, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-19, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR15-30 or a sequence at least 98% identical thereto.
The invention further encompasses a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human VEGF binding to a receptor, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of TAR15-1, TAR15-3, TAR15-4, TAR15-9, TAR15-10, TAR15-11, TAR15-12, TAR15-13, TAR15-14, TAR15-15, TAR15-16, TAR15-17, TAR15-18, TAR15-19, TAR15-20, TAR15-22, TAR15-5, TAR15-6, TAR15-7, TAR15-8, TAR15-23, TAR15-24, TAR15-25, TAR15-26, TAR15-27, TAR15-29, and TAR15-30 or a sequence at least 99% identical thereto.
The invention further encompasses a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis, the method comprising administering to an individual in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition, wherein the composition comprises a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor and antagonizes human VEGF's binding to a receptor, whereby the rheumatoid arthritis is treated.
In one embodiment, the composition prevents an increase in arthritic score when administered to a mouse of the Tg197 transgenic mouse model of arthritis.
In another embodiment, the administration of the composition to a Tg197 transgenic mouse comprises the following steps: a) administer weekly intraperitoneal injections of the composition to a heterozygous Tg197 transgenic mouse, b) weigh the mouse of step a) weekly, and c) score the mouse weekly for macrophenotypic signs of arthritis according to the following system: 0=no arthritis (normal appearance and flexion), 1=mild arthritis (joint distortion), 2=moderate arthritis (swelling, joint deformation), 3=heavy arthritis (severely impaired movement).
In another embodiment, the composition has an efficacy in the Tg197 transgenic mouse arthritis assay that is greater than or equal, within the realm of statistical significance, to that of an agent selected from the group consisting of Etanercept, Infliximab and D2E7.
In another embodiment, the treating comprises inhibiting the progression of the rheumatoid arthritis.
In another embodiment, the treating comprises preventing or delaying the onset of rheumatoid arthritis.
In another embodiment, the administering results in a statistically significant change in one or more indicia of RA.
In another embodiment, the one or more indicia of RA comprise one or more of erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR), Ritchie articular index and duration of morning stiffness, joint mobility, joint swelling, x ray imaging of one or more joints, and histopathological analysis of fixed sections of one or more joints.
In another embodiment, the one or more indicia of RA comprises a decrease in the macrophenotypic signs of arthritis in a Tg197 transgenic mouse, wherein the composition is administered to a Tg197 transgenic mouse, wherein the Tg197 transgenic mouse is scored for the macrophenotypic signs of arthritis, and wherein the macrophenotypic signs of arthritis are scored according to the following system: 0=no arthritis (normal appearance and flexion), 1=mild arthritis (joint distortion), 2=moderate arthritis (swelling, joint deformation), 3=heavy arthritis (severely impaired movement).
In another embodiment, the one or more indicia of RA comprises a decrease in the histopathological signs of arthritis in a Tg197 transgenic mouse, wherein the composition is administered to a Tg197 transgenic mouse, wherein the Tg197 transgenic mouse is scored for the histopathological signs of arthritis, and wherein the histopathological signs of arthritis are performed on a joint and scored using the following system: 0=no detectable pathology, 1=hyperplasia of the synovial membrane and presence of polymorphonuclear infiltrates, 2=pannus and fibrous tissue formation and focal subchondral bone erosion, 3=articular cartilage destruction and bone erosion, 4=extensive articular cartilage destruction and bone erosion.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct comprises a human single domain antibody polypeptide.
In another embodiment, the human single domain antibody polypeptide binds TNFα and VEGF.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct neutralizes human TNFα as measured in a standard L929 cell assay.
In another embodiment, the single domain antibody polypeptide construct is linked to a PEG molecule.
In another embodiment, the PEG-linked single domain antibody polypeptide construct has a hydrodynamic size of at least 24 kDa, and wherein the total PEG size is from 20 to 60 kDa.
In another embodiment, the PEG-linked single domain antibody polypeptide construct has a hydrodynamic size of at least 200 kDa and a total PEG size of from 20 to 60 kDa.
In another embodiment, the antibody polypeptide construct is linked, on average, to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 20, or more polyethylene glycol molecules.
In another embodiment, the antibody construct comprises two or more single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptides that bind human TNFα and/or two or more single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptides that bind human VEGF.
In another embodiment, the antibody construct comprises a homodimer of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide that binds human TNFα and/or a homodimer of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide that binds human VEGF.
In another embodiment, the antibody construct comprises a homotrimer of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide that binds human TNFα and/or a homotrimer of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide that binds human VEGF.
In another embodiment, the antibody construct comprises a homotetramer of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide that binds human TNFα and/or a homotetramer of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide that binds human VEGF.
In another embodiment, the construct further comprises an antibody polypeptide specific for an antigen other than TNFα or VEGF.
In another embodiment, the antibody polypeptide specific for an antigen other than TNFα or VEGF comprises a single domain antibody polypeptide.
In another embodiment, the binding of the antigen other than TNFα or VEGF by the antibody polypeptide specific for an antigen other than TNFα or VEGF increases the in vivo half-life of the antibody polypeptide construct.
In another embodiment, the antigen other than TNFα or VEGF comprises a serum protein.
In another embodiment, the serum protein is selected from the group consisting of fibrin, α-2 macroglobulin, serum albumin, fibrinogen A, fibrinogen, serum amyloid protein A, heptaglobin, protein, ubiquitin, uteroglobulin and β-2-microglobulin.
In another embodiment, the antigen other than TNFα comprises HSA.
In another embodiment, the treating further comprises administration of at least one additional therapeutic agent.
The invention further encompasses a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor and that antagonizes human's VEGF's binding to a receptor, that prevents an increase in arthritic score when administered to a mouse of the Tg197 transgenic mouse model of arthritis, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct inhibits the progression of the rheumatoid arthritis.
The invention further encompasses a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor and that antagonizes human's VEGF's binding to a receptor, that prevents an increase in arthritic score when administered to a mouse of the Tg197 transgenic mouse model of arthritis, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα with a Kd of <100 nM.
The invention further encompasses a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor and that antagonizes human's VEGF's binding to a receptor, that prevents an increase in arthritic score when administered to a mouse of the Tg197 transgenic mouse model of arthritis, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct neutralizes human TNFα as measured in a standard L929 cell assay, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct inhibits the progression of the rheumatoid arthritis, wherein the single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα with a Kd of <100 nM.
Another aspect is a method for selecting a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor, that prevents an increase in arthritic score when administered to a mouse of the Tg197 transgenic mouse model of arthritis, wherein said single domain antibody polypeptide construct neutralizes human TNFα as measured in a standard L929 cell assay, wherein said single domain antibody polypeptide construct inhibits the progression of said rheumatoid arthritis, and wherein said single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα with a Kd of <100 nM, comprising the following steps: (1) mutating nucleic acid encoding several hypervariable region sites of said single domain antibody polypeptide construct, so that all possible amino substitutions are generated at each site, (2) introducing nucleic acid encoding the mutated hypervariable region sites generated in step (1) into a phagemid display vector, to form a large population of display vectors each capable of expressing one of said mutated hypervariable region sites displayed on a phagemid surface display protein; (3) expressing the mutated hypervariable region sites on the surface of a filamentous phage particle so that the mutated hypervariable region sites thus generated are displayed in a monovalent fashion from filamentous phage particles as fusions to the gene III product of M13 packaged within each particle, (4) screening the surface-expressed phage particle for the ability to bind TNFa, (5) isolating those surface-expressed phage particle able to bind TNFa, (6) selecting a surface-expressed phage particle from step (5) that is able to bind TNFa, that also prevents an increase in arthritic score when administered to a mouse of the Tg197 transgenic mouse model of arthritis, and neutralizes human TNFα as measured in a standard L929 cell assay, and inhibits the progression of said rheumatoid arthritis, and binds human TNFα with a Kd of <100 nM, thereby selecting one or more species of phagemid containing a display protein containing a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor.
Another aspect is a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis, the method comprising administering to an individual in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human VEGF's binding to a receptor, whereby said rheumatoid arthritis is treated, wherein said single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tα-half life in the range of 15 minutes to 12 hours, 1 to 6 hours, 2 to 5 hours, or 3 to 4 hours.
Another embodiment is a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis, the method comprising administering to an individual in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human VEGF's binding to a receptor, whereby said single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo tβ-half life in the range of 12 to 60 hours, 12 to 48 hours, or 12 to 26 hours.
Another embodiment is method of treating rheumatoid arthritis, the method comprising administering to an individual in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human VEGF's binding to a receptor, whereby said single domain antibody polypeptide construct has an in vivo AUC half-life value of 15 mg.min/ml to 150 mg.min/ml, 15 mg.min/ml to 100 mg.min/ml, 15 mg.min/ml to 75 mg.min/ml, or 15 mg.min/ml to 50 mg.min/ml.
Another embodiment is a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis, the method comprising administering to an individual in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition, wherein said composition comprises a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor and antagonizes human VEGF's binding to a receptor, whereby said rheumatoid arthritis is treated, and wherein said composition prevents an increase in arthritic score when administered to a mouse of the Tg197 transgenic mouse model of arthritis, and wherein said single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα and VEGF each with a Kd of <100 nM, wherein said single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα and VEGF each with a Kd in the range of 100 nM to 50 pM, wherein said single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα and VEGF each with a Kd of 30 nM to 50 pM, wherein said single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα and VEGF each with a Kd of 10 nM to 50 pM, or wherein said single domain antibody polypeptide construct binds human TNFα and VEGF each with a Kd in the range of 1 nm to 50 pM.
Another embodiment is a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis, the method comprising administering to an individual in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor and antagonizes VEGF's binding to a receptor, wherein said single domain antibody polypeptide construct inhibits the binding of human TNFα to a TNFα receptor and of hyman VEGF to a VEGF receptor, and whereby said rheumatoid arthritis is treated.
Another embodiment is a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis, the method comprising administering to an individual in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor and antagonizes VEGF's binding to a receptor, wherein said single domain antibody polypeptide construct inhibits the binding of human TNFα to a TNFα receptor and of hyman VEGF to a VEGF receptor, and whereby said rheumatoid arthritis is treated, wherein said single domain antibody polypeptide construct specifically binds to human TNFα which is bound to a cell surface receptor.
Another embodiment is a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis, the method comprising administering to an individual in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition, wherein said composition comprises a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor and antagonizes human VEGF's binding to a receptor, whereby said rheumatoid arthritis is treated, and wherein said single domain antibody polypeptide construct specifically binds to human TNFα which is bound to a cell surface receptor.
Another embodiment of the invention is a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis comprising the administration of an antibody construct specific for TNFα, wherein the sequence of the antibody construct comprises, or consists of, a sequence with a percentage identity which is greater than or equal to 85, 90, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 or 100% to the sequence of any one of the anti-TNF-α clones recited herein. Another embodiment of the invention is a composition comprising an antibody construct specific for TNFα, wherein the sequence of the antibody construct comprises, or consists of, a sequence with a percentage identity which is greater than or equal to 85, 90, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 or 100% to the sequence of any one of the anti-TNF-α clones recited herein. Another embodiment of the invention is a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis comprising the administration of an antibody construct specific for VEGF, wherein the sequence of the antibody construct comprises, or consists of a sequence with a percentage identity which is greater than or equal to 85, 90, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 or 100% to the sequence of any one of the anti-VEGF clones recited herein. Another embodiment of the invention is a composition comprising an antibody construct specific for VEGF, wherein the sequence of the antibody construct comprises, or consists of, a sequence with a percentage identity which is greater than or equal to 85, 90, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 or 100% to the sequence of any one of the anti-VEGF clones recited herein.
Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art (e.g., in cell culture, molecular genetics, nucleic acid chemistry, hybridization techniques and biochemistry). Standard techniques are used for molecular, genetic and biochemical methods (see generally, Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 2d ed. (1989) Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y. and Ausubel et al., Short Protocols in Molecular Biology (1999) 4th Ed, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. which are incorporated herein by reference) and chemical methods.
As used herein, the term “domain” refers to a folded protein structure which retains its tertiary structure independently of the rest of the protein. Generally, domains are responsible for discrete functional properties of proteins, and in many cases may be added, removed or transferred to other proteins without loss of function of the remainder of the protein and/or of the domain.
By “single immunoglobulin variable domain” or “single domain antibody polypeptide” is meant a folded polypeptide domain which comprises sequences characteristic of immunoglobulin variable domains and which specifically binds an antigen (i.e., dissociation constant of 500 nM or less). A “single domain antibody polypeptide” therefore includes complete antibody variable domains as well as modified variable domains, for example in which one or more loops have been replaced by sequences which are not characteristic of antibody variable domains or antibody variable domains which have been truncated or comprise N- or C-terminal extensions, as well as folded fragments of variable domains which retain a dissociation constant of 500 nM or less (e.g., 450 nM or less, 400 nM or less, 350 nM or less, 300 nM or less, 250 nM or less, 200 nM or less, 150 nM or less, 100 nM or less) and the target antigen specificity of the full-length domain. Preferably an antibody single variable domain is selected from the group of VH and VL, including Vkappa and Vlambda.
The phrase “single domain antibody polypeptide construct” encompasses not only an isolated single domain antibody polypeptide, but also larger polypeptide constructs that comprise one or more monomers of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide sequence. It is stressed, that a single domain antibody polypeptide that is part of a larger construct is capable, on its own, of specifically binding a target antigen. Thus, a single domain antibody polypeptide construct that comprises more than one single domain antibody polypeptide does not encompass, for example, a construct in which a VH and a VL domain are cooperatively required to form the binding site necessary to specifically bind a single antigen molecule. The linkage between single domain antibody polypeptides in a single domain antibody polypeptide construct can be peptide or polypeptide linkers, or, alternatively, can be other chemical linkages, such as through linkage of polypeptide monomers to a multivalent PEG. The linked single domain antibody polypeptides can be identical or different, and the target specificities of the constituent polypeptides can likewise be the same or different.
Complementary: Two immunoglobulin domains are “complementary” where they belong to families of structures which form cognate pairs or groups or are derived from such families and retain this feature. For example, a VH domain and a VL domain of an antibody are complementary; two VH domains are not complementary, and two V domains are not complementary. Complementary domains may be found in other members of the immunoglobulin superfamily, such as the Vα and Vβ (or γ and δ) domains of the T-cell receptor. In the context of the second configuration of the invention, non-complementary domains do not bind a target molecule cooperatively, but act independently on different target epitopes which may be on the same or different molecules. Domains which are artificial, such as domains based on protein scaffolds which do not bind epitopes unless engineered to do so, are non-complementary. Likewise, two domains based on (for example) an immunoglobulin domain and a fibronectin domain are not complementary.
Immunoglobulin: This refers to a family of polypeptides which retain the immunoglobulin fold characteristic of antibody molecules, which contains two β sheets and, usually, a conserved disulphide bond. Members of the immunoglobulin superfamily are involved in many aspects of cellular and non-cellular interactions in vivo, including widespread roles in the immune system (for example, antibodies, T-cell receptor molecules and the like), involvement in cell adhesion (for example the ICAM molecules) and intracellular signalling (for example, receptor molecules, such as the PDGF receptor).
The present invention is applicable to all immunoglobulin superfamily molecules which possess binding domains. Preferably, the present invention relates to antibodies.
Combining: Variable domains according to the invention are combined to form a group of domains; for example, complementary domains may be combined, such as VL domains being combined with VH domains. Non-complementary domains may also be combined. Domains may be combined in a number of ways, involving linkage of the domains by covalent or non-covalent means.
Closed conformation multi-specific ligand: The phrase describes a multi-specific ligand as herein defined comprising at least two epitope binding domains as herein deemed. The term ‘closed conformation’ (multi-specific ligand) means that the epitope binding domains of the ligand are arranged such that epitope binding by one epitope binding domain competes with epitope binding by another epitope binding domain. That is, cognate epitopes may be bound by each epitope binding domain individually but not simultaneously. The closed conformation of the ligand can be achieved using methods herein described.
Antibody: An antibody (for example IgG, IgM, IgA, IgD or IgE) or fragment (such as a Fab, F(ab′)2, Fv, disulphide linked Fv, scFv, closed conformation multispecific antibody, disulphide-linked scFv, diabody) whether derived from any species naturally producing an antibody, or created by recombinant DNA technology; whether isolated from serum, B-cells, hybridomas, transfectomas, yeast or bacteria).
Dual-specific ligand: A ligand comprising a first immunoglobulin single variable domain and a second immunoglobulin single variable domain as herein defined, wherein the variable regions are capable of binding to two different antigens or two epitopes on the same antigen which are not normally bound by a monospecific immunoglobulin. For example, the two epitopes may be on the same hapten, but are not the same epitope or sufficiently adjacent to be bound by a monospecific ligand. The dual specific ligands according to the invention are composed of variable domains which have different specificities, and do not contain mutually complementary variable domain pairs which have the same specificity.
Antigen: A molecule that is bound by a ligand according to the present invention. Typically, antigens are bound by antibody ligands and are capable of raising an antibody response in vivo. It may be a polypeptide, protein, nucleic acid or other molecule. Generally, the dual specific ligands according to the invention are selected for target specificity against a particular antigen. In the case of conventional antibodies and fragments thereof, the antibody binding site defined by the variable loops (L1, L2, L3 and H1, H2, H3) is capable of binding to the antigen.
Epitope: A unit of structure conventionally bound by an immunoglobulin VH/VL pair. Epitopes define the minimum binding site for an antibody, and thus represent the target of specifcity of an antibody. In the case of a single domain antibody, an epitope represents the unit of structure bound by a variable domain in isolation.
Generic ligand: A ligand that binds to all members of a repertoire. Generally, not bound through the antigen binding site as defined above. Non-limiting examples include protein A, protein L and protein G.
Selecting: Derived by screening, or derived by a Darwinian selection process, in which binding interactions are made between a domain and the antigen or epitope or between an antibody and an antigen or epitope. Thus a first variable domain may be selected for binding to an antigen or epitope in the presence or in the absence of a complementary variable domain.
Universal framework: A single antibody framework sequence corresponding to the regions of an antibody conserved in sequence as defined by Kabat (“Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest”, US Department of Health and Human Services) or corresponding to the human germline immunoglobulin repertoire or structure as defined by Chothia and Lesk, (1987) J. Mol. Biol. 196:910-917. The invention provides for the use of a single framework, or a set of such frameworks, which has been found to permit the derivation of virtually any binding specificity though variation in the hypervariable regions alone.
Homogeneous immunoassay: An immunoassay in which analyte is detected without need for a step of separating bound and un-bound reagents.
Substantially identical (or “substantially homologous”): A first amino acid or nucleotide sequence that contains a sufficient number of identical or equivalent (e.g., with a similar side chain, e.g., conserved amino acid substitutions) amino acid residues or nucleotides to a second amino acid or nucleotide sequence such that the first and second amino acid or nucleotide sequences have similar activities. In the case of antibodies, the second antibody has the same binding specificity and has at least 50% of the affinity of the same.
A “domain antibody” or “dAb” is equivalent to a “single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide” or a “single domain antibody polypeptide” as the term is used herein.
As used herein, the phrase “specifically binds” refers to the binding of an antigen by an immunoglobulin variable domain with a dissociation constant (Kd) of 1 μM or lower as measured by surface plasmon resonance analysis using, for example, a BIAcore™ surface plasmon resonance system and BIAcore™ kinetic evaluation software (e.g., version 2.1). The affinity or Kd for a specific binding interaction is preferably about 500 nM or lower, more preferably about 300 nM or lower.
As used herein, the term “high affinity binding” refers to binding with a Kd of less than or equal to 100 nM.
As used herein, the phrase “human single domain antibody polypeptide” refers to a polypeptide having a sequence derived from a human germline immunoglobulin V region. A sequence is “derived from a human germline V region” when the sequence is either isolated from a human individual, isolated from a library of cloned human antibody gene sequences (or a library of human antibody V region gene sequences), or when a cloned human germline V region sequence was used to generate one or more diversified sequences (by random or targeted mutagenesis) that were then selected for binding to a desired target antigen. At a minimum, a human immunoglobulin variable domain has at least 85% amino acid similarity (including, for example, 87%, 90%, 93%, 95%, 97%, 99% or higher similarity) to a naturally-occurring human immunoglobulin variable domain sequence.
Alternatively, or in addition, “a human immunoglobulin variable domain” is a variable domain that comprises four human immunoglobulin variable domain framework regions (W1-FW4), as framework regions are set forth by Kabat et al. (1991, supra). The “human immunoglobulin variable domain framework regions” encompass a) an amino acid sequence of a human framework region, and b) a framework region that comprises at least 8 contiguous amino acids of the amino acid sequence of a human framework region. A human immunoglobulin variable domain can comprise amino acid sequences of FW1-FW4 that are the same as the amino acid sequences of corresponding framework regions encoded by a human germline antibody gene segment, or it can also comprise a variable domain in which FW1-FW4 sequences collectively contain up to 10 amino acid sequence differences, up to 9 amino acid sequence differences, up to 8 amino acid sequence differences, up to 7 amino acid sequence differences, up to 6 amino acid sequence differences, up to 5 amino acid sequence differences, up to 4 amino acid sequence differences, up to 3 amino acid sequence differences, up to 2 amino acid sequence differences, or up to 1 amino acid sequence differences, relative to the amino acid sequences of corresponding framework regions encoded by a human germline antibody gene segment.
A “human immunoglobulin variable domain” as defined herein has the capacity to specifically bind an antigen on its own, whether the variable domain is present as a single immunoglobulin variable domain alone, or as a single immunoglobulin variable domain in association with one or more additional polypeptide sequences. A “human immunoglobulin variable domain” as the term is used herein does not encompass a “humanized” immunoglobulin polypeptide, i.e., a non-human (e.g., mouse, camel, etc.) immunoglobulin that has been modified in the constant regions to render it less immunogenic in humans.
As used herein, the phrase “sequence characteristic of immunoglobulin variable domains” refers to an amino acid sequence that is homologous, over 20 or more, 25 or more, 30 or more, 35 or more, 40 or more, 45 or more, or even 50 or more contiguous amino acids, to a sequence comprised by an immunoglobulin variable domain sequence.
By “rheumatoid arthritis” (RA) is meant a disease which involves inflammation in the lining of the joints and/or other internal organs. RA typically affects many different joints. It is typically chronic, and can be a disease of flare-ups. RA is a systemic disease that affects the entire body and is one of the most common forms of arthritis. It is characterized by the inflammation of the membrane lining the joint, which causes pain, stiffness, warmth, redness and swelling. The inflamed joint lining, the synovium, can invade and damage bone and cartilage. Inflammatory cells release enzymes that may digest bone and cartilage. The involved joint can lose its shape and alignment, resulting in pain and loss of movement. Symptoms include inflammation of joints, swelling, difficulty moving and pain. Other symptoms include loss of appetite, fever, loss of energy, anemia. Other features include lumps (rheumatoid nodules) under the skin in areas subject to pressure (e.g., back of elbows). Rheumatoid arthritis is clinically scored on the basis of several clinically accepted scales, such as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,698,195, which is incorporated herein by reference. Briefly, clinical response studies can assess the following parameters:
1. Number of tender joints and assessment of pain/tenderness
2. Number of swollen joints
3. Duration of morning stiffness (in minutes)
4. Grip strength
5. Visual analog pain scale (0-10 cm)
6. Patients and blinded evaluators are asked to assess the clinical response to the drug. Clinical response is assessed using a subjective scoring system as follows:
The cause of rheumatoid arthritis is not yet known. However, it is known that RA is an autoimmune disease, resulting in the immune system attacking healthy joint tissue and causing inflammation and subsequent joint damage. Many people with RA have a certain genetic marker called HLA-DR4.
As used herein, the phrase “TNF-α related disorder” refers to a disease or disorder in which the administration of an agent that neutralizes or antagonizes the function of TNF-α is effective, alone or in conjunction with one or more additional agents or treatments, to treat such disorder as the term “treatment” is defined herein.
As used herein, the terms “treating” or “treatment” refer to a prevention of the onset of disease or a symptom of disease, inhibition of the progression of a disease or a symptom of a disease, or the reversal of disease or a disease symptom.
As used herein, the phrase “prevention of the onset of disease” means that one or more symptoms or measurable parameters of a given disease, e.g., rheumatoid arthritis, does not occur in an individual predisposed to such disease.
As used herein, the phrase “inhibition of the progression of disease” means that treatment with an agent either halts or slows the increase in severity of symptoms of a disease which has already manifested itself in the individual being treated, relative to progression in the absence of such treatment.
As used herein, the phrase “reversal of disease” means that one or more symptoms or measurable parameters of disease improves following administration of an agent, relative to that symptom or parameter prior to such administration. An “improvement” in a symptom or measurable parameter is evidenced by a statistically significant, but preferably at least a 10%, favorable difference in such a measurable parameter. Measurable parameters can include, for example, both those that are directly measurable as well as those that are indirectly measurable. Non- limiting examples of directly measurable parameters include joint size, joint mobility, arthritic and histopathological scores or indicia and serum levels of an indicator, such as a cytokine. Indirectly measurable parameters include, for example, patient perception of discomfort or lack of mobility or a clinically accepted scale for rating disease severity.
As used herein, an “increase” in a parameter, e.g., an arthritic score or other measurable parameter, refers to a statistically significant increase in that parameter. Alternatively, an “increase” refers to at least a 10% increase. Similarly, a “decrease” in such a parameter refers to a statistically significant decrease in the parameter, or alternatively, to at least a 10% reduction.
As used herein, the term “antagonizes” means that an agent interferes with an activity. Where the activity is that of, for example, TNF-α, VEGF or another biologically active molecule or cytokine, the term encompasses inhibition (by at least 10%) of an activity of that molecule or cytokine, including as non-limiting examples, binding to or interaction with a receptor (in vitro or on a cell surface in culture or in vivo), intracellular signaling, cytotoxicity, mitogenesis, or other downstream effect or process (e.g., gene activation) mediated by that molecule or cytokine. Antagonism encompasses interference with receptor binding by the factor, e.g., TNF, VEGF, etc., as well as interference with the activity of the factor when the factor is bound to a cell-surface receptor.
As used herein, the term “greater than or equal to” means that a value is either equal to another or is greater than that value in a statistically significant manner (p<0.1, preferably p<0.05, more preferably p<0.01). Where efficacy of a composition is compared to that of another composition in, for example, disease treatment or antagonism of receptor binding, the comparison should be made on an equimolar basis.
As used herein, “linked” refers to the attachment of a polymer moiety, such as PEG to an amino acid residue of an antibody polypeptide, e.g., a single domain antibody as described herein. Attachment of a PEG polymer to an amino acid residue of an antibody polypeptide, such as a single domain antibody, is referred to as “PEGylation” and may be achieved using several PEG attachment moieties including, but not limited to N-hydroxylsuccinimide (NHS) active ester, succinimidyl propionate (SPA), maleimide (MAL), vinyl sulfone (VS), or thiol. A PEG polymer, or other polymer, can be linked to an antibody polypeptide at either a predetermined position, or may be randomly linked to the antibody molecule. It is preferred, however, that the PEG polymer be linked to an antibody polypeptide at a predetermined position. A PEG polymer may be linked to any residue in an antibody polypeptide, however, it is preferable that the polymer is linked to either a lysine or cyseine, which is either naturally occurring in an antibody polypeptide, or which has been engineered into an antibody polypeptide, for example, by mutagenesis of a naturally occurring residue in an antibody polypeptide to either a cysteine or lysine. As used herein, “linked” can also refer to the association of two or more antibody single variable domain monomers to form a dimer, trimer, tetramer, or other multimer. dAb monomers can be linked to form a multimer by several methods known in the art including, but not limited to expression of the dAb monomers as a fusion protein, linkage of two or more monomers via a peptide linker between monomers, or by chemically joining monomers after translation either to each other directly or through a linker by disulfide bonds, or by linkage to a di-, tri- or multivalent linking moiety (e.g., a multi-arm PEG).
As used herein, the phrase “directly linked” with respect to a polymer “directly linked” to an antibody polypeptide, e.g., a single variable domain polypeptide, refers to a situation in which the polymer is attached to a residue which naturally part of the variable domain, e.g., not contained within a constant region, hinge region, or linker peptide. Conversely, as used herein, the phrase “indirectly linked” to an antibody polypeptide refers to a linkage of a polymer molecule to an antibody single variable domain wherein the polymer is not attached to an amino acid residue which is part of the naturally occurring variable region (e.g., can be attached to a hinge region). A polymer is “indirectly linked” if it is linked to the antibody polypeptide via a linking peptide, that is the polymer is not attached to an amino acid residue which is a part of the antibody itself. Alternatively a polymer is “indirectly linked” to an antibody polypeptide if it is linked to a C-terminal hinge region of the polypeptide, or attached to any residues of a constant region which may be present as part of the antibody polypeptide. As used herein, the terms “homology” or “similarity” refer to the degree with which two nucleotide or amino acid sequences structurally resemble each other. As used herein, sequence “similarity” is a measure of the degree to which amino acid sequences share similar amino acid residues at corresponding positions in an alignment of the sequences. Amino acids are similar to each other where their side chains are similar. Specifically, “similarity” encompasses amino acids that are conservative substitutes for each other. A “conservative” substitution is any substitution that has a positive score in the blosum62 substitution matrix (Hentikoff and Hentikoff, 1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89: 10915-10919). By the statement “sequence A is n % similar to sequence B” is meant that n % of the positions of an optimal global alignment between sequences A and B consists of identical amino acids or conservative substitutions. Optimal global alignments can be performed using the following parameters in the Needleman-Wunsch alignment algorithm:
Typical conservative substitutions are among Met, Val, Leu and lie; among Ser and Thr; among the residues Asp, Glu and Asn; among the residues Gln, Lys and Arg; or aromatic residues Phe and Tyr.
As used herein, two sequences are “homologous” or “similar” to each other where they have at least 85% sequence similarity to each other when aligned using either the Needleman-Wunsch algorithm or the “BLAST 2 sequences” algorithm described by Tatusova & Madden, 1999, FEMS Microbiol Lett. 174:247-250. Where amino acid sequences are aligned using the “BLAST 2 sequences algorithm,” the Blosum 62 matrix is the default matrix.
As used herein, the terms “low stringency,” “medium stringency,” “high stringency,” or “very high stringency conditions” describe conditions for nucleic acid hybridization and washing. Guidance for performing hybridization reactions can be found in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, N.Y. (1989), 6.3.1-6.3.6, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Aqueous and nonaqueous methods are described in that reference and either can be used. Specific hybridization conditions referred to herein are as follows: (1) low stringency hybridization conditions in 6× sodium chloride/sodium citrate (SSC) at about 45° C., followed by two washes in 0.2×SSC, 0.1% SDS at least at 50° C. (the=temperature of the washes can be increased to 55° C. for low stringency conditions); (2) medium stringency hybridization conditions in 6×SSC at about 45° C., followed by one or more washes in 0.2×SSC, 0.1% SDS at 60° C.; (3) high stringency hybridization conditions in 6×SSC at about 45° C, followed by one or more washes in 0.2×SSC, 0.1% SDS at 65° C.; and preferably (4) very high stringency hybridization conditions are 0.5M sodium phosphate, 7% SDS at 65° C., followed by one or more washes at 0.2×SSC, 1% SDS at 65° C.
As used herein, the phrase “at a concentration of” means that a given polypeptide is dissolved in solution (preferably aqueous solution) at the recited mass or molar amount per unit volume. A polypeptide that is present “at a concentration of X” or “at a concentration of at least X” is therefore exclusive of both dried and crystallized preparations of a polypeptide.
As used herein, the term “repertoire” refers to a collection of diverse variants, for example polypeptide variants which differ in their primary sequence. A library used in the present invention will encompass a repertoire of polypeptides comprising at least 1000 members.
As used herein, the term “library” refers to a mixture of heterogeneous polypeptides or nucleic acids. The library is composed of members, each of which have a single polypeptide or nucleic acid sequence. To this extent, library is synonymous with repertoire. Sequence differences between library members are responsible for the diversity present in the library. The library may take the form of a simple mixture of polypeptides or nucleic acids, or may be in the form of organisms or cells, for example bacteria, viruses, animal or plant cells and the like, transformed with a library of nucleic acids. Preferably, each individual organism or cell contains only one or a limited number of library members. Advantageously, the nucleic acids are incorporated into expression vectors, in order to allow expression of the polypeptides encoded by the nucleic acids. In a preferred aspect, therefore, a library may take the form of a population of host organisms, each organism containing one or more copies of an expression vector containing a single member of the library in nucleic acid form which can be expressed to produce its corresponding polypeptide member. Thus, the population of host organisms has the potential to encode a large repertoire of genetically diverse polypeptide variants.
As used herein, “polymer” refers to a macromolecule made up of repeating monomeric units, and can refers to asynthetic or naturally occurring polymer such as an optionally substituted straight or branched chain polyalkylene, polyalkenylene, or polyoxyalkylene polymer or a branched or unbranched polysaccharide. A “polymer” as used herein, specifcally refers to an optionally substituted or branched chain poly(ethylene glycol), poly(propylene glycol), or poly(vinyl alcohol) and derivatives thereof.
As used herein, “PEG” or “PEG polymer” refers to polyethylene glycol, and more specifically can refer to a derivitized form of PEG, including, but not limited to N-hydroxylsuccinimide (NHS) active esters of PEG such as succinimidyl propionate, benzotriazole active esters, PEG derivatized with maleimide, vinyl sulfones, or thiol groups. Particular PEG formulations can include PEG-O—CH2CH2CH2—CO2—NHS; PEG-O—CH2—NHS; PEG-O—CH2CH2—CO2—NHS; PEG-S—CH2CH2—CO—NHS; PEG-O2CNH—CH(R)—CO2—NHS; PEG-NHCO—CH2CH2—CO—NHS; and PEG-O—CH2—CO2—NHS; where R is (CH2)4)NHCO2(mPEG). PEG polymers useful in the invention may be linear molecules, or may be branched wherein multiple PEG moieties are present in a single polymer. Some particularly preferred PEG conformations that are useful in the invention include, but are not limited to the following:
As used herein, a “sulfhydryl-selective reagent” is a reagent which is useful for the attachment of a PEG polymer to a thiol-containing amino acid. Thiol groups on the amino acid residue cysteine are particularly useful for interaction with a sulfhydryl-selective reagent. Sulfhydryl-selective reagents which are useful in the invention include, but are not limited to maleimide, vinyl sulfone, and thiol. The use of sulfhydryl-selective reagents for coupling to cysteine residues is known in the art and may be adapted as needed according to the present invention (See Eg., Zalipsky, 1995, Bioconjug. Chem. 6:150; Greenwald et al., 2000, Crit. Rev. Ther. Drug Carrier Syst. 17:101; Herman et al., 1994, Macromol. Chem. Phys. 195:203).
As used herein, the term “antigen” refers to a molecule that is bound by an antibody or a binding region (e.g., a variable domain) of an antibody. Typically, antigens are capable of raising an antibody response in vivo. An antigen can be a peptide, polypeptide, protein, nucleic acid, lipid, carbohydrate, or other molecule. Generally, an immunoglobulin variable domain is selected for target specificity against a particular antigen.
As used herein, the term “epitope” refers to a unit of structure conventionally bound by an immunoglobulin VH/VL pair. Epitopes define the minimum binding site for an antibody, and thus represent the target of specificity of an antibody. In the case of a single domain antibody, an epitope represents the unit of structure bound by a variable domain in isolation.
As used herein, the term “neutralizing,” when used in reference to a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide as described herein, means that the polypeptide interferes with a measurable activity or function of the target antigen. A polypeptide is a “neutralizing” polypeptide if it reduces a measurable activity or function of the target antigen by at least 50%, and preferably at least 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95% or more, up to and including 100% inhibition (i.e., no detectable effect or function of the target antigen). This reduction of a measurable activity or fuinction of the target antigen can be assessed by one of skill in the art using standard methods of measuring one or more indicators of such activity or function. As an example, where the target is TNF-α, neutralizing activity can be assessed using a standard L929 cell killing assay or by measuring the ability of a single immunoglobulin variable domain to inhibit TNF-α-induced expression of ELAM-1 on HUVEC, which measures TNF-α-induced cellular activation. Analogous to “neutralizing” as used herein, “inhibit cell cytotoxicity” as used herein refers to a decrease in cell death as measured, for example, using a standard L929 cell killing assay, wherein cell cytotoxicity is inhibited were cell death is reduced by at least 10% or more.
As used herein, a “measurable activity or function of a target antigen” includes, but is not limited to, for example, cell signaling, enzymatic activity, binding activity, ligand-dependent internalization, cell killing, cell activation, promotion of cell survival, and gene expression. One of skill in the art can perform assays that measure such activities for a given target antigen. Preferably, “activity”, as used herein, is defined by (1) ND50 in a cell-based assay; (2) affinity for a target ligand, (3) ELISA binding, or (4) a receptor binding assay. Methods for performing these tests are known to those of skill in the art and are described in further detail herein below.
As used herein, “retains activity” refers to a level of activity of the PEG-linked antibody polypeptide, e.g., a single variable domain, which is at least 10% of the level of activity of a non-PEG-linked antibody polypeptide, preferably at least 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80% and up to 90%, preferably up to 95%, 98%, and up to 100% of the activity of a non-PEG-linked antibody polypeptide of the same sequence, wherein activity is determined as described herein. More specifically, the activity of a PEG-linked antibody polypeptide compared to a non-PEG linked antibody polypeptide should be determined on an antibody molar basis; that is equivalent numbers of moles of each of the PEG-linked and non-PEG-linked antibody polypeptides should be used in each trial. In determining whether a particular PEG-linked antibody polypeptide “retains activity”, it is preferred that the activity of a PEG-linked antibody polypeptide be compared with the activity of the same antibody polypeptide in the absence of PEG.
As used herein, the terms “homodimer,” “homotrimer”, “homotetramer”, and “homomultimer” refer to molecules comprising two, three or more (e.g., four, five, etc.) monomers of a given single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide sequence, respectively. For example, a homodimer would include two copies of the same VH sequence. A “monomer” of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide is a single VH or VL sequence that specifically binds antigen. The monomers in a homodimer, homotrimer, homotetramer, or homomultimer can be linked either by expression as a fusion polypeptide, e.g., with a peptide linker between monomers, or, by chemically joining monomers after translation either to each other directly or through a linker by disulfide bonds, or by linkage to a di-, tri- or multivalent linking moiety. In one embodiment, the monomers in a homodimer, trimer, tetramer, or multimer can be linked by a multi-arm PEG polymer, wherein each monomer of the dimer, trimer, tetramer, or multimer is linked as described above to a PEG moiety of the multi-arm PEG.
As used herein, the terms “heterodimer,” “heterotrimer”, “heterotetramer”, and “heteromultimer” refer to molecules comprising two, three or more (e.g., four, five, six, seven and up to eight or more) monomers of two or more different single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide sequence, respectively. For example, a heterodimer would include two VH sequences, such as VH1 and VH2, or may alternatively include a combination of VH and VL. Similar to a homodimer, trimer, or tetramer, the monomers in a heterodimer, heterotrimer, heterotetramer, or heteromultimer can be linked either by expression as a fusion polypeptide, e.g., with a peptide linker between monomers, or, by chemically joining monomers after translation either to each other directly or through a linker by disulfide bonds, or by linkage to a di-, tri- or multivalent linking moiety. In one embodiment, the monomers in a heterodimer, trimer, tetramer, or multimer can be linked by a multi-arm PEG polymer, wherein each monomer of the dimer, trimer, tetramer, or multimer is linked as described above to a PEG moiety of the multi-arm PEG.
As used herein, the term “half-life” refers to the time taken for the serum concentration of a ligand (e.g., an antibody polypeptide, such as a single immunoglobulin variable domain) to reduce by 50%, in vivo, for example due to degradation of the ligand and/or clearance or sequestration of the ligand by natural mechanisms. The antibody polypeptides are stabilised in vivo and their half-life increased by binding to molecules which resist degradation and/or clearance or sequestration, such as PEG. The half-life of an antibody polypeptide, e.g., a dAb) is increased if its functional activity persists, in vivo, for a longer period than a similar dAb which is not linked to a PEG polymer. Typically, the half life of a PEGylated dAb is increased by 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50% or more relative to a non-PEGylated dAb. Increases in the range of 2×, 3×, 4×, 5×, 0×, 20×, 30×, 40×, 50× or more of the half life are possible. Alternatively, or in addition, increases in the range of up to 30×, 40×, 50×, 60×, 70×, 80×, 90', 100×, 150× of the life are possible. According to the invention, a PEG-linked antibody single variable domain has a half-life of between 0.25 and 170 hours, preferably between 1 and 100 hours, more preferably between 30 and 100 hours, and still more preferably between 50 and 100 hours, and up to 170, 180, 190, and 200 hours or more.
As used herein, “resistant to degradation” or “resists degradation” when used with respect to a PEG or other polymer linked dAb monomer or multimer means that the PEG- or other polymer-linked dAb monomer or multimer is degraded by no more than 10% when exposed to pepsin at pH 2.0 for 30 minutes and preferably not degraded at all. With specific reference to a PEG- or other polymer-linked dAb multimer (e.g., hetero- or homodimer, trimer, tetramer, etc) a molecule that is resistant to degradation is degraded by less than 5%, and is preferably not degraded at all in the presence of pepsin at pH 2.0 for 30 minutes.
As used herein, “hydrodynamic size” refers to the apparent size of a molecule (e.g., a protein molecule) based on the diffusion of the molecule through an aqueous solution. The diffusion, or motion of a protein through solution can be processed to derive an apparent size of the protein, where the size is given by the “Stokes radius” or “hydrodynamic radius” of the protein particle. The “hydrodynamic size” of a protein depends on both mass and shape (conformation), such that two proteins having the same molecular mass may have differing hydrodynamic sizes based on the overall conformation of the protein. The hydrodynamic size of a PEG-linked antibody polypeptide, e.g., a single variable domain (including antibody variable domain multimers as described herein), can be in the range of 24 kDa to 500 kDa; 30 to 500 kDa; 40 to 500 kDa; 50 to 500 kDa; 100 to 500 kDa; 150 to 500 kDa; 200 to 500 kDa; 250 to 500 kDa; 300 to 500 kDa; 350 to 500 kDa; 400 to 500 kDa and 450 to 500 kDa. Preferably the hydrodynamic size of a PEGylated dAb of the invention is 30 to 40 kDa; 70 to 80 kDa or 200 to 300 kDa. Where an antibody variable domain multimer is desired fo use in imaging applications, the multimer should have a hydrodynamic size of between 50 and 100 kDa. Alternatively, where an antibody single domain multimer is desired for therapeutic applications, the multimer should have a hydrodynamic size of greater than 200 kDa.
Dual-Specific Antibody Polypeptides:
The inventors have described, in their international patent application WO 2004/003019 a further improvement in dual specific ligands in which one specificity of the ligand is directed towards a protein or polypeptide present in vivo in an organism which can act to increase the half-life of the ligand by binding to it. WO 2004/003019 describes a dual-specific ligand comprising a first immunoglobulin single variable domain having a binding specificity to a first antigen or epitope and a second complementary immunoglobulin single variable domain having a binding activity to a second antigen or epitope, wherein one or both of said antigens or epitopes acts to increase the half-life of the ligand in vivo and wherein said first and second domains lack mutually complementary domains which share the same specificity, provided that said dual specific ligand does not consist of an anti-HSA VH domain and an anti-p galactosidase VK domain.
Antigens or epitopes which increase the half-life of a ligand as described herein are advantageously present on proteins or polypeptides found in an organism in vivo.
Examples include extracellular matrix proteins, blood proteins, and proteins present in various tissues in the organism. The proteins act to reduce the rate of ligand clearance from the blood, for example by acting as bulking agents, or by anchoring the ligand to a desired site of action. Examples of antigens/epitopes which increase half-life in vivo are given in Annex 1 below.
Increased half-life is useful in in vivo applications of immunoglobulins, especially antibodies and most especially antibody fragments of small size. Such fragments (Fvs, disulphide bonded Fvs, Fabs, scFvs, dAbs) suffer from rapid clearance from the body; thus, whilst they are able to reach most parts of the body rapidly, and are quick to produce and easier to handle, their in vivo applications have been limited by their only brief persistence in vivo. The invention solves this problem by providing increased half-life of the ligands in vivo and consequently longer persistence times in the body of the functional activity of the ligand.
Methods for pharmacokinetic analysis and determination of ligand half-life will be familiar to those skilled in the art. Details may be found in Kenneth, A et al: Chemical Stability of Pharmaceuticals: A Handbook for Pharmacists and in Peters et al, Pharmacokinetc analysis: A Practical Approach (1996). Reference is also made to “Pharmacokinetics”, M Gibaldi & D Perron, published by Marcel Dekker, 2nd Rev. Edition (1982), which describes pharmacokinetic parameters such as t alpha and t beta half lives and area under the curve (AUC).
Half lives (T1/2 alpha and T1/2 beta) and AUC can be determined from a curve of serum concentration of ligand against time. The WinNonlin analysis package (available from Pharsight Corp., Mountain View, Calif., USA) can be used, for example, to model the curve. In a first phase (the alpha phase) the ligand is undergoing mainly distribution in the patient, with some elimination. A second phase (beta phase) is the terminal phase when the ligand has been distributed and the serum concentration is decreasing as the ligand is cleared from the patient. The t alpha half life is the half life of the first phase and the t beta half life is the half life of the second phase. Thus, advantageously, the present invention provides a ligand or a composition comprising a ligand according to the invention having a tα half-life in the range of 15 minutes or more. In one embodiment, the lower end of the range is 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 5 hours, 6 hours, 7 hours, 10 hours, 11 hours or 12 hours. In addition, or alternatively,a ligand or composition according to the invention will have a tα half life in the range of up to and including 12 hours. In one embodiment, the upper end of the range is 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6 or 5 hours. An example of a suitable range is 1 to 6 hours, 2 to 5 hours or 3 to 4 hours. Advantageously, the present invention provides a ligand or a composition comprising a ligand according to the invention having a to half-life in the range of 2.5 hours or more.
In one embodiment, the lower end of the range is 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 7 hours, 10 hours, 11 hours, or 12 hours. In addition, or alternatively, a ligand or composition according to the invention has a tβ half-life in the range of up to and including 21 days. In one embodiment, the upper end of the range is 12 hours, 24 hours, 2 days, 3 days, 5 days, 10 days, 15 days or 20 days. Advantageously a ligand or composition according to the invention will have a tβ half life in the range 12 to 60 hours.
In a further embodiment, it will be in the range 12 to 48 hours. a further embodiment still, it will be in the range 12 to 26 hours.
In addition, or alternatively to the above criteria, the present invention provides a ligand or a composition comprising a ligand according to the invention having an AUC value (area under the curve) in the range of 1 mg.min/ml or more. In one embodiment, the lower end of the range is 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 100, 200 or 300mg.min/ml. In addition, or alternatively, a ligand or composition according to the invention has an AUC in the range of up to 600 mg.min/ml.
In one embodiment, the upper end of the range is 500, 400, 300, 200, 150, 100, 75 or 50 mg.min/ml. Advantageously a ligand according to the invention will have a AUC in the range selected from the group consisting of the following: 15 to 150 mg.min/ml, 15 to 100 mg.min/ml, 15 to 75 mg. min/ml, and 15 to 50mg.min/ml.
In a first embodiment, the dual specific ligand comprises two complementary variable domains, i.e. two variable domains that, in their natural environment, are capable of operating together as a cognate pair or group even if in the context of the present invention they bind separately to their : cognate epitopes. For example, the complementary variable domains may be immunoglobulin heavy chain and light chain variable domains (VH and VL). VH and VL domains are advantageously provided by scFv or Fab antibody fragments. Variable domains may be linked together to form multivalent ligands by, for example: provision of a hinge region at the C-terminus of each V domain and disulphide bonding between cysteines in the hinge regions; or provision of dAbs each with a cysteine at the C-terminus of the domain, the cysteines being disulphide bonded together; or production of V—CH & V—CL to produce a Fab format; or use of peptide linkers (for example Gly4Ser linkers discussed hereinbelow) to produce dimers, trimers and further multimers. The inventors have found that the use of complementary variable domains allows the two domain surfaces to pack together and be sequestered from the solvent. Furthermore the complementary domains are able to stabilise each other. In addition, it allows the creation of dual-specific IgG antibodies without the disadvantages of hybrid hybridomas as used in the prior art, or the need to engineer heavy or light chains at the sub-unit interfaces.
The dual-specific ligands of the first aspect of the invention have at least one VH/VL pair. A bispecific IgG according to this invention will therefore comprise two such pairs, one pair on each arm of the Y-shaped molecule. Unlike conventional bispecific antibodies or diabodies, therefore, where the ratio of chains used is determinative in the success of the preparation thereof and leads to practical difficulties, the dual specific ligands of the invention are free from issues of chain balance. Chain imbalance in conventional bi-specific antibodies results from the association of two different VL chains with two different VH chains, where VL chain 1 together with VH chain 1 is able to bind to antigen or epitope 1 and VH chain 2 together with VH chain 2 is able to bind to antigen or epitope 2 and the two correct pairings are in some way linked to one another. Thus, only when VL chain 1 is paired with VH chain 1 and VL chain 2 is paired with VH chain 2 in a single molecule is bi- specificity created. Such bi-specific molecules can be created in two different ways. Firstly, they can be created by association of two existing VH/VL pairings that each bind to a different antigen or epitope (for example, in a bi-specific IgG). In this case the VH/VL pairings must come all together in a 1:1 ratio in order to create a population of molecules all of which are bi-specific. This never occurs (even when complementary CH domain is enhanced by “knobs into holes” engineering) leading to a mixture of bi-specific molecules and molecules that are only able to bind to one antigen or epitope but not the other. The second way of creating a bi-specific antibody is by the simultaneous association of two different VH chain with two different VL chains (for example in a bi-specific diabody). In this case, although there tends to be a preference for VL chain 1 to pair with VH chain 1 and VL chain 2 to pair with VH chain 2 (which can be enhanced by “knobs into holes” engineering of the VL and VH domains), this paring is never achieved in all molecules, leading to a mixed formulation whereby incorrect pairings occur that are unable to bind to either antigen or epitope.
Bi-specific antibodies constructed according to the dual-specific ligand approach according to the first aspect of the present invention overcome all of these problems because the binding to antigen or epitope 1 resides within the VH or VL domain and the binding to antigen or epitope 2 resides with the complementary VL or VH domain, respectively. Since VH and VL domains pair on a 1:1 basis all VH/VL pairings will be bi-specific and thus all formats constructed using these VH/VL pairings (Fv, scFvs, Fabs, minibodies, IgGs etc) will have 100% bi-specific activity.
In the context of the present invention, first and second “epitopes” are understood to be epitopes which are not the same and are not bound by a single monospecific ligand. In the first configuration of the invention, they are advantageously on different antigens, one of which acts to increase the half-life of the ligand in vivo. Likewise, the first and second antigens are advantageously not the same.
The dual specific ligands of the invention do not include ligands as described in WO 02/02773. Thus, the ligands of the present invention do not comprise complementary VH/VL pairs which bind any one or more antigens or epitopes co-operatively. Instead, the ligands according to the first aspect of the invention comprise a VH/VL complementary pair, wherein the V domains have different specificities.
Moreover, the ligands according to the first aspect of the invention comprise VH/VL complementary pairs having different specificities for non-structurally related epitopes or antigens. Structurally related epitopes or antigens are epitopes or antigens which possess sufficient structural similarity to be bound by a conventional VH/VL complementary pair which acts in a co-operative manner to bind an antigen or epitope, in the case of structurally related epitopes, the epitopes are sufficiently similar in structure that they “fit” into the same binding pocket formed at the antigen binding site of the VH/VL dimer.
In a second aspect, the present invention provides a ligand comprising a first immunoglobulin variable domain having a first antigen or epitope binding specificity and a second immunoglobulin variable domain having a second antigen or epitope binding specificity wherein one or both of said first and second variable domains bind to an antigen which increases the half-life of the ligand in vivo, and the variable domains are not complementary to one another.
In one embodiment, binding to one variable domain modulates the binding of the ligand to the second variable domain.
In this embodiment, the variable domains may be, for example, pairs of VH domains or pairs of VL domains. Binding of antigen at the first site may modulate, such as enhance or inhibit, binding of an antigen at the second site. For example, binding at the first site at least partially inhibits binding of an antigen at a second site. Such an embodiment, the ligand may for example be maintained in the body of a subject organism in vivo through binding to a protein which increases the half-life of the ligand until such a time as it becomes bound to the second target antigen and dissociates from the half-life increasing protein.
Modulation of binding in the above context is achieved as a consequence of the structural proximity of the antigen binding sites relative to one another. Such structural proximity can be achieved by the nature of the structural components linking the two or more antigen binding sites, eg by the provision of a ligand with a relatively rigid structure that holds the antigen binding sites in close proximity. Advantageously, the two or more antigen binding sites are in physically close proximity to one another such that one site modulates the binding of antigen at another site by a process which involves steric hindrance and/or confirmational changes within the immunoglobulin molecule.
The first and the second antigen binding domains may be associated either covalently or non-covalently. In the case that the domains are covalently associated, then the association may be mediated for example by disulphide bonds or by a polypeptide linker such as (Gly4Ser)n, where n=from 1 to 8, eg, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 7.
Ligands according to this aspect of the invention may be combined into non-immunoglobulin multi ligand structures to form multivalent complexes, which bind target molecules with the same antigen, thereby providing superior avidity, while at least one variable domain binds an antigen to increase the half life of the multimer. For example natural bacterial receptors such as SpA have been used as scaffolds for the grafting of CDRs to generate ligands which bind specifically to one or more epitopes. Details of this procedure are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,S31,012. Other suitable scaffolds include those based on fibronectin and affibodies. Details of suitable procedures are described in WO 98/58965. Other suitable scaffolds include lipocallin and CTLA4, as described in van den Beuken et al., J. Mol. Biol. (2001) 310, 591-601, and scaffolds such as those described in W00069907 (Medical Research Council), which are based for example on the ring structure of bacterial GroEL or other chaperone polypeptides.
Protein scaffolds may be combined, for example, CDRs may be grafted on to a CTLA4 scaffold and used together with immunoglobulin VH or VL domains to form a ligand.
Likewise, fibronectin, lipocallin and other scaffolds may be combined.
In the case that the variable domains are selected from V-gene repertoires selected for instance using phage display technology as herein described, then these variable domains can comprise a universal framework region, such that they may be recognised by a specific generic ligand as herein defined. The use of universal frameworks, generic ligands and the like is described in WO 99/20749. In the present invention, reference to phage display includes the use of both phage and/or phagemids.
Where V-gene repertoires are used variation in polypeptide sequence is preferably located within the structural loops of the variable domains. The polypeptide sequences of either variable domain may be altered by DNA shuffling or by mutation in order to enhance the interaction of each variable domain with its complementary pair.
In a preferred embodiment of the invention the ‘dual-specific ligand’ is a single chain Fv fragment. In an alternative embodiment of the invention, the ‘dual-specific ligand’ consists of a Fab region of an antibody. The term “Fab region” includes a Fab-like region where two VH or two VL domains are used.
The variable regions may be derived from antibodies directed against target antigens or epitopes. Alternatively they may be derived from a repertoire of single antibody domains such as those expressed on the surface of filamentous bacteriophage. Selection may be performed as described herein below and in the Examples.
Preparation of dAbs:
An aspect of the invention relates not only to dual-specific ligands in general, but also to various constructs of ligands that bind TNF-α alone, TNF-α and HSA or other half-life- extending polypeptide in the dual-specific format, and ligands that bind TNF-α and VEGF in the dual specific format. Ligands that bind VEGF and HSA or other half-life-extending polypeptide can also be prepared. The dual-specific TNF-α/VEGF construct can additionally comprise a binder for HSA or another half-life-extending molecule. In each of these embodiments, the individual ligands, i.e., those that bind TNF-α, HSA or VEGF, can be and are preferably, dAbs. The generation of such dAbs is discussed below and in the Examples.
In various aspects, the dAbs disclosed herein can be present in monomeric form, dimeric form, trimeric form, tetrameric form, or even in higher multimeric forms. In addition to the heterodimeric forms such as the dual specific constructs, multimeric constructs can be homomultimeric, i.e., homodimer, homotrimer, homotetramer, etc. Heterotrimers, heterotetramers and higher order heteromultimers are also specifically contemplated. Each of the various dAb conformations can additionally be complexed with additional moieties, such as polyethylene glycol (PEG) in order to further prolong the serum half-life of the polypeptide construct. PEGylation is known in the art and described herein.
Single immunoglobulin variable domains or dAbs are prepared in a number of ways. In a preferred aspect, the dAbs are human single immunoglobulin variable domains. For each of these approaches, well-known methods of preparing (e.g., amplifying, mutating, etc.) and manipulating nucleic acid sequences are applicable.
One means of preparing dAbs is to amplify and express the VH or VL region of a heavy chain or light chain gene for a cloned antibody known to bind the desired antigen. The boundaries of VH and VL domains are set out by Kabat et al. (1991, supra). The information regarding the boundaries of the VH and VL domains of heavy and light chain genes is used to design PCR primers that amplify the V domain from a cloned heavy or light chain coding sequence encoding an antibody known to bind a given antigen. The amplified V domain is inserted into a suitable expression vector, e.g., pHEN-1 (Hoogenboom et al., 1991, Nucleic Acids Res. 19: 4133-4137) and expressed, either alone or as a fusion with another polypeptide sequence. The expressed VH or VL domain is then screened for high affinity binding to the desired antigen in isolation from the remainder of the heavy or light chain polypeptide. For all aspects of the present invention, screening for binding is performed as known in the art or as described herein below.
A repertoire of VH or VL domains is screened by, for example, phage display, panning against the desired antigen. Methods for the construction of bacteriophage display libraries and lambda phage expression libraries are well known in the art, and taught, for example, by: McCafferty et al., 1990, Nature 348: 552; Kang et al., 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 88: 4363; Clackson et al., 1991, Nature 352: 624; Lowman et al., 1991, Biochemistry 30: 10832; Burton et al., 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci U.S.A. 88: 10134; Hoogenboom et al., 1991, Nucleic Acids Res. 19: 4133; Chang et al., 1991, J. Immunol. 147: 3610; Breitling et al., 1991, Gene 104: 147; Marks et al., 1991, J. Mol. Biol. 222: 581; Barbas et al., 1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 89: 4457; Hawkins and Winter (1992) J. Immunol., 22: 867; Marks et al. (1992) J. Biol. Chem., 267: 16007; and Lerner et al. (1992) Science, 258: 1313. scFv phage libraries are taught, for example, by Huston et al., 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci U.S.A. 85: 5879-5883; Chaudhary et al., 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci U.S.A. 87: 1066-1070; McCafferty et al., 1990, supra; Clackson et al., 1991, supra; Marks et al., 1991, supra; Chiswell et al., 1992, Trends Biotech. 10: 80; and Marks et al., 1992, supra. Various embodiments of scFv libraries displayed on bacteriophage coat proteins have been described. Refinements of phage display approaches are also known, for example as described in WO 96/06213 and WO 92/01047 (Medical Research Council et al.) and WO 97/08320 (Morphosys, supra).
The repertoire of VH or VL domains can be a naturally-occurring repertoire of immunoglobulin sequences or a synthetic repertoire. A naturally-occurring repertoire is one prepared, for example, from immunoglobulin-expressing cells harvested from one or more individuals. Such repertoires can be “naïve,” i.e., prepared, for example, from human fetal or newborn immunoglobulin-expressing cells, or rearranged, i.e., prepared from, for example, adult human B cells. Natural repertoires are described, for example, by Marks et al., 1991, J. Mol. Biol. 222: 581 and Vaughan et al., 1996, Nature Biotech. 14: 309. If desired, clones identified from a natural repertoire, or any repertoire, for that matter, that bind the target antigen are then subjected to mutagenesis and further screening in order to produce and select variants with improved binding characteristics.
Synthetic repertoires of single immunoglobulin variable domains are prepared by artificially introducing diversity into a cloned V domain. Synthetic repertoires are described, for example, by Hoogenboom & Winter, 1992, J. Mol. Biol. 227: 381; Barbas et al., 1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 89: 4457; Nissim et al., 1994, EMBO J. 13: 692; Griffiths et al., 1994, EMBO J. 13: 3245; DeKriuf et al., 1995, J. Mol. Biol. 248: 97; and WO 99/20749.
The antigen binding domain of a conventional antibody comprises two separate regions: a heavy chain variable domain (VH) and a light chain variable domain (VL: which can be either Vκ or Vλ). The antigen binding site of such an antibody is formed by six polypeptide loops: three from the VH domain (H1, H2 and H3) and three from the VL domain (L1, L2 and L3). The boundaries of these loops are described, for example, in Kabat et al. (1991, supra). A diverse primary repertoire of V genes that encode the VH and VL domains is produced in vivo by the combinatorial rearrangement of gene segments. The VH gene is produced by the recombination of three gene segments, VH, D and JH. In humans, there are approximately 51 functional VH segments (Cook and Tomlinson (1995) immunol Today 16: 237), 25 functional D segments (Corbett et al. (1997) J. Mol. Biol. 268: 69) and 6 functional JH segments (Ravetch et al. (1981) Cell 27: 583), depending on the haplotype. The VH segment encodes the region of the polypeptide chain which forms the first and second antigen binding loops of the VH domain (H1 and H2), while the VH, D and JH segments combine to form the third antigen binding loop of the VH domain (H3).
The VL gene is produced by the recombination of only two gene segments, VL and JL. In humans, there are approximately 40 functional Vκ segments (Schäble and Zachau (1993) Biol. Chem. Hoppe-Seyler 374: 1001), 31 functional Vλ segments (Williams et al. (1996) J. Mol. Biol. 264: 220; Kawasaki et al. (1997) Genome Res. 7: 250), 5 functional Jκ segments (Hieter et al. (1982) J. Biol. Chem. 257: 1516) and 4 functional Jλ segments (Vasicek and Leder (1990) J. Exp. Med. 172: 609), depending on the haplotype. The VL segment encodes the region of the polypeptide chain which forms the first and second antigen binding loops of the VL domain (L1 and L2), while the VL and JL segments combine to form the third antigen binding loop of the VL domain (L3). Antibodies selected from this primary repertoire are believed to be sufficiently diverse to bind almost all antigens with at least moderate affinity. High affinity antibodies are produced in vivo by “affinity maturation” of the rearranged genes, in which point mutations are generated and selected by the immune system on the basis of improved binding.
Analysis of the structures and sequences of antibodies has shown that five of the six antigen binding loops (H1, H2, L1, L2, L3) possess a limited number of main-chain conformations or canonical structures (Chothia and Lesk (1987) J. Mol. Biol. 196: 901; Chothia et al. (1989) Nature 342: 877). The main-chain conformations are determined by (i) the length of the antigen binding loop, and (ii) particular residues, or types of residue, at certain key position in the antigen binding loop and the antibody framework. Analysis of the loop lengths and key residues has enabled us to the predict the main-chain conformations of H1, H2, L1, L2 and L3 encoded by the majority of human antibody sequences (Chothia et al. (1992) J. Mol. Biol. 227: 799; Tomlinson et al. (1995) EMBO J. 14: 4628; Williams et al. (1996) J. Mol. Biol. 264: 220). Although the H3 region is much more diverse in terms of sequence, length and structure (due to the use of D segments), it also forms a limited number of main-chain conformations for short loop lengths which depend on the length and the presence of particular residues, or types of residue, at key positions in the loop and the antibody framework (Martin et al. (1996) J. Mol. Biol. 263: 800; Shirai et al. (1996) FEBS Letters 399: 1.
While, according to one embodiment of the invention, diversity can be added to synthetic repertoires at any site in the CDRs of the various antigen-binding loops, this approach results in a greater proportion of V domains that do not properly fold and therefore contribute to a lower proportion of molecules with the potential to bind antigen. An understanding of the residues contributing to the main chain conformation of the antigen-binding loops permits the identification of specific residues to diversify in a synthetic repertoire of VH or VL domains. That is, diversity is best introduced in residues that are not essential to maintaining the main chain conformation. As an example, for the diversification of loop L2, the conventional approach would be to diversify all the residues in the corresponding CDR (CDR2) as defined by Kabat et al. (1991, supra), some seven residues. However, for L2, it is known that positions 50 and 53 are diverse in naturally occurring antibodies and are observed to make contact with the antigen. The preferred approach would be to diversify only those two residues in this loop. This represents a significant improvement in terms of the functional diversity required to create a range of antigen binding specificities.
In one aspect, synthetic variable domain repertoires are prepared in VH or Vκ backgrounds, based on artificially diversified germline VH or Vκ sequences. For example, the VH domain repertoire is based on cloned germline VH gene segments V3-23/DP47 (Tomlinson et al., 1992, J. Mol. Biol. 227: 7768) and JH4b (see FIGS. 1 and 2). The Vκ domain repertoire is based, for example, on germline Vκ gene segments O2/O12/DPK9 (Cox et al., 1994, Eur. J. Immunol. 24: 827) and Jκ1 (see
In one aspect, diversity is introduced into the sequence of human germline VH gene segments V3-23/DP47 (Tomlinson et al., 1992, J. Mol. Biol. 227: 7768) and JH4b using the NNK codon at sites H30, H31, H33, H35, H50, H52, H52a, H53, H55, H56, H58, H95, H97 and H98, corresponding to diversity in CDRs 1, 2 and 3, as shown in
In another aspect, diversity is also introduced into the sequence of human germline VH gene segments V3-23/DP47 and JH4b, for example, using the NNK codon at sites H30, H31, H33, H35, H50, H52, H52a, H53, H55, H56, H58, H95, H97, H98, H99, H100, H100a and H100b, corresponding to diversity in CDRs 1, 2 and 3, as shown in
In another aspect, diversity is introduced into the sequence of human germline Vκ gene segments O2/O12/DPK9 and Jκ1 for example, using the NNK codon at sites L30, L31, L32, L34, L50, L53, L91, L92, L93, L94 and L96, corresponding to diversity in CDRs 1, 2 and 3, as shown in
Diversified repertoires are cloned into phage display vectors as known in the art and as described, for example, in WO 99/20749. In general, the nucleic acid molecules and vector constructs required for the performance of the present invention are available in the art and are constructed and manipulated as set forth in standard laboratory manuals, such as Sambrook et al. (1989). Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor, USA.
The manipulation of nucleic acids in the present invention is typically carried out in recombinant vectors. As used herein, “vector” refers to a discrete element that is used to introduce heterologous DNA into cells for the expression and/or replication thereof. Methods by which to select or construct and, subsequently, use such vectors are well known to one of skill in the art. Numerous vectors are publicly available, including bacterial plasmids, bacteriophage, artificial chromosomes and episomal vectors. Such vectors may be used for simple cloning and mutagenesis; alternatively, as is typical of vectors in which repertoire (or pre-repertoire) members of the invention are carried, a gene expression vector is employed. A vector of use according to the invention is selected to accommodate a polypeptide coding sequence of a desired size, typically from 0.25 kilobase (kb) to 40 kb in length. A suitable host cell is transformed with the vector after in vitro cloning manipulations. Each vector contains various functional components, which generally include a cloning (or “polylinker”) site, an origin of replication and at least one selectable marker gene. If a given vector is an expression vector, it additionally possesses one or more of the following: enhancer element, promoter, transcription termination and signal sequences, each positioned in the vicinity of the cloning site, such that they are operatively linked to the gene encoding a polypeptide repertoire member according to the invention.
Both cloning and expression vectors generally contain nucleic acid sequences that enable the vector to replicate in one or more selected host cells. Typically in cloning vectors, this sequence is one that enables the vector to replicate independently of the host chromosomal DNA and includes origins of replication or autonomously replicating sequences. Such sequences are well known for a variety of bacteria, yeast and viruses. The origin of replication from the plasmid pBR322 is suitable for most Gram-negative bacteria, the 2 micron plasmid origin is suitable for yeast, and various viral origins (e.g. SV 40, adenovirus) are useful for cloning vectors in mammalian cells. Generally, the origin of replication is not needed for mammalian expression vectors unless these are used in mammalian cells able to replicate high levels of DNA, such as COS cells.
Advantageously, a cloning or expression vector also contains a selection gene also referred to as selectable marker. This gene encodes a protein necessary for the survival or growth of transformed host cells grown in a selective culture medium. Host cells not transformed with the vector containing the selection gene will therefore not survive in the culture medium. Typical selection genes encode proteins that confer resistance to antibiotics and other toxins, e.g. ampicillin, neomycin, methotrexate or tetracycline, complement auxotrophic deficiencies, or supply critical nutrients not available in the growth media.
Because the replication of vectors according to the present invention is most conveniently performed in E. coli, an E. coli-selectable marker, for example, the β-lactamase gene that confers resistance to the antibiotic ampicillin, is of use. These can be obtained from E. coli plasmids, such as pBR322 or a pUC plasmid such as pUC18 or pUC19.
Expression vectors usually contain a promoter that is recognized by the host organism and is operably linked to the coding sequence of interest. Such a promoter may be inducible or constitutive. The term “operably linked” refers to a juxtaposition wherein the components described are in a relationship permitting them to function in their intended manner. A control sequence “operably linked” to a coding sequence is ligated in such a way that expression of the coding sequence is achieved under conditions compatible with the control sequences.
Promoters suitable for use with prokaryotic hosts include, for example, the β-lactamase and lactose promoter systems, alkaline phosphatase, the tryptophan (trp) promoter system and hybrid promoters such as the tac promoter. Promoters for use in bacterial systems will also generally contain a Shine-Dalgarno sequence operably linked to the coding sequence.
In libraries or repertoires as described herein, the preferred vectors are expression vectors that enable the expression of a nucleotide sequence corresponding to a polypeptide library member. Thus, selection is performed by separate propagation and expression of a single clone expressing the polypeptide library member or by use of any selection display system. As described above, a preferred selection display system uses bacteriophage display. Thus, phage or phagemid vectors can be used. Preferred vectors are phagemid vectors, which have an E. coli origin of replication (for double stranded replication) and also a phage origin of replication (for production of single-stranded DNA). The manipulation and expression of such vectors is well known in the art (Hoogenboom and Winter (1992) supra; Nissim et al. (1994) supra). Briefly, the vector contains a β-lactamase or other selectable marker gene to confer selectivity on the phagemid, and a lac promoter upstream of a expression cassette that consists (N to C terminal) of a pelB leader sequence (which directs the expressed polypeptide to the periplasmic space), a multiple cloning site (for cloning the nucleotide version of the library member), optionally, one or more peptide tags (for detection), optionally, one or more TAG stop codons and the phage protein pIII. Using various suppressor and non-suppressor strains of E. coli and with the addition of glucose, iso-propyl thio-β-D-galactoside (IPTG) or a helper phage, such as VCS M13, the vector is able to replicate as a plasmid with no expression, produce large quantities of the polypeptide library member only, or produce phage, some of which contain at least one copy of the polypeptide-pIII fusion on their surface.
An example of a preferred vector is the pHEN1 phagemid vector (Hoogenboom et al., 1991, Nucl. Acids Res. 19: 4133-4137; sequence is available, e.g., as SEQ ID NO: 7 in WO 03/031611), in which the production of pill fusion protein is under the control of the LacZ promoter, which is inhibited in the presence of glucose and induced with IPTG. When grown in suppressor strains of E. coli, e.g., TG1, the gene III fusion protein is produced and packaged into phage, while growth in non-suppressor strains, e.g., HB2151, permits the secretion of soluble fusion protein into the bacterial periplasm and into the culture medium. Because the expression of gene III prevents later infection with helper phage, the bacteria harboring the phagemid vectors are propagated in the presence of glucose before infection with VCSM13 helper phage for phage rescue.
Construction of vectors according to the invention employs conventional ligation techniques. Isolated vectors or DNA fragments are cleaved, tailored, and re-ligated in the form desired to generate the required vector. If desired, sequence analysis to confirm that the correct sequences are present in the constructed vector is performed using standard methods. Suitable methods for constructing expression vectors, preparing in vitro transcripts, introducing DNA into host cells, and performing analyses for assessing expression and function are known to those skilled in the art. The presence of a gene sequence in a sample is detected, or its amplification and/or expression quantified by conventional methods, such as Southern or Northern analysis, Western blotting, dot blotting of DNA, RNA or protein, in situ hybridization, immunocytochemistry or sequence analysis of nucleic acid or protein molecules. Those skilled in the art will readily envisage how these methods may be modified, if desired.
PCR Mutagenesis:
The primer is complementary to a portion of a target molecule present in a pool of nucleic acid molecules used in the preparation of sets of nucleic acid repertoire members encoding polypeptide repertoire members. Most often, primers are prepared by synthetic methods, either chemical or enzymatic. Mutagenic oligonucleotide primers are generally 15 to 100 nucleotides in length, ideally from 20 to 40 nucleotides, although oligonucleotides of different length are of use.
Typically, selective hybridization occurs when two nucleic acid sequences are substantially complementary (at least about 65% complementary over a stretch of at least 14 to 25 nucleotides, preferably at least about 75%, more preferably at least about 85% or 90% complementary). See Kanehisa, 1984, Nucleic Acids Res. 12: 203, incorporated herein by reference. As a result, it is expected that a certain degree of mismatch at the priming site is tolerated. Such mismatch may be small, such as a mono-, di- or tri-nucleotide. Alternatively, it may comprise nucleotide loops, which are defined herein as regions in which mismatch encompasses an uninterrupted series of four or more nucleotides.
Overall, five factors influence the efficiency and selectivity of hybridization of the primer to a second nucleic acid molecule. These factors, which are (i) primer length, (ii) the nucleotide sequence and/or composition, (iii) hybridization temperature, (iv) buffer chemistry and (v) the potential for steric hindrance in the region to which the primer is required to hybridize, are important considerations when non-random priming sequences are designed.
There is a positive correlation between primer length and both the efficiency and accuracy with which a primer will anneal to a target sequence; longer sequences have a higher melting temperature (TM) than do shorter ones, and are less likely to be repeated within a given target sequence, thereby minimizing promiscuous hybridization. Primer sequences with a high G-C content or that comprise palindromic sequences tend to self-hybridize, as do their intended target sites, since unimolecular, rather than bimolecular, hybridization kinetics are generally favored in solution; at the same time, it is important to design a primer containing sufficient numbers of G-C nucleotide pairings to bind the target sequence tightly, since each such pair is bound by three hydrogen bonds, rather than the two that are found when A and T bases pair. Hybridization temperature varies inversely with primer annealing efficiency, as does the concentration of organic solvents, e.g. formamide, that might be included in a hybridization mixture, while increases in salt concentration facilitate binding. Under stringent hybridization conditions, longer probes hybridize more efficiently than do shorter ones, which are sufficient under more permissive conditions. Stringent hybridization conditions for primers typically include salt concentrations of less than about 1M, more usually less than about 500 mM and preferably less than about 200 mM. Hybridization temperatures range from as low as 0° C. to greater than 22° C., greater than about 30° C., and (most often) in excess of about 37° C. Longer fragments may require higher hybridization temperatures for specific hybridization. As several factors affect the stringency of hybridization, the combination of parameters is more important than the absolute measure of any one alone.
Primers are designed with these considerations in mind. While estimates of the relative merits of numerous sequences may be made mentally by one of skill in the art, computer programs have been designed to assist in the evaluation of these several parameters and the optimization of primer sequences. Examples of such programs are “PrimerSelect” of the DNAStar™ software package (DNAStar, Inc.; Madison, Wisc.) and OLIGO 4.0 (National Biosciences, Inc.). Once designed, suitable oligonucleotides are prepared by a suitable method, e.g. the phosphoramidite method described by Beaucage and Carruthers, 1981, Tetrahedron Lett. 22: 1859) or the triester method according to Matteucci and Caruthers, 1981, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 103: 3185, both incorporated herein by reference, or by other chemical methods using either a commercial automated oligonucleotide synthesizer or, for example, VLSIPS™ technology.
PCR is performed using template DNA (at least 1 fg; more usefully, 1-1000 ng) and at least 25 pmol of oligonucleotide primers; it may be advantageous to use a larger amount of primer when the primer pool is heavily heterogeneous, as each sequence is represented by only a small fraction of the molecules of the pool, and amounts become limiting in the later amplification cycles. A typical reaction mixture includes: 2 μl of DNA, 25 pmol of oligonucleotide primer, 2.5 μl of 10× PCR buffer 1 (Perkin-Elmer), 0.4 μl of 1.25 μM dNTP, 0.15 μl (or 2.5 units) of Taq DNA polymerase (Perkin Elmer) and deionized water to a total volume of 25 μl. Mineral oil is overlaid and the PCR is performed using a programmable thermal cycler.
The length and temperature of each step of a PCR cycle, as well as the number of cycles, is adjusted in accordance to the stringency requirements in effect. Annealing temperature and timing are determined both by the efficiency with which a primer is expected to anneal to a template and the degree of mismatch that is to be tolerated; obviously, when nucleic acid molecules are simultaneously amplified and mutagenized, mismatch is required, at least in the first round of synthesis. In attempting to amplify a population of molecules using a mixed pool of mutagenic primers, the loss, under stringent (high-temperature) annealing conditions, of potential mutant products that would only result from low melting temperatures is weighed against the promiscuous annealing of primers to sequences other than the target site. The ability to optimize the stringency of primer annealing conditions is well within the knowledge of one of skill in the art. An annealing temperature of between 30° C. and 72° C. is used. Initial denaturation of the template molecules normally occurs at between 92° C. and 99° C. for 4 minutes, followed by 20-40 cycles consisting of denaturation (94-99° C. for 15 seconds to 1 minute), annealing (temperature determined as discussed above; 1-2 minutes), and extension (72° C. for 1-5 minutes, depending on the length of the amplified product). Final extension is generally for 4 minutes at 72° C., and may be followed by an indefinite (0-24 hour) step at 4° C.
Screening dAbs for Antigen Binding:
Following expression of a repertoire of dAbs on the surface of phage, selection is performed by contacting the phage repertoire with immobilized target antigen, washing to remove unbound phage, and propagation of the bound phage, the whole process frequently referred to as “panning.” Alternatively, phage are pre-selected for the expression of properly folded member variants by panning against an immobilized generic ligand (e.g., protein A or protein L) that is only bound by folded members. This has the advantage of reducing the proportion of non-functional members, thereby increasing the proportion of members likely to bind a target antigen. Pre-selection with generic ligands is taught in WO 99/20749. The screening of phage antibody libraries is generally described, for example, by Harrison et al., 1996, Meth. Enzymol. 267: 83-109.
Screening is commonly performed using purified antigen immobilized on a solid support, for example, plastic tubes or wells, or on a chromatography matrix, for example Sepharose™ (Pharmacia). Screening or selection can also be performed on complex antigens, such as the surface of cells (Marks et al., 1993, BioTechnology 11: 1145; de Kruif et al., 1995, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 92: 3938). Another alternative involves selection by binding biotinylated antigen in solution, followed by capture on streptavidin-coated beads.
In a preferred aspect, panning is performed by immobilizing antigen (generic or specific) on tubes or wells in a plate, e.g., Nunc MAXISORP™ immunotube 8 well strips. Wells are coated with 150 μl of antigen (100 μg/ml in PBS) and incubated overnight. The wells are then washed 3 times with PBS and blocked with 400 μl PBS-2% skim milk (2% MPBS) at 37° C. for 2 hr. The wells are rinsed 3 times with PBS and phage are added in 2% MPBS. The mixture is incubated at room temperature for 90 minutes and the liquid, containing unbound phage, is removed. Wells are rinsed 10 times with PBS-0.1% tween 20, and then 10 times with PBS to remove detergent. Bound phage are eluted by adding 200 μl of freshly prepared 100 mM triethylamine, mixing well and incubating for 10 min at room temperature. Eluted phage are transferred to a tube containing 100 μl of 1M Tris-HCl, pH 7.4 and vortexed to neutralize the triethylamine. Exponentially-growing E. coli host cells (e.g., TG1) are infected with, for example, 150 ml of the eluted phage by incubating for 30 min at 37° C. Infected cells are spun down, resuspended in fresh medium and plated in top agarose. Phage plaques are eluted or picked into fresh cultures of host cells to propagate for analysis or for further rounds of selection. One or more rounds of plaque purification are performed if necessary to ensure pure populations of selected phage. Other screening approaches are described by Harrison et al., 1996, supra.
Following identification of phage expressing a single immunoglobulin variable domain that binds a desired target, if a phagemid vector such as pHEN1 has been used, the variable domain fusion protein are easily produced in soluble form by infecting non-suppressor strains of bacteria, e.g., HB2151 that permit the secretion of soluble gene III fusion protein. Alternatively, the V domain sequence can be sub-cloned into an appropriate expression vector to produce soluble protein according to methods known in the art.
Purification and Concentration of dAbs:
dAb polypeptides secreted into the periplasmic space or into the medium of bacteria are harvested and purified according to known methods (Harrison et al., 1996, supra). Skerra & Pluckthun (1988, Science 240: 1038) and Breitling et al. (1991, Gene 104: 147) describe the harvest of antibody polypeptides from the periplasm, and Better et al. (1988, Science 240: 1041) describes harvest from the culture supernatant. Purification can also be achieved by binding to generic ligands, such as protein A or Protein L. Alternatively, the variable domains can be expressed with a peptide tag, e.g., the Myc, HA or 6×-His tags, which facilitates purification by affinity chromatography.
Polypeptides are concentrated by several methods well known in the art, including, for example, ultrafiltration, diafiltration and tangential flow filtration. The process of ultrafiltration uses semi-permeable membranes and pressure to separate molecular species on the basis of size and shape. The pressure is provided by gas pressure or by centrifugation. Commercial ultrafiltration products are widely available, e.g., from Millipore (Bedford, Mass.; examples include the Centricon™ and Microcon™ concentrators) and Vivascience (Hannover, Germany; examples include the Vivaspin™ concentrators). By selection of a molecular weight cutoff smaller than the target polypeptide (usually ⅓ to ⅙ the molecular weight of the target polypeptide, although differences of as little as 10 kD can be used successfully), the polypeptide is retained when solvent and smaller solutes pass through the membrane. Thus, a molecular weight cutoff of about 5 kD is useful for concentration of dAb polypeptides described herein.
Diafiltration, which uses ultrafiltration membranes with a “washing” process, is used where it is desired to remove or exchange the salt or buffer in a polypeptide preparation. The polypeptide is concentrated by the passage of solvent and small solutes through the membrane, and remaining salts or buffer are removed by dilution of the retained polypeptide with a new buffer or salt solution or water, as desired, accompanied by continued ultrafiltration. In continuous diafiltration, new buffer is added at the same rate that filtrate passes through the membrane. A diafiltration volume is the volume of polypeptide solution prior to the start of diafiltration—using continuous diafiltration, greater than 99.5% of a fully permeable solute can be removed by washing through six diafiltration volumes with the new buffer. Alternatively, the process can be performed in a discontinuous manner, wherein the sample is repeatedly diluted and then filtered back to its original volume to remove or exchange salt or buffer and ultimately concentrate the polypeptide. Equipment for diafiltration and detailed methodologies for its use are available, for example, from Pall Life Sciences (Ann Arbor, Mich.) and Sartorius AG/Vivascience (Hannover, Germany).
Tangential flow filtration (TFF), also known as “cross-flow filtration,” also uses ultrafiltration membrane. Fluid containing the target polypeptide is pumped tangentially along the surface of the membrane. The pressure causes a portion of the fluid to pass through the membrane while the target polypeptide is retained above the filter. In contrast to standard ultrafiltration, however, the retained molecules do not accumulate on the surface of the membrane, but are carried along by the tangential flow. The solution that does not pass through the filter (containing the target polypeptide) can be repeatedly circulated across the membrane to achieve the desired degree of concentration. Equipment for TFF and detailed methodologies for its use are available, for example, from Millipore (e.g., the ProFlux M12™ Benchtop TFF system and the Pellicon™ systems), Pall Life Sciences (e.g., the Minim™ Tangential Flow Filtration system).
Protein concentration is measured in a number of ways that are well known in the art. These include, for example, amino acid analysis, absorbance at 280 nm, the “Bradford” and “Lowry” methods, and SDS-PAGE. The most accurate method is total hydrolysis followed by amino acid analysis by HPLC, concentration is then determined through comparison with the known sequence of the dAb polypeptide. While this method is the most accurate, it is expensive and time-consuming. Protein determination by measurement of UV absorbance at 280 nm is faster and much less expensive, yet relatively accurate and is preferred as a compromise over amino acid analysis. Absorbance at 280 nm was used to determine protein concentrations reported in the Examples described herein.
“Bradford” and “Lowry” protein assays (Bradford, 1976, Anal. Biochem. 72: 248-254; Lowry et al.,1951, J. Biol. Chem. 193: 265-275) compare sample protein concentration to a standard curve most often based on bovine serum albumin (BSA). These methods are less accurate, tending to undersetimate the concentration of single immunoglobulin variable domains. Their accuracy could be improved, however, by using a VH or Vκ single domain polypeptide as a standard.
An additional protein assay method is the bicinchoninic acid assay described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,839,295 (incorporated herein by reference) and marketed by Pierce Biotechnology (Rockford, Ill.) as the “BCA Protein Assay” (e.g., Pierce Catalog No. 23227).
The SDS-PAGE method uses gel electrophoresis and Coomassie Blue staining in comparison to known concentration standards, e.g., known amounts of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide. Quantitation can be done by eye or by densitometry.
In a third aspect, the invention provides a method for producing a ligand comprising a first immunoglobulin single variable domain having a first binding specificity and a second single immunoglobulin single variable domain having a second (different) binding specificity, one or both of the binding specificities being specific for an antigen which increases the half-life of the ligand in vivo, the method comprising the steps of: (a) selecting a first variable domain by its ability to bind to a first epitope, (b) selecting a second variable region by its ability to bind to a second epitope, (c) combining the variable domains; and (d) selecting the ligand by its ability to bind to said first epitope and to said second epitope.
The ligand can bind to the first and second epitopes either simultaneously or, where there is competition between the binding domains for epitope binding, the binding of one domain may preclude the binding of another domain to its cognate epitope. In one embodiment, therefore, step (d) above requires simultaneous binding to both first and second (and possibly further) epitopes; in another embodiment, the binding to the first and second epitoes is not simultaneous.
The epitopes are preferably on separate antigens.
Ligands advantageously comprise VH/VL combinations, or VH/VH or VL/VL combinations of immunoglobulin variable domains, as described above. The ligands may moreover comprise camelid VHH domains, provided that the VHH domain which is specific for an antigen which increases the half-life of the ligand in vivo does not bind Hen egg white lysozyme (HEL), porcine pancreatic alpha-amylase or NmC-A; hog, BSA-linked RR6 ado 5 dye or S. mutates HG982 cells, as described in Conrath et al., (2001) JBC 276:7346-7350 and WO99/23221, neither of which describe the use of a specificity for an antigen which increases half-life to increase the half life of the ligand in vivo.
In one embodiment, said first variable domain is selected for binding to said first epitope in absence of a complementary variable domain (i.e., it is selected as a dAb as described herein above). In a further embodiment, said first variable domain is selected for binding to said first epitope/antigen in the presence of a third variable domain in which said third variable domain is different from said second variable domain and is complementary to the first domain. Similarly, the second domain may be selected in the absence or presence of a complementary variable domain.
The antigens or epitopes targeted by the ligands of the invention, in addition to the half life enhancing protein, may be any antigen or epitope but advantageously is an antigen or epitope that is targeted with therapeutic benefit. The invention provides ligands, including open conformation, closed conformation and isolated dAb monomer ligands, specific for any such target, particularly those targets further identified herein. Such targets may be, or be part of, polypeptides, proteins or nucleic acids, which may be naturally occurring or synthetic. In this respect, the ligand of the invention may bind the epiotpe or antigen and act as an antagonist or agonist (eg, EPO receptor agonist). One skilled in the art will appreciate that the choice is large and varied.
They may be for instance human or animal proteins, cytokines, cytokine receptors, enzymes co-factors for enzymes or DNA binding proteins. Suitable cytokines and growth factors that can be targeted by mono- or dual-specific binding polypeptides as described herein include but are not limited to: ApoE, Apo-SAA, BDNF, BLyS, Cardiotrophin-1, EGF, EGF receptor, ENA-78, Eotaxin, Eotaxin-2, Exodus-2, EpoR, FGF-acidic, FGF-basic, fibroblast growth factor-10, FLT3 ligand, Fractalkine (CX3C), GDNF, G-CSF, GM-CSF, GF-01, insulin, IFN-y, IGF-I, IGF-II, IL-, IL-1p, 20 IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8 (72 a.a.), IL-8 (77 a.a.), IL-8 (77 a.a.), IL-9, IL-10, IL-ll, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15, IL-16, IL-17, IL-18 (IGIF), Inhibin α, Inhibin B IP-10, keratinocyte growth factor-2 (KGF-2), KGF, Leptin, LIF, Lymphotactin, Mullerian inhibitory substance, monocyte colony inhibitory factor, monocyte attractant protein, M-CSF, MDC (67 a.a.), MDC (69 a.a.), MCP-1 (MCAF), MCP-2, MCP-3, MCP-4, MIG, MIP1α, MIP1β, MIP3α, MIP3β, MIP-4, myeloid progenitor inhibitor factor-1 (MPIF-1), NAP-2, Neurturin, Nerve growth factor, β-NGF, NT-3, NT-4, Oncostatin M, PDGF-AA, PDGF-AB, PDGF-BB, PF-4, RANTES, SDF12, SDF1β, SCF, SCGF, stem cell factor (SCF), TARC, TGF-α, TGF-β, TGF-β2, TGF-β3, tumour necrosis factor (TNF), TNF-α, TNF-β, TNF receptor I, TNF receptor II, TNIL-1, TPO, VEGF, VEGF receptor 1, VEGF receptor 2, VEGF receptor 3, GCP-2, GRO/MGSA, GRO-β, GRO-8, HCC1, 1-309, HER 1, HER 2, HER 3, HER 4, TACE recognition site, TNF BP-I and TNF BP-II, as well as any target disclosed in Annex 2 or Annex 3 hereto, whether in combination as set forth in the Annexes, in a different combination, or individually.
As noted, preferred ligands include TNF-α and VEGF, alone, together, and/or with anti-HSA binding activity.
Cytokine receptors include receptors for the foregoing cytokines. It will be appreciated that this list is by no means exhaustive.
In one embodiment of the invention, the variable domains are derived from a respective antibody directed against the antigen or epitope. In a preferred embodiment the variable domains are derived from a repertoire of single variable antibody domains.
In a further aspect, the present invention provides one or more nucleic acid molecules encoding at least a dual-specific ligand as herein defined.
The dual specific ligand may be encoded on a single nucleic acid molecule; alternatively, each domain may be encoded by a separate nucleic acid molecule. Where the ligand is encoded by a single nucleic acid molecule, the domains may be expressed as a fusion polypeptide, in the manner of a scFv molecule, or may be separately expressed and subsequently linked together, for example using chemical linking agents. Ligands expressed from separate nucleic acids will be linked together by appropriate means.
The nucleic acid may further encode a signal sequence for export of the polypeptides from a host cell upon expression and may be fused with a surface component of a filamentous bacteriophage particle (or other component of a selection display system) upon expression.
In a further aspect the present invention provides a vector comprising nucleic acid encoding a dual specific ligand according to the present invention.
In a yet further aspect, the present invention provides a host cell transfected with a vector encoding a dual specific ligand according to the present invention.
Expression from such a vector may be configured to produce, for example on the surface of a bacteriophage particle, variable domains for selection. This allows selection of displayed variable regions and thus selection of ‘dual-specific ligands’ using the method of the present invention.
The present invention further provides a kit comprising at least a dual-specific ligand according to the present invention.
Dual-Specific ligands according to the present invention preferably comprise combinations of heavy and light chain domains. For example, the dual specific ligand may comprise a VH domain and a VL domain, which may be linked together in the form of an scFv. In addition, the ligands may comprise one or more CH or CL domains. For example, the ligands may comprise a CH1 domain, CH2 or CH3 domain, and/or a CL domain, Cμ, Cμ2, Cμ3 or Cμ4 domains, or any combination thereof. A hinge region domain may also be included. Such combinations of domains may, for example, mimic natural antibodies, such as IgG or IgM, or fragments thereof, such as Fv, scFv, Fab or F(ab′)2 molecules. Other structures, such as a single arm of an IgG molecule comprising VH, VL, CH1 and CL domains, are envisaged.
In a preferred embodiment of the invention, the variable regions are selected from single domain V gene repertoires. Generally the repertoire of single antibody domains is displayed on the surface of filamentous bacteriophage. In a preferred embodiment each single antibody domain is selected by binding of a phage repertoire to antigen.
In a preferred embodiment of the invention each single variable domain may be selected for binding to its target antigen or epitope in the absence of a complementary variable region. In an alternative embodiment, the single variable domains may be selected for binding to its target antigen or epitope in the presence of a complementary variable region. Thus the first single variable domain may be selected in the presence of a third complementary variable domain, and the second variable domain may be selected in the presence of a fourth complementary variable domain. The complementary third or fourth variable domain may be the natural cognate variable domain having the same specificity as the single domain being tested, or a non-cognate complementary domain—such as a “dummy” variable domain.
Preferably, the dual specific ligand of the invention comprises only two variable domains although several such ligands may be incorporated together into the same protein, for example two such ligands can be incorporated into an IgG or a multimeric immunoglobulin, such as IgM. Alternatively, in another embodiment a plurality of dual specific ligands are combined to form a multimer. For example, two different dual specific ligands are combined to create a tetra-specific molecule.
It will be appreciated by one skilled in the art that the light and heavy variable regions of a dual-specific ligand produced according to the method of the present invention may be on the same polypeptide chain, or alternatively, on different polypeptide chains. In the case that the variable regions are on different polypeptide chains, then they may be linked via a linker, generally a flexible linker (such as a polypeptide chain), a chemical linking group, or any other method known in the art.
In a further aspect, the present invention provides a composition comprising a dual specific ligand, obtainable by a method of the present invention, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.
Moreover, the present invention provides a method for the treatment and/or prevention of disease using a ‘dual-specific ligand’ or a composition according to the present invention. In a second configuration, the present invention provides multispecific ligands which comprise at least two non-complementary variable domains. For example, the ligands may comprise a pair of VH domains or a pair of VL domains. Advantageously, the domains are of non-camelid origin; preferably they are human domains or comprise human framework regions (FWs) and one or more heterologous CDRs. CDRs and framework regions are those regions of an immunoglobulin variable domain as deemed in the Kabat database of Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest.
Preferred human framework regions are those encoded by germline gene segments DP47 and DPK9. Advantageously, FW1, FW2 and FW3 of a VH or VL domain have the sequence of FW1, FW2 or FW3 from DP47 or DPK9. The human frameworks may optionally contain mutations, for example up to about 5 amino acid changes or up to about 10 amino acid changes collectively in the human frameworks used in the ligands of the invention.
The variable domains in the multispecific ligands according to the second configuration of the invention may be arranged in an open or a closed conformation; that is, they may be arranged such that the variable domains can bind their cognate ligands independently and simultaneously, or such that only one of the variable domains may bind its cognate ligand at any one time.
The inventors have realised that under certain structural conditions, non-complementary variable domains (for example two light chain variable domains or two heavy chain variable domains) may be present in a ligand such that binding of a frst epitope to a first variable domain inhibits the binding of a second epitope to a second variable domain, even though such non-complementary domains do not operate together as a cognate pair.
Advantageously, the ligand comprises two or more pairs of variable domains; that is, it comprises at least four variable domains. Advantageously, the four variable domains comprise frameworks of human origin.
In a preferred embodiment, the human frameworks are identical to those of human germline sequences.
The present inventors consider that such antibodies will be of particular use in ligand binding assays for therapeutic and other uses.
Thus, in a first aspect of the second configuration, the present invention provides a method for producing a multispecific ligand comprising the steps of: a) selecting a first epitope binding domain by its ability to bind to a first epitope, b) selecting a second epitope binding domain by its ability to bind to a second epitope, c) combining the epitope binding domains; and d) selecting the closed conformation multispecific ligand by its ability to bind to said first second epitope and said second epitope.
In a further aspect of the second configuration, the invention provides method for preparing a closed conformation multi-specific ligand comprising a first epitope binding domain having a first epitope binding specificity and a non-complementary second epitope binding domain having a second epitope binding specificity, wherein the first and second binding specificities compete for epitope binding such that the closed conformation multi-specific ligand may not bind both epitopes simultaneously, said method comprising the steps of: a) selecting a first epitope binding domain by its ability to bind to a first epitope, b) selecting a second epitope binding domain by its ability to bind to a second epitope, c) combining the epitope binding domains such that the domains are in a closed conformation; and
d) selecting the closed conformation multispecific ligand by its ability to bind to said first second epitope and said second epitope, but not to both said first and second epitopes simultaneously.
Moreover, the invention provides a closed conformation multi-specific ligand comprising a first epitope binding domain having a first epitope binding specificity and a non-complementary second epitope binding domain having a second epitope binding specificity, wherein the first and second binding specificities compete for epitope binding such that the closed conformation multi-specific ligand may not bind both epitopes simultaneously.
An alternative embodiment of the above aspect of the of the second configuration of the invention optionally comprises a further step (b1) comprising selecting a third or further epitope binding domain. In this way the multi-specific ligand produced, whether of open or closed conformation, comprises more than two epitope binding specificities. In a preferred aspect of the second configuration of the invention, where the multi-specific ligand comprises more than two epitope binding domains, at least two of said domains are in a closed conformation and compete for binding; other domains may compete for binding or may be free to associate independently with their cognate epitope(s).
According to the present invention the term ‘multi-specific ligand’ refers to a ligand which possesses more than one epitope binding specificity as herein defined.
As herein defined the term ‘closed conformation’ (multi-specific ligand) means that the epitope binding domains of the ligand are attached to or associated with each other, optionally by means of a protein skeleton, such that epitope binding by one epitope binding domain competes with epitope binding by another epitope binding domain. That is, cognate epitopes may be bound by each epitope binding domain individually but not simultaneosuly. The closed conformation of the ligand can be achieved using methods herein described.
“Open conformation” means that the epitope binding domains of the ligand are attached to or associated with each other, optionally by means of a protein skeleton, such that epitope binding by one epitope binding domain does not compete with epitope binding by another epitope binding domain.
As referred to herein, the term ‘competes’ means that the binding of a first epitope to its cognate epitope binding domain is inhibited when a second epitope is bound to its cognate epitope binding domain. For example, binding may be inhibited sterically, for example by physical blocking of a binding domain or by alteration of the structure or environment of a binding domain such that its affinity or avidity for an epitope is reduced.
In a further embodiment of the second configuration of the invention, the epitopes may displace each other on binding. For example, a first epitope may be present on an antigen which, on binding to its cognate first binding domain, causes steric hindrance of a second binding domain, or a coformational change therein, which displaces the epitope bound to the second binding domain.
Advantageously, binding is reduced by 25% or more, advantageously 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% or more, and preferably up to 100% or nearly so, such that binding is completely inhibited. Binding of epitopes can be measured by conventional antigen binding assays, such as ELISA, by fluorescence based techniques, including FRET, or by techniques such as suface plasmon resonance which measure the mass of molecules.
According to the method of the present invention, advantageously, each epitope binding domain is of a different epitope binding specificity.
In the context of the present invention, first and second “epitopes” are understood to be epitopes which are not the same and are not bound by a single monospecific ligand. They may be on different antigens or on the same antigen, but separated by a sufficient distance that they do not form a single entity that could be bound by a single mono-specific VH/VL binding pair of a conventional antibody. Experimentally, if both of the individual variable domains in single chain antibody form (domain antibodies or dAbs) are separately competed by a monospecific VH/VL ligand against two epitopes then those two epitopes are not sufficiently far apart to be considered separate epitopes according to the present invention.
The closed conformation multispecific ligands of the invention do not include ligands as described in WO 02/02773. Thus, the ligands of the present invention do not comprise complementary VH/VL pairs which bind any one or more antigens or epitopes co-operatively. Instead, the ligands according to the invention preferably comprise non-complementary VH or VL pairs. Advantageously, each VH or VL domain in each VH or VL pair has a different epitope binding specificity, and the epitope binding sites are so arranged that the binding of an epitope at one site competes with the binding of an epitope at another site.
According to the present invention, advantageously, each epitope binding domain comprises an immunoglobulin variable domain. More advantageously, each immunoglobulin variable domain will be either a variable light chain domain (VL) or a variable heavy chain domain VH. In the second configuration of the present invention, the immunoglobulin domains when present on a ligand according to the present invention are non-complementary, that is they do not associate to form a VH/VL antigen binding site. Thus, multi-specific ligands as deemed in the second configuration of the invention comprise immunoglobulin domains of the same sub-type, that is either variable light chain domains (VL) or variable heavy chain domains (VH). Moreover, where the ligand according to the invention is in the closed conformation, the immunoglobulin domains may be of the camelid VHH type.
In an alternative embodiment, the ligand(s) according to the invention do not comprise a camelid VHH domain. More particularly, the ligand(s) of the invention do not comprise one or more amino acid residues that are specifc to camelid VHH domains as compared to human VH domains.
Advantageously, the single variable domains are derived from antibodies selected for binding activity against different antigens or epitopes. For example, the variable domains may be isolated at least in part by human immunisation. Alternative methods are known in the art, including isolation from human antibody libraries and synthesis of artificial antibody genes.
The variable domains advantageously bind superantigens, such as protein A or protein L. Binding to superantigens is a property of correctly folded antibody variable domains, and allows such domains to be isolated from, for example, libraries of recombinant or mutant domains. Epitope binding domains according to the present invention comprise a protein scaffold and epitope interaction sites (which are advantageously on the surface of the protein scaffold). Epitope binding domains may also be based on protein scaffolds or skeletons other than immunoglobulin domains. For example natural bacterial receptors such as SpA have been used as scaffolds for the grafting of CDRs to generate ligands which bind specifically to one or more epitopes. Details of this procedure are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,831,012. Other suitable scaffolds include those based on fibronectin and affibodies. Details of suitable procedures are described in WO 98/58965. Other suitable scaffolds include lipocallin and CTLA4, as described in van den Beuken et al., J. Mol. Biol. (2001) 310, 591-601, and scaffolds such as those described in W00069907 (Medical Research Council), which are based for example on the ring structure of bacterial GroEL or other chaperone polypeptides. Protein scaffolds may be combined; for example, CDRs may be grafted on to a CTLA4 scaffold and used together with immunoglobulin VH or VL domains to form a multivalent ligand. Likewise, fibronectin, lipocallin and other scaffolds may be combined.
It will be appreciated by one skilled in the art that the epitope binding domains of a closed conformation multispecific ligand produced according to the method of the present invention may be on the same polypeptide chain, or alternatively, on different polypeptide chains. In the case that the vaiable regions are on different polypeptide chains, then they may be linked via a linker, advantageously a flexible linker (such as a polypeptide chain), a chemical linking group, or any other method known in the art.
The first and the second epitope binding domains may be associated either covalently or non-covalently. In the case that the domains are covalently associated, then the association may be mediated for example by disulphide bonds.
In the second configuration of the invention, the first and the second epitopes are preferably different. They may be, or be part of, polypeptides, proteins or nucleic acids, which may be naturally occurring or synthetic. In this respect, the ligand of the invention may bind an epitope or antigen and act as an antagonist or agonist (eg, EPO receptor agonist). The epitope binding domains of the ligand in one embodiment have the same epitope specificity, and may for example simultaneously bind their epitope when multiple copies of the epitope are present on the same antigen. In another embodiment, these epitopes are provided on different antigens such that the ligand can bind the epitopes and bridge the antigens. One skilled in the art will appreciate that the choice of epitopes and antigens is large and varied. They may be for instance human or animal proteins, cytokines, cytokine receptors, enzymes co-factors for enzymes or DNA binding proteins.
Suitable cytokines and growth factors that can be targeted by mono- or dual-specific binding polypeptides as described herein include but are not limited to: ApoE, Apo-SAA, BDNF, BLyS, Cardiotrophin-1, EGF, EGF receptor, ENA-78, Eotaxin, Eotaxin-2, Exodus-2, EpoR, FGF-acidic, FGF-basic, fibroblast growth factor-10, FLT3 ligand, Fractalkine (CX3C), GDNF, G-CSF, GM-CSF, GF-01, insulin, IFN-y, IGF-I, IGF-II, IL-, IL-1p, 20 IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8 (72 a.a.), IL-8 (77 a.a.), IL-9, IL-10, IL-ll, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15, IL-16, IL-17, IL-18 (IGIF), Inhibin α, Inhibin B IP-10, keratinocyte growth factor-2 (KGF-2), KGF, Leptin, LIF, Lymphotactin, Mullerian inhibitory substance, monocyte colony inhibitory factor, monocyte attractant protein, M-CSF, MDC (67 a.a.), MDC (69 a.a.), MCP-1 (MCAF), MCP-2, MCP-3, MCP-4, MIG, MIP1α, MIP1β, MIP3α, MIP3β, MIP-4, myeloid progenitor inhibitor factor-1 (MPIF-1), NAP-2, Neurturin, Nerve growth factor, β-NGF, NT-3, NT-4, Oncostatin M, PDGF-AA, PDGF-AB, PDGF-BB, PF-4, RANTES, SDF12, SDF1β, SCF, SCGF, stem cell factor (SCF), TARC, TGF-α, TGF-β, TGF-β2, TGF-β3, tumour necrosis factor (TNF), TNF-α, TNF-β, TNF receptor I, TNF receptor II, TNIL-1, TPO, VEGF, VEGF receptor 1, VEGF receptor 2, VEGF receptor 3, GCP-2, GRO/MGSA, GRO-β, GRO-8, HCC1, 1-309, HER 1, HER 2, HER 3, HER 4, TACE recognition site, TNF BP-I and TNF BP-II, as well as any target disclosed in Annex 2 OR Annex 3 hereto, whether in combination as set forth in the Annexes, in a different combination, or individually.
Cytokine receptors include receptors for the foregoing cytokines, e.g. IL-1 R1; IL-GR; IL-10R; IL-18R, as well as receptors for cytokines set forth in Annex 2 or Annex 3 and also receptors disclosed in Annex 2 and 3.
It will be appreciated that this list is by no means exhaustive. Where the multispecific ligand binds to two epitopes (on the same or different antigens), the antigen(s) may be selected from this list.
Advantageously, dual specific ligands may be used to target cytokines and other molecules which cooperate synergistically in therapeutic situations in the body of an organism. The invention therefore provides a method for synergising the activity of two or more cytokines, comprising administering a dual specific ligand capable of binding to said two or more cytokines. In this aspect of the invention, the dual specific ligand may be any dual specific ligand, including a ligand composed of complementary and/or non-complementary domains, a ligand in an open conformation, and a ligand in a closed conformation. For example, this aspect of the invention relates to combinations of VH domains and VL domains, VH domains only and VL domains only.
Synergy in a therapeutic context may be achieved in a number of ways. For example, target combinations may be therapeutically active only if both targets are targeted by the ligand, whereas targeting one target alone is not therapeutically effective. In another embodiment, one target alone may provide some low or minimal therapeutic effect, but together with a second target the combination provides a synergistic increase in therapeutic effect.
Preferably, the cytokines bound by the dual specific ligands of this aspect of the invention are selected from the list shown in Annex 2.
Moreover, dual specific ligands may be used in oncology applications, where one specificity targets CD89, which is expressed by cytotoxic cells, and the other is tumor specific. Examples of tumor antigens which may be targetted are given in Annex 3.
In one embodiment of the second configuration of the invention, the variable domains are derived from an antibody directed against the first and/or second antigen or epitope. In a preferred embodiment the variable domains are derived from a repertoire of single variable antibody domains. In one example, the repertoire is a repertoire that is not created in an animal or a synthetic repertoire. In another example, the single variable domains are not isolated (at least in part) by animal immunization. Thus, the single domains can be isolated from a nerve library.
The second configuration of the invention, in another aspect, provides a multi-specific ligand comprising a first epitope binding domain having a first epitope binding specificity and a non-complementary second epitope binding domain having a second epitope binding specificity. The first and second binding specificities may be the same or different.
In a further aspect, the present invention provides a closed conformation multi-specific ligand comprising a first epitope binding domain having a first epitope binding specificity and a non-complementary second epitope binding domain having a second epitope binding specificity wherein the first and second binding specificities are capable of competing for epitope binding such that the closed conformation multi-specific ligand cannot bind both epitopes simultaneously.
In a still further aspect, the invention provides open conformation ligands comprising non-complementary binding domains, wherein the deomains are specific for a different epitope on the same target. Such ligands bind to targets with increased avidity.
Similarly, the invention provides multivalent ligands comprising non-complementary binding domains specific for the same epitope and directed to targets which comprise multiple copies of said epitope, such as IL-5, PDGF-AA, PDGF-BB, TGF β, TGF β2, TGF β3 and TNFα, for example human TNF Receptor 1 and human TNFα.
In a similar aspect, ligands according to the invention can be configured to bind individual epitopes with low affinity, such that binding to individual epitopes is not therapeutically significant; but the increased avidity resulting from binding to two epitopes provides a theapeutic benefit. In a particular example, epitopes may be targetted which are present individually on normal cell types, but present together only on abnormal or diseased cells, such as tumor cells. In such a situaton, only the abnormal or tumor diseased cells are effectively targetted by the bispecifc ligands according to the invention. Ligand specific for multiple copies of the same epitope, or adjacent epitopes, on the same target (known as chelating dAbs) may also be trimeric or polymeric (tertrameric or more) ligands comprising three, four or more non-complementary binding domains. For example, ligands may be constructed comprising three or four VH domains or VL domains.
Moreover, ligands are provided which bind to multisubunit targets, wherein each binding domain is specific for a subunit of said target. The ligand may be dimeric, trimeric or polymeric. Preferably, the multi-specific ligands according to the above aspects of the invention are obtainable by the method of the first aspect of the invention.
According to the above aspect of the second configuration of the invention, advantageously the first epitope binding domain and the second epitope binding domains are non-complementary immunoglobulin variable domains, as herein defined. That is either VH-VH or VL-VL variable domains.
Chelating dAbs in particular may be prepared according to a preferred aspect of the invention, namely the use of anchor dAbs, in which a library of dimeric, trimeric or multimeric dAbs is constructed using a vector which comprises a constant dAb upstream or downstream of a linker sequence, with a repertoire of second, third and further dAbs being inserted on the other side of the linker. For example, the anchor or guiding dAb may be TAR1-5 (VK), TAR1-27(V), TAR2h-5(VH) or TAR2h-6(VK).
In alternative methodologies, the use of linkers may be avoided, for example by the use of non-covalent bonding or natural affinity between binding domains such as VH and VL. The invention accordingly provides a method for preparing a chelating multimeric ligand comprising the steps of:
The first and second epitopes are adjacent such that a multimeric ligand is capable of binding to both epitopes simultaneously. This provides the ligand with the advantages of increased avidity of binding. Where the epitopes are the same, the increased avidity is obtained by the presence of multiple copies of the epitope on the target, allowing at least two copies to be simultaneously bound in order to obtain the increased avidity effect.
The binding domains may be associated by several methods, as well as the use of linkers.
For example, the binding domains may comprise cys residues, avidin and streptavidin groups or other means for non-covalent attachment post-synthesis; those combinations which bind to the target efficiently will be isolated. Alternatively, a linker may be present between the first and second binding domains, which are expressed as a single polypeptide from a single vector, which comprises the first binding domain, the linker and a repertoire of second binding domains, for instance as described above.
In a preferred aspect, the first and second binding domains associate naturally when bound to antigen; for example, VH and VK domains, when bound to adjacent epitopes, will naturally associate in a three-way interaction to form a stable dimer. Such associated proteins can be isolated in a target binding assay. An advantage of this procedure is that only binding domains which bind to closely adjacent epitopes, in the correct conformation, will associate and thus be isolated as a result of their increased avidity for the target.
In an alternative embodiment of the above aspect of the second configuration of the invention, at least one epitope binding domain comprises a non-immunoglobulin ‘protein scaffold’ or ‘protein skeleton’ as herein defined. Suitable non-immunoglobulin protein scaffolds include but are not limited to any of those selected from the group consisting of: SpA, fbronectin, GroEL and other chaperones, lipocallin, CCTLA4 and affibodies, as set forth above.
According to the above aspect of the second configuration of the invention, advantageously, the epitope binding domains are attached to a ‘protein skeleton’.
Advantageously, a protein skeleton according to the invention is an immunoglobulin skeleton. According to the present invention, the term ‘immunoglobulin skeleton’ refers to a protein which comprises at least one immunoglobulin fold and which acts as a nucleus for one or more epitope binding domains, as defined herein.
Preferred “immunoglobulin skeletons” as herein defined includes any one or more of those selected from the following: an immunoglobulin molecule comprising at least (i) the CL (kappa or lambda subclass) domain of an antibody; or (ii) the CH1 domain of an antibody heavy chain; an immunoglobulin molecule comprising the CH1 and CH2 domains of an antibody heavy chain; an immunoglobulin molecule comprising the CH1, CH2 and CH3 domains of an antibody heavy chain; or any of the subset (ii) in conjunction with the CL (kappa or lambda subclass) domain of an antibody. A hinge region domain may also be included. Such combinations of domains may, for example, mimic natural antibodies, such as IgG or IgM, or fragments thereof, such as Fv, scFv, Fab or F(ab′)2 molecules.
Those skilled in the art will be aware that this list is not intended to be exhaustive.
Linking of the skeleton to the epitope binding domains, as herein defined may be achieved at the polypeptide level, that is after expression of the nucleic acid encoding the skeleton and/or the epitope binding domains. Alternatively, the linking step may be performed at the nucleic acid level. Methods of linking a protein skeleton according to the present invention, to the one or more epitope binding domains include the use of protein chemistry and/or molecular biology techniques which will be familiar to those skilled in the art and are described herein.
Advantageously, the closed conformation multispecific ligand may comprise a first domain capable of binding a target molecule, and a second domain capable of binding a molecule or group which extends the half-life of the ligand. For example, the molecule or group may be a bulky agent, such as HSA or a cell matrix protein. As used herein, the phrase “molecule or group which extends the half-life of a ligand” refers to a molecule or chemical group which, when bound by a dual-specific ligand as described herein increases the in vivo half-life of such dual specific ligand when administered to an animal, relative to a ligand that does not bind that molecule or group. Examples of molecules or groups that extend the half-life of a ligand are described hereinbelow. In a preferred embodiment, the closed conformation multispecific ligand may be capable of binding the target molecule only on displacement of the half-life enhancing molecule or group. Thus, for example, a closed conformation multispecific ligand is maintained in circulation in the bloodstream of a subject by a bulky molecule such as HSA. When a target molecule is encountered, competition between the binding domains of the closed conformation multispecific ligand results in displacement of the HSA and binding of the target.
Ligands according to any aspect of the present invention, as well as dAb monomers useful in constructing such ligands, may advantageously dissociate from their cognate 20 target(s) with a Kd of 300 nM to 5 pM (ie, 3×10−7 to 5×10−12M), preferably 50 nM to 200 pM, or 1 nM to 100 pM, 1×10−7 M or less, 1×10−8 M or less, 1×10−9 M or less, 1×10−10 M or less, 1×10−11 M or less; and/or a Koff rate constant of 5×10−1 to 1×10−7 S−1, preferably 1×10−2 to 1×10−6 S−1, or 5×10−3 to 1×10−5 S−1, or 5×10−1 S−1 or less, or 1×10−2 S−1 or less, 1×10−3 S−1 or less, or 1×10−4 S−1 or less, or 1×10−5 S−1 or less, or 1×10−6 S−1 or less as determined by surface plasmon resonance. The Kd rate constant is defined as Koff/Kon.
In particular the invention provides an anti-TNF-α dAb monomer (or dual specific ligand comprising such a dAb), homodimer, heterodimer or homotrimer ligand, wherein each dAb binds TNF-α. The ligand binds to TNF-α with a Kd of 300 nM to 5 pM (ie, 3×10−7 to 5×10−12M), preferably 50 nM to 20 pM, more preferably 5 nM to 200 pM and most preferably 1 nM to 100 pM; expressed in an alternative manner, the Kd is 1×10−7 M or less, preferably 1×10−8 M or less, more preferably 1×10−9 M or less, advantageously 1×10−10 M or less and most preferably 1×10−11 M or less; and/or a Koff rate constant of 5×10−1 to 1×10−7 S−1, preferably 1×10−2 to 1×10−6 S−1, more preferably 5×10−3 to 1×10−5 S−1, for example 5×10−1 S−1, or less, preferably 1×10−2 S−1 or less, more preferably 1×10−3 S−1 or less, advantageously 1×10−4 S−1 or less, further advantageously 1×10−5 S−1 or less, and most preferably 1×10−6 S−1 or less, as determined by surface plasmon resonance.
Preferably, the ligand neutralises TNF-α in a standard L929 assay with an ND50 of 500 nM to 50 pM, preferably or 100 nM to 50 pM, advantageously 10 nM to 100 pM, more preferably 1 nM to 100 pM; for example 50 nM or less, preferably 5 nM or less, advantageously 500 pM or less, more preferably 200 pM or less and most preferably 100 pM or less.
Preferably, the ligand inhibits binding of TNF-α to TNF-α Receptor I (p55 receptor) with an IC50 of 500 nM to 50 pM, preferably 100 nM to 50 pM, more preferably 5 10 nM to 100 pM, advantageously 1 nM to 100 pM; for example 50 nM or less, preferably 5 nM or less, more preferably 500 pM or less, advantageously 200 pM or less, and most preferably 100 pM or less. Preferably, the TNF-α is Human TNF-α.
Furthermore, the invention provides an anti-TNF Receptor I dAb monomer, or dual specific ligand comprising such a dAb, that binds to TNF Receptor I with a Kd of 300 nM to 5 pM (ie, 3×10−7 to 5×10−12M), preferably 50 nM to 20 pM, more preferably 5 nM to 200 pM and most preferably 1 nM to 100 pM, for example 1×10−7 M or less, preferably 1×10−8 M or less, more preferably 1×10−9 M or less, advantageously 1×10−10 M or less and most preferably 1×10−11 M or less; and/or a Koff rate constant of 5×10−1 to 1×10−7 S−1, preferably 1×10−2 to 1×10−6 S−1, more preferably 5×10−3 to 1×10−5 S−1, for example 5×10−1S−1 or less, preferably 1×10−2S−1 or less, more preferably 1×10−3 S−1 or less, advantageously 1×10−4 S−1 or less, further advantageously 1×10−5 S−1 or less, and most preferably 1×10−6 S-1 or less, as determined by surface plasmon resonance.
Preferably, the dAb monomer or ligand neutralises TNF-α in a standard assay (eg, the L929 or HeLa assays described herein) with an ND50 of 500 nM to 50 pM, preferably 100 nM to 50 pM, more preferably 10 nM to 100 pM, advantageously 1 nM to 100 pM; for example 50 nM or less, preferably 5 nM or less, more preferably 500 pM or less, advantageously 200 pM or less, and most preferably 100 pM or less.
Preferably, the dAb monomer or ligand inhibits binding of TNF-α to TNF-α 5 Receptor I (p55 receptor) with an IC50 of 500 nM to 50 pM, preferably 100 nM to 50 pM, more preferably 10 nM to 100 pM, advantageously 1 nM to 100 pM; for example 50 nM or less, preferably 5 nM or less, more preferably 500 pM or less, advantageously 200 pM or less, and most preferably 100 pM or less. Preferably, the TNF Receptor I target is Human TNF-α.
Furthermore, the invention provides a dAb monomer(or dual specific ligand comprising such a dAb) that binds to serum albumin (SA) with a Kd of 1 nM to 500 pM (ie, 1×10−9 to 5×10−4), preferably 100 nM to 10, uM. Preferably, for a dual specific ligand comprising a first anti-SA dAb and a second dAb to another target, the affinity (eg Kd and/or Koff as measured by surface plasmon resonance, eg using BiaCore) of the second dAb for its target is from 1 to 100000 times (preferably 100 to 100000, more preferably 1000 to 100000, or 10000 to 100000 times) the affinity of the first dAb for SA. For example, the first dAb binds SA with an affinity of approximately 10 μM, while the second dAb binds its target with an affinity of 100 pM. Preferably, the serum albumin is human serum albumin (HSA).
In one embodiment, the first dAb (or a dAb monomer) binds SA (eg, HSA) with a Kd of approximately 50, preferably 70, and more preferably 100, 150 or 200 nM.
The invention moreover provides dimers, trimers and polymers of the aforementioned dAb monomers, in accordance with the foregoing aspect of the present invention.
Ligands according to the invention, including dAb monomers, dimers and trimers, can be linked to an antibody Fc region, comprising one or both of CH2 and CH3 domains, and optionally a hinge region. For example, vectors encoding ligands linked as a single nucleotide sequence to an Fc region may be used to prepare such polypeptides.
In a further aspect of the second configuration of the invention, the present invention provides one or more nucleic acid molecules encoding at least a multispecific ligand as herein defined. In one embodiment, the ligand is a closed conformation ligand. In another embodiment, it is an open conformation ligand. The multispecific ligand may be s encoded on a single nucleic acid molecule; alternatively, each epitope binding domain may be encoded by a separate nucleic acid molecule. Where the ligand is encoded by a single nucleic acid molecule, the domains may be expressed as a fusion polypeptide, or may be separately expressed and subsequently linked together, for example using chemical linking agents. Ligands expressed from separate nucleic acids will be linked together by appropriate means.
The nucleic acid may further encode a signal sequence for export of the polypeptides from a host cell upon expression and may be fused with a surface component of a filamentous bacteriophage particle (or other component of a selection display system) upon expression. Leader sequences, which may be used in bacterial expresion and/or phage or phagemid display, include pelB, stII, ompA, phoA, bla and pelA.
In a further aspect of the second configuration of the invention the present invention provides a vector comprising nucleic acid according to the present invention.
In a yet further aspect, the present invention provides a host cell transfected with a vector according to the present invention.
Expression from such a vector may be configured to produce, for example on the surface of a bacteriophage particle, epitope binding domains for selection. This allows selection of displayed domains and thus selection of ‘multi specific ligands’ using the method of the present invention.
In a preferred embodiment of the second configuration of the invention, the epitope binding domains are immunoglobulin variable regions and are selected from single domain V gene repertoires. Generally the repertoire of single antibody domains is displayed on the surface of filamentous bacteriophage. In a preferred embodiment each single antibody domain is selected by binding of a phage repertoire to antigen.
The present invention further provides a kit comprising at least a multispecific ligand according to the present invention, which may be an open conformation or closed conformation ligand. Kits according to the invention may be, for example, diagnostic kits, therapeutic kits, kits for the detection of chemical or biological species, and the like.
In further aspect still of the second configuration of the invention, the present invention provides a homogeneous immunoassay using a ligand according to the present invention.
In a further aspect still of the second configuration of the invention, the present invention provides a composition comprising a closed conformation multispecific ligand, obtainable by a method of the present invention, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient. Moreover, the present invention provides a method for the treatment of disease using a closed conformation multispecific ligand or a composition according to the present invention. In a preferred embodiment of the invention the disease is cancer or an inflammatory disease, e.g. rheumatoid arthritis, asthma or Crohn's disease.
In a further aspect of the second configuration of the invention, the present invention provides a method for the diagnosis, including diagnosis of disease using a closed conformation multispecific ligand, or a composition according to the present invention.
Thus in general the binding of an analyte to a closed conformation multispecific ligand may be exploited to displace an agent, which leads to the generation of a signal on displacement. For example, binding of analyte (second antigen) could displace an enzyme (first antigen) bound to the antibody providing the basis for an immunoassay, especially if the enzyme were held to the antibody through its active site.
Thus in a final aspect of the second configuration, the present invention provides a method for detecting the presence of a target molecule, comprising:
(a) providing a closed conformation multispecifc ligand bound to an agent,
said ligand being specific for the target molecule and the agent, wherein the agent which is bound by the ligand leads to the generation of a detectable signal on displacement from the ligand; (b) exposing the closed conformation multispecific ligand to the target molecule; and (c) detecting the signal generated as a result of the displacement of the agent.
According to the above aspect of the second configuration of the invention, advantageously, the agent is an enzyme, which is inactive when bound by the closed conformation multi-specific ligand. Alternatively, the agent may be any one or more selected from the group consisting of the following: the substrate for an enzyme, and a fluorescent, luminescent or chromogenic molecule which is inactive or quenched when bound by the ligand.
Sequences similar or homologous (e.g., at least about 70% sequence identity) to the sequences disclosed herein are also part of the invention. In some embodiments, the sequence identity at the amino acid level can be about 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or higher. At the nucleic acid level, the sequence identity can be about 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or higher. Alternatively, substantial identity exists when the nucleic acid segments will hybridize under selective hybridization conditions (e.g., very high stringency hybridization conditions), to the complement of the strand. The nucleic acids may be present in whole cells, in a cell lysate, or in a partially purified or substantially pure form.
Calculations of “homology” or “sequence identity” or “similarity” between two sequences (the terms are used interchangeably herein) are performed as follows. The sequences are aligned for optimal comparison purposes (e.g., gaps can be introduced in one or both of a first and a second amino acid or nucleic acid sequence for optimal alignment and non-homologous sequences can be disregarded for comparison purposes).
In a preferred embodiment, the length of a reference sequence aligned for comparison purposes is at least 30%, preferably at least 40%, more preferably at least 50%, even more preferably at least 60%, and even more preferably at least 70%, 80%, 90%, 100% of the length of the reference sequence. The amino acid residues or nucleotides at corresponding amino acid positions or nucleotide positions are then compared. When a position in the first sequence is occupied by the same amino acid residue or nucleotide as the corresponding position in the second sequence, then the molecules are identical at that position (as used herein amino acid or nucleic acid “homology” is equivalent to amino acid or nucleic acid “identity”). The percent identity between the two sequences is a function of the number of identical positions shared by the sequences, taking into account the number of gaps, and the length of each gap, which need to be introduced for optimal alignment of the two sequences.
Advantageously, the BLAST algorithm (version 2.0) is employed for sequence alignment, with parameters set to default values. The BLAST algorithm is described in detail at the world wide web site (“www”) of the National Center for Biotechnology Information (“.ncbi”) of the National Institutes of Health (“nib”) of the U.S. government (“.gov”), in the “/Blast!” directory, in the “blast_help.html” file. The search parameters are defined as follows, and are advantageously set to the defined default parameters.
BLAST (Basic Local Alignment Search Tool) is the heuristic search algorithm employed by the programs blastp, blastn, blastx, tblastn, and tblastx; these programs ascribe significance to their findings using the statistical methods of Karlin and Altschul, 1990, 20 Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87(6):2264-8 (see the “blast_help.html” file, as described above) with a few enhancements. The BLAST programs were tailored for sequence similarity searching, for example to identify homologues to a query sequence. The programs are not generally useful for motif-style searching. For a discussion of basic issues in similarity searching of sequence databases, see Altschul et al. (1994).
The five BLAST programs available at the National Center for Biotechnology Information web site perform the following tasks: “blastp” compares an amino acid query sequence against a protein sequence database; “blastn” compares a nucleotide query sequence against a nucleotide sequence database; “blastx” compares the six-frame conceptual translation products of a nucleotide query sequence (both strands) against a protein sequence database; “tblastn” compares a protein query sequence against a nucleotide sequence database dynamically translated in all six reading frames (both strands). “tblastx” compares the six-frame translations of a nucleotide query sequence against the six-frame translations of a nucleotide sequence database. BLAST uses the following search parameters:
HISTOGRAM Display a histogram of scores for each search; default is yes. (See s parameter H in the BLAST Manual).
DESCRIPTIONS Restricts the number of short descriptions of matching sequences reported to the number specified; default limit is 100 descriptions. (See parameter V in the manual page). See also EXPECT and CUTOFF.
ALIGNMENTS Restricts database sequences to the number specified for which high scoring segment pairs (HSPs) are reported; the default limit is 50. If more database sequences than this happen to satisfy the statistical significance threshold for reporting (see EXPECT and CUTOFF below), only the matches ascribed the greatest statistical significance are reported. (See parameter B in the BLAST Manual).
EXPECT The statistical significance threshold for reporting matches against database sequences; the default value is 10, such that 10 matches are expected to be found merely by chance, according to the stochastic model of Karlin and Altschul (1990). If the statistical significance ascribed to a match is greater than the EXPECT threshold, the match will not be reported. Lower EXPECT thresholds are more stringent, leading to fewer chance matches being reported. Fractional values are acceptable. (See parameter E in the BLAST Manual).
CUTOFF Cutoff score for reporting high-scoring segment pairs. The default value is calculated from the EXPECT value (see above). HSPs are reported for a database sequence only if the statistical significance ascribed to them is at least as high as would be ascribed to a lone HSP having a score equal to the CUTOFF value. Higher CUTOFF values are more stringent, leading to fewer chance matches being reported. (See parameter S in the BLAST Manual). Typically, significance thresholds can be more intuitively managed using EXPECT.
MATRIX Specify an alternate scoring matrix for BLASTP, BLASTX, TBLASTN and TBLASTX. The default matrix is BLOSUM62 (Henikoff & Henikoff, 1992, Proc. Natl. 30 Acad. Sci. USA 89(22):10915-9). The valid alternative choices include: PAM40, PAM120, PAM:250 and IDENTITY. No alternate scoring matrices are available for BLASTN; specifying the MATRIX directive in BLASTN requests returns an error response.
STRAND Restrict a TBLASTN search to just the top or bottom strand of the database sequences; or restrict a BLASTN, BLASTX or TBLASTX search to just reading frames on the top or bottom strand of the query sequence.
FILTER Mask off segments of the query sequence that have low compositional complexity, as determined by the SEG program of Wootton & Federhen (1993) Computers and Chemistry 17:149-163, or segments consisting of short-periodicity internal repeats, as determined by the XNU program of Claverie & States, 1993, Computers and Chemistry 17:191-201, or, for BLASTN, by the DUST program of Tatusov and Lipman (see the world wide web site of the NCBI). Filtering can eliminate statistically significant but biologically uninteresting reports from the blast output (e.g., hits against common acidic-, basic- or proline-rich regions), leaving the more biologically interesting regions of the query sequence available for specific matching against database sequences. Low complexity sequence found by a filter program is substituted using the letter “N” in nucleotide sequence (e.g., “N” repeated 13 times) and the letter “X” in protein sequences (e.g., “X” repeated 9 times).
Filtering is only applied to the query sequence (or its translation products), not to database sequences. Default filtering is DUST for BLASTN, SEG for other programs. It is not unusual for nothing at all to be masked by SEG, XNU, or both, when applied to sequences in SWISS-PROT, so filtering should not be expected to always yield an effect. Furthermore, in some cases, sequences are masked in their entirety, indicating that the statistical significance of any matches reported against the unfiltered query sequence should be suspect.
NCBI-gi Causes NCBI gi identifiers to be shown in the output, in addition to the accession and/or locus name.
Most preferably, sequence comparisons are conducted using the simple BLAST search algorithm provided at the NCBI world wide web site described above, in the “/BLAST” directory.
Preparation of Immunoglobulin Based Multi-Specific Ligands.
Dual specific ligands according to the invention, whether open or closed in conformation according to the desired configuration of the invention, may be prepared according to previously established techniques, used in the field of antibody engineering, for the preparation of scFv, “phage” antibodies and other engineered antibody molecules. Techniques for the preparation of antibodies, and in particular bispecific antibodies, are for example described in the following reviews and the references cited therein: Winter & Milstein, (1991) Nature 349:293-299; Pluckthun (1992) Immunological Reviews 5 130:151-188; Wright et al., (1992) Crit. Rev. Immunol.12:125-168; Holliger, P. & Winter, G. (1993) Curr. Op. Biotechn. 4, 446-449; Carter, et al. (1995) J. Hematother. 4, 463-470; Chester, K. A. & Hawkins, R. E. (1995) Trends Biotechn. 13, 294-300; Hoogenboom, H. R. (1997) Nature Biotechnol. 15, 125-126, Fearon, D. (1997) Nature Biotechnol. 15, 618-619; Pluckthun, A. & Pack, P. (1997) Immunotechnology 3, 83-105; Carter, P. & Merchant, A. M. (1997) Curr. Opin. Biotechnol. 8, 449-454; Holliger, P. & Winter, G. (1997) Cancer Immunol. Immunother. 45, 128-130.
The invention provides for the selection of variable domains against two different antigens or epitopes, and subsequent combination of the variable domains. The techniques employed for selection of the variable domains employ libraries and selection procedures which are known in the art. Natural libraries (Marks et al. (1991) J. Mol. Biol., 222: 581; Vaughan et al. (1996) Nature Biotech., 14: 309) which use rearranged V genes harvested from human B cells are well known to those skilled in the art. Synthetic libraries (Hoogenboom & Winter (1992) J. Mol. Biol., 227: 381; Barbas et al. (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 89: 4457; Nissim et al. (1994) EMBO J., 13: 692; Griffiths et al. (1994) EMBO], 13: 3245; De Kruif et al. (1995) J. Mol. Biol., 248: 97) are prepared by cloning immunoglobulin V genes, usually using PCR. Errors in the PCR process can lead to a high degree of randomization. VH and/or VL libraries may be selected against target antigens or epitopes separately, in which case single domain binding is directly selected for, or together.
A preferred method for making a dual specific ligand according to the present invention comprises using a selection system in which a repertoire of variable domains is selected for binding to a first antigen or epitope and a repertoire of variable domains is selected for binding to a second antigen or epitope. The selected variable first and second variable domains are then combined and the dual-specific ligand selected for binding to both first and second antigen or epitope. Closed conformation ligands are selected for binding both first and second antigen or epitope in isolation but not simultaneously.
A. Library Vector Systems.
A variety of selection systems are known in the art which are suitable for use in the present invention. Examples of such systems are described below.
Bacteriophage lambda expression systems may be screened directly as bacteriophage plaques or as colonies of lysogens, both as previously described (Muse et al. (1989) 20 Science, 246: 1275; Caton and Koprowski (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 87; Mullinax et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 87: 8095; Persson et al. (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 88: 2432) and are of use in the invention. Whilst such expression systems can be used to screen up to 106 different members of a library, they are not really suited to screening of larger numbers (greater than 106 members).
Of particular use in the construction of libraries are selection display systems, which enable a nucleic acid to be linked to the polypeptide it expresses. As used herein, a selection display system is a system that permits the selection, by suitable display means, of the individual members of the library by binding the generic and/or target ligands.
Selection protocols for isolating desired members of large libraries are known in the art, as typified by phage display techniques. Such systems, in which diverse peptide sequences are displayed on the surface of filamentous bacteriophage (Scott and Smith (1990) Science, 249: 386), have proven useful for creating libraries of antibody fragments (and the nucleotide sequences that encoding them) for the in vitro selection and amplification of specific antibody fragments that bind a target antigen (McCafferty et al., WO 92/01047). The nucleotide sequences encoding the VH and VL regions are linked to s gene fragments which encode leader signals that direct them to the periplasmic space of E. col; and as a result the resultant antibody fragments are displayed on the surface of the bactenophage, typically as fusions to bacteriophage coat proteins (e.g., pIII or pVIII).
Alternatively, antibody fragments are displayed externally on lambda phage capsids (phagebodies). An advantage of phage-based display systems is that, because they are biological systems, selected library members can be amplified simply by growing the phage containing the selected library member in bacterial cells. Furthermore, since the nucleotide sequence that encode the polypeptide library member is contained on a phage or phagemid vector, sequencing, expression and subsequent genetic manipulation is relatively straightforward.
Methods for the construction of bacteriophage antibody display libraries and lambda phage expression libraries are well known in the art (McCafferty et al. (1990) Nature, 348: 552; Kang et al. (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 88: 4363; Clackson et al. (1991) Nature, 352: 624; Lowman et al. (1991) Biochemistry, 30: 10832; Burton et al. 20 (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci U.S.A., 88: 10134; Hoogenboom et al. (1991) Nucleic Acids Res., 19: 4133; Chang et al. (1991) J. Immunol., 147: 3610; Breitling et al. (1991) Gene, 104: 147; Marks et al. (1991) supra; Barbas et al. (1992) supra; Hawkins and Winter (1992) J. Immunol., 22: 867; Marks et al., 1992, J. Biol. Chem., 267: 16007; Lerner et al. (1992) Science, 258: 1313, incorporated herein by reference).
One particularly advantageous approach has been the use of scFv phage-libraries (Huston et al., 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci U.S.A., 85: 5879-5883; Chaudhary et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci U.S.A., 87: 1066-1070; McCafferty et al. (1990) supra; Clackson et al. (1991) Nature, 352: 624; Marks et al. (1991) J. Mol. Biol., 222: 581; Chiswell et al. 30 (1992) Trends Biotech., 10: 80; Marks et al. (1992) J. Biol. Chem., 267). Various embodiments of scFv libraries displayed on bacteriophage coat proteins have been described. Refinements of phage display approaches are also known, for example as described in WO96/06213 and WO92/01047 (Medical Research Council et al.) and WO97/08320 (Morphosys), which are incorporated herein by reference.
Other systems for generating libraries of polypeptides involve the use of cell-free enzymatic machinery for the in vitro synthesis of the library members. In one method, RNA molecules are selected by alternate rounds of selection against a target ligand and PCR amplification (Tuerk and Gold (1990) Science, 249: 505; Ellington and Szostak (1990) Nature, 346:818). A similar technique may be used to identify DNA sequences which bind a predetermined human transcription factor (Thiesen and Bach (1990) Nucleic Acids Res., 18: 3203; Beaudry and Joyce (1992) Science, 257: 635;WO92/05258 and WO92/14843). In a similar way, in vitro translation can be used to synthesise polypeptides as a method for generating large libraries. These methods which generally comprise stabilised polysome complexes, are described further in WO88/08453, WO90/05785,WO90/07003, WO91/02076,WO91/05058, and WO92/02536. Alternative display systems which are not phage-based, such as those disclosed in WO95/22625 and WO95/11922 (Affymax) use the polysomes to display polypeptides for selection.
A still further category of techniques involves the selection of repertoires in artificial compartments, which allow the linkage of a gene with its gene product. For example, a selection system in which nucleic acids encoding desirable gene products may be selected in microcapsules formed by water-in-oil emulsions is described in WO99/0267 1, WO00/40712 and Tawfik & Griffiths (1998) Nature Biotechnol 16(7), 652-6. Genetic elements encoding a gene product having a desired activity are compartmentalised into microcapsules and then transcribed and/or translated to produce their respective gene products (RNA or protein) within the microcapsules. Genetic elements which produce gene product having desired activity are subsequently sorted. This approach selects gene products of interest by detecting the desired activity by a variety of means.
B. Library Construction.
Libraries intended for selection, may be constructed using techniques known in the art, for example as set forth above, or may be purchased from commercial sources. Libraries which are useful in the present invention are described, for example, in WO99/20749. Once a vector system is chosen and one or more nucleic acid sequences encoding polypeptides of interest are cloned into the library vector, one may generate diversity within the cloned molecules by undertaking mutagenesis prior to expression; alternatively, the encoded proteins may be expressed and selected, as described above, before mutagenesis and additional rounds of selection are performed. Mutagenesis of nucleic acid sequences encoding structurally optimised polypeptides is carried out by standard molecular methods. Of particular use is the polymerase chain reaction, or PCR, (Mullis and Faloona (1987) Methods E'nzymol., 155: 335, herein incorporated by reference). PCR, which uses multiple cycles of DNA replication catalysed by a thermostable, DNA-dependent DNA polymerase to amplify the target sequence of interest, is well known in the art. The construction of various antibody libraries has been discussed in Winter et al. (1994) Ann. Rev. Immunology 12, 433-55, and references cited therein.
PCR is performed using template DNA (at least 1 fg; more usefully, 1-1000 ng) and at least 25 pmol of oligonucleotide primers; it may be advantageous to use a larger amount of primer when the primer pool is heavily heterogeneous, as each sequence is represented by only a small fraction of the molecules of the pool, and amounts become limiting in the later amplification cycles. A typical reaction mixture includes: 2 μl of DNA, 25 pmol of oligonucleotide primer, 2.5 μl of 10 X PCR buffer 1 (Perkin-Elmer, Foster City, Calif.), 0.4 μl of 1.25 μM dNTP, 0.15 μl (or 2.5 units) of Taq DNA polymerase (Perkin Elmer, Foster City, Calif.) and deionized water to a total volume of 25 μl. Mineral oil is overlaid and the PCR is performed using a programmable thermal cycler. The length and temperature of each step of a PCR cycle, as well as the number of cycles, is adjusted in accordance to the stringency requirements in effect. Annealing temperature and timing are determined both by the efficiency with which a primer is expected to anneal to a template and the degree of mismatch that is to be tolerated; obviously, when nucleic acid molecules are simultaneously amplified and mutagenised, mismatch is required, at least in the first round of synthesis. The ability to optimise the stringency of primer annealing conditions is well within the knowledge of one of moderate skill in the art. An annealing temperature of between 30° C. and 72° C. is used. Initial denaturation of the template molecules normally occurs at between 92° C. and 99° C. for 4 minutes, followed by 20-40 cycles consisting of denaturation (94-99° C. for 15 seconds to 1 minute), annealing (temperature determined as discussed above; 1-2 minutes), and extension (72° C. for 1-5 minutes, depending on the length of the amplified product). Final extension is generally for 4 minutes at 72° C., and may be followed by an indefinite (0-24 hour) step at 4° C.
C. Combining Single Variable Domains.
Domains useful in the invention, once selected, may be combined by a variety of methods known in the art, including covalent and non-covalent methods.
Preferred methods include the use of polypeptide linkers, as described, for example, in connection with scFv molecules (Bird et al., (1988) Science 242:423-426). Discussion of suitable linkers is provided in Bird et al. Science 242, 423-426; Hudson et al, Journal Immunol. Methods 231 (1999) 177-189; Hudson et al, Proc Nat Acad Sci USA 85, 5879 5883. Linkers are preferably flexible, allowing the two single domains to interact. One linker example is a (Gly4 Ser)n linker, where n=1 to 8, eg, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 7. The linkers used in diabodies, which are less flexible, may also be employed (Holliger et al., (1993) PNAS (USA) 90:6444-6448).
In one embodiment, the linker employed is not an immunoglobulin hinge region.
Variable domains may be combined using methods other than linkers. For example, the use of disulphide bridges, provided through naturally-occurring or engineered cysteine residues, may be exploited to stabilise VH-VH, VL-VL, or VH-VL dimers (Reiter et al., (1994) Protein Eng. 7:697-704) or by remodelling the interface between the variable domains to improve the “fit” and thus the stability of interaction (Ridgeway et al., (1996) Protein Eng. 7:617-621; Zhu et al., (1997) Protein Science 6:781-788).
Other techniques for joining or stabilising variable domains of immunoglobulins, and in particular antibody VH domains, may be employed as appropriate.
In accordance with the present invention, dual specific ligands can be in “closed” conformations in solution. A “closed” configuration is that in which the two domains (for example VH and VL) are present in associated form, such as that of an associated VL pair which forms an antibody binding site. For example, scFv may be in a closed conformation, depending on the arrangement of the linker used to link the VH and VL domains. If this is sufficiently flexible to allow the domains to associate, or rigidly holds them in the associated position, it is likely that the domains will adopt a closed conformation.
Similarly, VH domain pairs and VL domain pairs may exist in a closed conformation. Generally, this will be a function of close association of the domains, such as by a rigid linker, in the ligand molecule. Ligands in a closed conformation will be unable to bind both the molecule which increases the half-life of the ligand and a second target molecule. Thus, the ligand will typically only bind the second target molecule on dissociation from the molecule which increases the half-life of the ligand.
Moreover, the construction of VH/VH, VL/VL or VH/VL dimers without linkers provides for competition between the domains.
Ligands according to the invention may moreover be in an open conformation. In such a conformation, the ligands will be able to simultaneously bind both the molecule which increases the half-life of the ligand and the second target molecule. Typically, variable domains in an open configuration are (in the case of VH VL pairs) held far enough apart for the domains not to interact and form an antibody binding site and not to compete for binding to their respective epitopes. In the case of VH/VH or VI/VL dimers, the domains are not forced together by rigid linkers. Naturally, such domain pairings will not compete for antigen binding or form an antibody binding site.
Fab fragments and whole antibodies will exist primarily in the closed conformation, although it will be appreciated that open and closed dual specific ligands are likely to exist in a variety of equilibria under different circumstances. Binding of the ligand to a target is likely to shift the balance of the equilibrium towards the open configuration. Thus, certain ligands according to the invention can exist in two conformations in solution, one of which (the open form) can bind two antigens or epitopes independently, whilst the alternative conformation (the closed form) can only bind one antigen or epitope; antigens or epitopes thus compete for binding to the ligand in this conformation.
Although the open form of the dual specific ligand may thus exist in equilibrium with the closed form in solution, it is envisaged that the equilibrium will favour the closed form; moreover, the open form can be sequestered by target binding into a closed conformation. Preferably, therefore, certain dual specific ligands of the invention are present in an equilibrium between two (open and closed) conformations.
Dual specific ligands according to the invention may be modified in order to favour an open or closed conformation. For example, stabilisation of VH-VL interactions with disulphide bonds stabilises the closed conformation. Moreover, linkers used to join the domains, including VH domain and VL domain pairs, may be constructed such that the open from is favoured; for example, the linkers may sterically hinder the association of the domains, such as by incorporation of large amino acid residues in opportune locations, or the designing of a suitable rigid structure which will keep the domains physically spaced apart.
The binding of the dual-specific ligand to its specific antigens or epitopes can be tested by methods which will be familiar to those skilled in the art and include ELISA. In a preferred embodiment of the invention binding is tested using monoclonal phage ELISA.
Phage ELISA may be performed according to any suitable procedure: an exemplary protocol is set forth below.
Populations of phage produced at each round of selection can be screened for binding by ELISA to the selected antigen or epitope, to identify “polyclonal” phage antibodies. Phage from single infected bacterial colonies from these populations can then be screened by ELISA to identify “monoclonal” phage antibodies. It is also desirable to screen soluble antibody fragments for binding to antigen or epitope, and this can also be undertaken by ELISA using reagents, for example, against a C- or N-terminal tag (see for example Winter et al. (1994) Ann. Rev. Immunology 12, 433-55 and references cited therein).
The diversity of the selected phage monoclonal antibodies may also be assessed by gel 5 electrophoresis of PCR products (Marks et al. 1991, supra; Nissim et al. 1994 supra), probing (Tomlinson et al., 1992) J. Mol. Biol. 227, 776) or by sequencing of the vector DNA.
E. Structure of ‘Dual-Specific Ligands’.
As described above, an antibody is herein defined as an antibody (for example IgG, IgM, IgA, IgA, IgE) or fragment (Fab, Fv, disulphide linked Fv, scFv, diabody) which comprises at least one heavy and a light chain variable domain, at least two heavy chain variable domains or at least two light chain variable domains. (The term antibody also encompasses a dAb). It may be at least partly derived from any species naturally producing an antibody, or created by recombinant DNA technology; whether isolated from serum, B-cells, hybridomas, transfectomas, yeast or bacteria).
In a preferred embodiment of the invention the dual-specific ligand comprises at least one 20 single heavy chain variable domain of an antibody and one single light chain variable domain of an antibody, or two single heavy or light chain variable domains. For example, the ligand may comprise a VH/VL pair, a pair of VH domains or a pair of VL domains.
The first and the second variable domains of such a ligand may be on the same polypeptide chain. Alternatively they may be on separate polypeptide chains. In the case that they are on the same polypeptide chain they may be linked by a linker, which is preferentially a peptide sequence, as described above.
The first and second variable domains may be covalently or non-covalently associated. In the case that they are covalently associated, the covalent bonds may be disulphide bonds.
In the case that the variable domains are selected from V-gene repertoires selected for instance using phage display technology as herein described, then these variable domains comprise a universal framework region, such that is they may be recognised by a specific generic ligand as herein defined. The use of universal frameworks, generic ligands and the like is described in WO99/20749.
Where V-gene repertoires are used variation in polypeptide sequence is preferably located within the structural loops of the variable domains. The polypeptide sequences of either variable domain may be altered by DNA shuffling or by mutation in order to enhance the interaction of each variable domain with its complementary pair. DNA shuffling is known in the art and taught, for example, by Stemmer, 1994, Nature 370: 389-391 and U.S. Pat. No. 6,297,053, both of which are incorporated herein by reference. Other methods of mutagenesis are well known to those of skill in the art.
In a preferred embodiment of the invention the ‘dual-specific ligand’ is a single chain Fv fragment. In an alternative embodiment of the invention, the ‘dual-specific ligand’ consists of a Fab format.
In a further aspect, the present invention provides nucleic acid encoding at least a ‘dual specific ligand’ as herein defined.
One skilled in the art will appreciate that, depending on the aspect of the invention, both antigens or epitopes may bind simultaneously to the same antibody molecule. Alternatively, they may compete for binding to the same antibody molecule. For example, where both epitopes are bound simultaneously, both variable domains of a dual specific ligand are able to independently bind their target epitopes. Where the domains compete, the one variable domain is capable of binding its target, but not at the same time as the other variable domain binds its cognate target; or the first variable domain is capable of binding its target, but not at the same time as the second variable domain binds its cognate target.
The variable regions may be derived from antibodies directed against target antigens or epitopes. Alternatively they may be derived from a repertoire of single antibody domains such as those expressed on the surface of filamentous bacteriophage. Selection may be performed as described below.
In general, the nucleic acid molecules and vector constructs required for the performance of the present invention may be constructed and manipulated as set forth in standard laboratory manuals, such as Sambrook et al. (1989J Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor, USA.
The manipulation of nucleic acids useful in the present invention is typically carried out in recombinant vectors.
Thus in a further aspect, the present invention provides a vector comprising nucleic acid encoding at least a ‘dual-specific ligand’ as herein defined.
As used herein, vector refers to a discrete element that is used to introduce heterologous DNA into cells for the expression and/or replication thereof. Methods by which to select or construct and, subsequently, use such vectors are well known to one of ordinary skill in the art. Numerous vectors are publicly available, including bacterial plasmids, bacteriophage, artificial chromosomes and episomal vectors. Such vectors may be used for simple cloning and mutagenesis; alternatively gene expression vector is employed. A vector of use according to the invention may be selected to accommodate a polypeptide coding sequence of a desired size, typically from 0.25 kilobase (kb) to 40 kb or more in length A suitable host cell is transformed with the vector after in vitro cloning manipulations. Each vector contains various functional components, which generally include a cloning (or “polylinker”) site, an origin of replication and at least one selectable marker gene. If given vector is an expression vector, it additionally possesses one or more of the following: enhancer element, promoter, transcription termination and signal sequences, each positioned in the vicinity of the cloning site, such that they are operatively linked to the gene encoding a ligand according to the invention.
Both cloning and expression vectors generally contain nucleic acid sequences that enable 30 the vector to replicate in one or more selected host cells. Typically in cloning vectors, this sequence is one that enables the vector to replicate independently of the host chromosomal DNA and includes origins of replication or autonomously replicating sequences. Such sequences are well known for a variety of bacteria, yeast and viruses.
The origin of replication from the plasmid pBR322 is suitable for most Gram-negative bacteria, the 2 micron plasmid origin is suitable for yeast, and various viral origins (e.g. SV 40, adenovirus) are useful for cloning vectors in mammalian cells. Generally, the origin of replication is not needed for mammalian expression vectors unless these are s used in mammalian cells able to replicate high levels of DNA, such as COS cells.
Advantageously, a cloning or expression vector may contain a selection gene also referred to as selectable marker. This gene encodes a protein necessary for the survival or growth of transformed host cells grown in a selective culture medium. Host cells not transformed with the vector containing the selection gene will therefore not survive in the culture medium. Typical selection genes encode proteins that confer resistance to antibiotics and other toxins, e.g. ampicillin, neomycin, methotrexate or tetracycline, complement auxotrophic deficiencies, or supply critical nutrients not available in the growth media. Since the replication of vectors encoding a ligand according to the present invention is most conveniently performed in E. coli, an E. coli-selectable marker, for example, the β-lactamase gene that confers resistance to the antibiotic ampicillin, is of use. These can be obtained from E. coli plasmids, such as pBR322 or a pUC plasmid such as pUC18 or pUC19.
Expression vectors usually contain a promoter that is recognised by the host organism and is operably linked to the coding sequence of interest. Such a promoter may be inducible or constitutive. The tenn “operably linked” refers to a juxtaposition wherein the components described are in a relationship permitting them to function in their intended manner. A control sequence “operably linked” to a coding sequence is ligated in such a way that expression of the coding sequence is achieved under conditions compatible with the control sequences.
Promoters suitable for use with prokaryotic hosts include, for example, the p-lactamase and lactose promoter systems, alkaline phosphatase, the tryptophan (trp) promoter system and hybrid promoters such as the tac promoter. Promoters for use in bacterial systems will also generally contain a Shine-Delgarno sequence operably linked to the coding sequence. The preferred vectors are expression vectors that enables the expression of a nucleotide sequence corresponding to a polypeptide library member. Thus, selection with the first and/or second antigen or epitope can be performed by separate propagation and expression of a single clone expressing the polypeptide library member or by use of any selection display system. As described above, the preferred selection display system is bacteriophage display. Thus, phage or phagemid vectors may be used, eg pIT1 or pIT2. Leader sequences useful in the invention include pelB, stII, ompA, phoA, bla and pelA. One example are phagemid vectors which have an E. coli origin of replication (for double stranded replication) and also a phage origin of replication (for production of single-stranded DNA). The manipulation and expression of such vectors is well known in the art (Hoogenboom and Winter (1992) supra; Nissim et al. (1994) supra). Briefly, the vector contains a β-lactamase gene to confer selectivity on the phagemid and a lac promoter upstream of a expression cassette that consists (N to C terminal) of a pelB leader sequence (which directs the expressed polypeptide to the periplasmic space), a multiple cloning site (for cloning the nucleotide version of the library member), optionally, one or more peptide tag (for detection), optionally, one or more TAG stop codon and the phage protein pIII. Thus, using various suppressor and non-suppressor strains of E. cold and with the addition of glucose, iso-propyl thio-, β-D-galactoside (IPTG) or a helper phage, such as VCS M13, the vector is able to replicate as a plasmid with no expression, produce large quantities of the polypeptide library member only or produce phage, some of which contain at least one copy of the polypeptide-pIII fusion on their surface.
Construction of vectors encoding ligands according to the invention employs conventional ligation techniques. Isolated vectors or DNA fragments are cleaved, tailored, and religated in the form desired to generate the required vector. If desired, analysis to confirm that the correct sequences are present in the constructed vector can be performed in a known fashion. Suitable methods for constructing expression vectors, preparing in vitro transcripts, introducing DNA into host cells, and performing analyses for assessing expression and function are known to those skilled in the art. The presence of a gene sequence in a sample is detected, or its amplification and/or expression quantified by conventional methods, such as Southern or Northern analysis, Western blotting, dot blotting of DNA, RNA or protein, in situ hybridisation, immunocytochemistry or sequence analysis of nucleic acid or protein molecules. Those skilled in the art will readily envisage how these methods may be modified, if desired.
Structure of Closed Conformation Multispecific Ligands
According to one aspect of the second configuration of the invention present invention, to the two or more non-complementary epitope binding domains are linked so that they are in a closed conformation as herein defined. Advantageously, they may be further attached to a skeleton which may, as a alternative, or on addition to a linker described herein, facilitate the formation and/or maintenance of the closed conformation of the epitope binding sites with respect to one another.
(I) Skeletons
Skeletons may be based on immunoglobulin molecules or may be non-immunoglobulin in origin as set forth above. Preferred immunoglobulin skeletons as herein defined includes any one or more of those selected from the following: an immunoglobulin molecule comprising at least (i) the CL (kappa or lambda subclass) domain of an antibody; or (ii) the CH1 domain of an antibody heavy chain; an immunoglobulin molecule comprising the CH1 and CH2 domains of an antibody heavy chain; an immunoglobulin molecule comprising the CH1, CH2 and CH3 domains of an antibody heavy chain; or any of the subset (ii) in conjunction with the CL (kappa or lambda subclass) domain of an antibody. A hinge region domain may also be included. Such combinations of domains may, for example, mimic natural antibodies, such as IgG or IgM, or fragments thereof, such as Fv, scFv, Fab or F(ab′)2 molecules. Those skilled in the art will be aware that this list is not intended to be exhaustive.
(II) Protein Scaffolds
Each epitope binding domain comprises a protein scaffold and one or more CDRs which are involved in the specific interaction of the domain with one or more epitopes. Advantageously, an epitope binding domain according to the present invention comprises three CDRs. Suitable protein scaffolds include any of those selected from the group consisting of the following: those based on immunoglobulin domains, those based on fibronectin, those based on affibodies, those based on CTLA4, those based on chaperones such as GroEL, those based on lipocallin and those based on the bacterial Fc receptors SpA and SpD. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that this list is not intended to be exhaustive.
F: Scaffolds for use in Constructing Dual Specific Ligands
Selection of the Main-Chain Conformation
The members of the immunoglobulin superfamily all share a similar fold for their polypeptide chain. For example, although antibodies are highly diverse in terms of their primary sequence, comparison of sequences and crystallographic structures has revealed that, contrary to expectation, five of the six antigen binding loops of antibodies (H1, H2, L1, L2, L3) adopt a limited number of main-chain conformations, or canonical structures (Chothia and Lesk (1987) J. Mol. Biol., 196: 901; Chothia et al. (1989) Nature, 342: 877). Analysis of loop lengths and key residues has therefore enabled prediction of the main chain conformations of H1, H2, L1, L2 and L3 found in the majority of human antibodies (Chothia et al. (1992) J. Mol. Biol., 227: 799; Tomlinson et al. (1995) EMBO J., 14: 20 4628; Williams et al. (1996) J. Mol. Biol., 264: 220). Although the H3 region is much more diverse in terms of sequence, length and structure (due to the use of D segments), it also forms a limited number of main-chain conformations for short loop lengths which depend on the length and the presence of particular residues, or types of residue, at key positions in the loop and the antibody framework (Martin et al. (1996) J; Mol. Biol., 263: 800; Shirai et al. (1996) FEDS Letters, 399: 1).
The dual specific ligands of the present invention are advantageously assembled from libraries of domains, such as libraries of VH domains and/or libraries of VL domains. Moreover, the dual specific ligands of the invention may themselves be provided in the form of libraries. In one aspect of the present invention, libraries of dual specific ligands and/or domains are designed in which certain loop lengths and key residues have been chosen to ensure that the main-chain conformation of the members is known. Advantageously, these are real conformations of immunoglobulin superfamily molecules found in nature, to minimise the chances that they are non-functional, as discussed above. Germline V gene segments serve as one suitable basic framework for constructing antibody or T-cell receptor libraries; other sequences are also of use. Variations may occur at a low frequency, such that a small number of functional members may possess an altered main-chain conformation, which does not affect its function.
Canonical structure theory is also of use to assess the number of different main-chain conformations encoded by ligands, to predict the main-chain conformation based on ligand sequences and to chose residues for diversification which do not affect the canonical structure. It is known that, in the human VK domain, the L1 loop can adopt one of four canonical structures, the L2 loop has a single canonical structure and that 90% of human VK domains adopt one of four or live canonical structures for the L3 loop (Tomlinson et al. (1995) supra); thus, in the VK domain alone, different canonical structures can combine to create a range of different main-chain conformations. Given that the Vα domain encodes a different range of canonical structures for the L1, L2 and L3 loops and that VK and Vα domains can pair with any VH domain which can encode several canonical structures for the H1 and H2 loops, the number of canonical structure combinations observed for these five loops is very large. This implies that the generation of diversity in the main-chain conformation may be essential for the production of a wide range of binding specificities. However, by constructing an antibody library based on a single known main-chain conformation it has been found, contrary to expectation, that diversity in the main-chain conformation is not required to generate sufficient diversity to target substantially all antigens. Even more surprisingly, the single main-chain conformation need not be a consensus structure—a single naturally occurring conformation can be used as the basis for an entire library. Thus, in a preferred aspect, the dual-specific ligands of the invention possess a single known main-chain conformation.
The single main-chain conformation that is chosen is preferably commonplace among molecules of the immunoglobulin superfamily type in question. A conformation is commonplace when a significant number of naturally occurring molecules are observed to adopt it. Accordingly, in a preferred aspect of the invention, the natural occurrence of the different main-chain conformations for each binding loop of an immunoglobulin domain are considered separately and then a naturally occurring variable domain is chosen which possesses the desired combination of main-chain conformations for the different loops. If none is available, the nearest equivalent may be chosen. It is preferable that the desired combination of main-chain conformations for the different loops is created by selecting germline gene segments which encode the desired main-chain conformations. It is more preferable, that the selected germline gene segments are frequently expressed in nature, and most preferable that they are the most frequently expressed of all natural germline gene segments.
In designing dual specific ligands or libraries thereof the incidence of the different main chain conformations for each of the six antigen binding loops may be considered separately. For H1, H2, L1, L2 and L3, a given conformation that is adopted by between 20% and 100% of the antigen binding loops of naturally occurring molecules is chosen.
Typically, its observed incidence is above 35% (i.e. between 35% and 100%) and, ideally, above 50% or even above 65%. Since the vast majority of H3 loops do not have canonical structures, it is preferable to select a main-chain conformation which is commonplace among those loops which do display canonical structures. For each of the loops, the conformation which is observed most often in the natural repertoire is therefore selected. In human antibodies, the most popular canonical structures (CS) for each loop are as follows: H1-CS 1 (79% of the expressed repertoire), H2-CS 3 (46%), L1-CS 2 of VK (39%), L2-CS 1 (100%), L3-CS 1 of VK (36%) (calculation assumes α k:λ ratio of 70:30, Hood et al. (1967) Cold Spring Harbor Symp. Quant. Biol, 48: 133). For H3 loops that have canonical structures, a CDR3 length (Kabat et al. (1991) Sequences of proteins of immunological interest, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services) of seven residues with a salt-bridge from residue 94 to residue 101 appears to be the most common. There are at least 16 human antibody sequences in the EMBL data library with the required H3 length and key residues to form this conformation and at least two crystallographic structures in the protein data bank which can be used as a basis for antibody modelling (2 cgr and 1 tet). The most frequently expressed germline gene segments that this combination of canonical structures are the VH segment 3-23 (DP-47), the JH segment JH4b, the VK segment 02/012 (DPK9) and the JK segment JK1. VH segments DP45 and DP38 are also suitable. These segments can therefore be used in combination as a basis to construct a library with the desired single main-chain conformation.
Alternatively, instead of choosing the single main-chain conformation based on the natural occurrence of the different main-chain conformations for each of the binding loops in isolation, the natural occurrence of combinations of main-chain conformations is 5 used as the basis for choosing the single main-chain conformation. In the case of antibodies, for example, the natural occurrence of canonical structure combinations for any two, three, four, five or for all six of the antigen binding loops can be determined. Here, it is preferable that the chosen conformation is commonplace in naturally occurring antibodies and most preferable that it observed most frequently in the natural repertoire. Thus, in human antibodies, for example, when natural combinations of the five antigen binding loops, H1, H2, L1, L2 and L3, are considered, the most frequent combination of canonical structures is determined and then combined with the most popular conformation for the H3 loop, as a basis for choosing the single main-chain conformation.
ii. Diversification of the Canonical Sequence.
Having selected several known main-chain conformations or, preferably a single known main-chain conformation, dual specific ligands according to the invention or libraries for use in the invention can be constructed by varying the binding site of the molecule in order to generate a repertoire with structural and/or functional diversity. This means that variants are generated such that they possess sufficient diversity in their structure and/or in their function so that they are capable of providing a range of activities.
The desired diversity is typically generated by varying the selected molecule at one or more positions. The positions to be changed can be chosen at random or are preferably selected. The variation can then be achieved either by randomisation, during which the resident amino acid is replaced by any amino acid or analogue thereof, natural or synthetic, producing a very large number of variants or by replacing the resident amino acid with one or more of a defined subset of amino acids, producing a more limited number of variants.
Various methods have been reported for introducing such diversity. Error-prone PCR (Hawkins et al. (1992) J. Mol. Biol., 226: 889), chemical mutagenesis (Deng et al. (1994) J. Biol. Chem., 269: 9533) or bacterial mutator strains (Low et al. (1996) J. Mol. Biol., 260: 359) can be used to introduce random mutations into the genes that encode the molecule. Methods for mutating selected positions are also well known in the art and include the use of mismatched oligonucleotides or degenerate oligonucleotides, with or without the use of PCR. For example, several synthetic antibody libraries have been created by targeting mutations to the antigen binding loops. The H3 region of a human tetanus toxoid-binding Fab has been randomised to create a range of new binding specificities (Barbas et al. (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 89: 4457). Random or semi-random H3 and L3 regions have been appended to germline V gene segments to produce large libraries with unmutated framework regions (Hoogenboom & Winter (1992) J: Mol. Biol., 227: 381; Barbas et al. (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 89: 4457; Nissim et al. (1994) EMBO J., 13: 692; Griffiths et al. (1994) EMBO J., 13: 3245; De Kruif et al. (1995) J. Mol. Biol., 248: 97). Such diversification has been extended to include some or all of the other antigen binding loops (Crameri) et al. (1996) Nature Med., 5 2: 100; Riechmann et al. (1995) Bio/Techrology, 13: 475; Morphosys, WO97/08320, supra). Since loop randomisation has the potential to create approximately more than 1015 structures for H3 alone and a similarly large number of variants for the other five loops, it is not feasible using current transformation technology or even by using cell free systems to produce a library representing all possible combinations. For example, in one of the largest libraries constructed to date, 6×1010 different antibodies, which is only a fraction of the potential diversity for a library of this design, were generated (Griffiths et al. (1994) supra).
In a preferred embodiment, only those residues which are directly involved in creating or modifying the desired function of the molecule are diversified. For many molecules, the function will be to bind a target and therefore diversity should be concentrated in the target binding site, while avoiding changing residues which are crucial to the overall packing of the molecule or to maintaining the chosen main-chain conformation.
Diversification of the Canonical Sequence as it Applies to Antibody Domains
In the case of antibody dual-specific ligands, the binding site for the target is most often the antigen binding site. Thus, in a highly preferred aspect, the invention provides libraries of or for the assembly of antibody dual-specific ligands in which only those residues in the antigen binding site are varied. These residues are extremely diverse in the human antibody repertoire and are known to make contacts in high-resolution antibody/antigen complexes. For example, in L2 it is known that positions 50 and 53 are diverse in naturally occurring antibodies and are observed to make contact with the antigen. In contrast, the conventional approach would have been to diversify all the residues in the corresponding Complementarity Determining Region (CDR1) as defined by Kabat et al. (1991, supra), some seven residues compared to the two diversified in the library for use according to the invention. This represents a significant improvement in terms of the functional diversity required to create a range of antigen binding specificities.
In nature, antibody diversity is the result of two processes: somatic recombination of germline V, D and J gene segments to create a naive primary repertoire (so called germline and junctional diversity) and somatic hypermutation of the resulting rearranged V genes. Analysis of human antibody sequences has shown that diversity in the primary repertoire is focused at the centre of the antigen binding site whereas somatic hypermutation spreads diversity to regions at the periphery of the antigen binding site that are highly conserved in the primary repertoire (see Tomlinson et al. (1996) J. Mol. Biol., 256: 813). This complementarily has probably evolved as an efficient strategy for searching sequence space and, although apparently unique to antibodies, it can easily be applied to other polypeptide repertoires. The residues which are varied are a subset of those that form the binding site for the target. Different (including overlapping) subsets of residues in the target binding site are diversified at different stages during selection, if desired.
In the case of an antibody repertoire, an initial ‘naive’ repertoire is created where some, but not all, of the residues in the antigen binding site are diversified. As used herein in this context, the term “naive” refers to antibody molecules that have no pre-determined target. These molecules resemble those which are encoded by the immunoglobulin genes of an individual who has not undergone immune diversification, as is the case with fetal and newborn individuals, whose immune systems have not yet been challenged by a wide variety of antigenic stimuli. This repertoire is then selected against a range of antigens or epitopes. If required, further diversity can then be introduced outside the region diversified in the initial repertoire. This matured repertoire can be selected for modified function, specificity or affinity.
The invention provides two different naive repertoires of binding domains for the construction of dual specific ligands, or a naive library of dual specific ligands, in which some or all of the residues in the antigen binding site are varied. The “primary” library mimics the natural primary repertoire, with diversity restricted to residues at the centre of the antigen binding site that are diverse in the germline V gene segments (germline diversity) or diversified during the recombination process (junctional diversity). Those residues which are diversified include, but are not limited to, H50, H52, H52a, H53, H55, H56, H58, H95, H96, H97, H98, L50, L53, L91, L92, L93, L94 and L96. In the “somatic” library, diversity is restricted to residues that are diversified during the recombination process (junctional diversity) or are highly somatically mutated). Those residues which are diversified include, but are not limited to: H31, H33, H35, H95, H96, H97, H98, L30, L3 1, L32, L34 and L96. All the residues listed above as suitable for diversification in these libraries are known to make contacts in one or more antibody-antigen complexes. Since in both libraries, not all of the residues in the antigen binding site are varied, additional diversity is incorporated during selection by varying the remaining residues, if it is desired to do so. It shall be apparent to one skilled in the art that any subset of any of these residues (or additional residues which comprise the antigen binding site) can be used for the initial andlor subsequent diversification of the antigen binding site.
In the construction of libraries for use in the invention, diversification of chosen positions is typically achieved at the nucleic acid level, by altering the coding sequence which specifies the sequence of the polypeptide such that a number of possible amino acids (all 20 or a subset thereof) can be incorporated at that position. Using the IUPAC nomenclature, the most versatile codon is NNK, which encodes all amino acids as well as the TAG stop codon. The NNK codon is preferably used in order to introduce the required diversity. Other codons which achieve the same ends are also of use, including the NNN codon, which leads to the production of the additional stop codons TGA and TAA.
A feature of side-chain diversity in the antigen binding site of human antibodies is a pronounced bias which favours certain amino acid residues. If the amino acid composition of the ten most diverse positions in each of the VH, Vκ and Vλ; regions are summed, more than 76% of the side-chain diversity comes from only seven different residues, these being, serine (24%), tyrosine (14%), asparagine (11%), glycine (9%), alanine (7%), aspartate (6%) and threonine (6%). This bias towards hydrophilic residues and small residues which can provide main-chain flexibility probably reflects the evolution of surfaces which are predisposed to binding a wide range of antigens or epitopes and may help to explain the required promiscuity of antibodies in the primary repertoire.
Since it is preferable to mimic this distribution of amino acids, the distribution of amino acids at the positions to be varied preferably mimics that seen in the antigen binding site of antibodies. Such bias in the substitution of amino acids that permits selection of certain polypeptides (not just antibody polypeptides) against a range of target antigens is easily applied to any polypeptide repertoire. There are various methods for biasing the amino acid distribution at the position to be varied (including the use of tri-nucleotide mutagenesis, see WO97/08320), of which the preferred method, due to ease of synthesis, is the use of conventional degenerate codons. By comparing the amino acid profile encoded by all combinations of degenerate codons (with single, double, triple and quadruple degeneracy in equal ratios at each position) with the natural amino acid use it is possible to calculate the most representative codon. The codons (AGT)(AGC)T, (AGT)(AGC)C and (AGT)(AGC) (CT)—that is, DVT, DVC and DVY, respectively using IUPAC nomenclature —are those closest to the desired amino acid profle: they encode 22% serine and 11% tyrosine, asparagine, glycine, alanine, aspartate, threonine and cysteine. Preferably, therefore, libraries are constructed using either the DVT, DVC or 30 DVY codon at each of the diversifed positions.
G: Antigens Capable of Increasing Ligand Half-Life.
The dual specific ligands according to the invention, in one configuration thereof, are capable of binding to one or more molecules which can increase the half-life of the ligand in vivo. Typically, such molecules are polypeptides which occur naturally in vivo and which resist degradation or removal by endogenous mechanisms which remove unwanted material from the organism. For example, the molecule which increases the half-life of the organism may be selected from the following:
Proteins from the extracellular matrix; for example collagen, laminins, integrins and fibronectin. Collagens are the major proteins of the exkacellular matrix. About 15 types of collagen molecules are currently known, found in different parts of the body, eg type I collagen (accounting for 90% of body collagen) found in bone, skin, tendon, ligaments, cornea, internal organs or type II collagen found in cartilage, invertebral disc, notochord, vitreous humour of the eye.
Proteins found in blood, including: Plasma proteins such as fibrin, α-2 macroglobulin, serum albumin, fibrinogen A, fibrinogen B. serum amyloid protein A, heptaglobin, protein, ubiquitin, uteroglobulin and β-2-microglobulin; Enzymes and inhibitors such as plasminogen, lysozyme, cystatin C, alpha-1-antitrypsin and pancreatic kypsin inhibitor. Plasminogen is the inactive precursor of the trypsin-like serine protease plasmin. It is normally found circulating through the blood stream. When plasminogen becomes activated and is converted to plasmin, it unfolds a potent enzymatic domain that dissolves the fibrinogen fibers that entgangle the blood cells in a blood clot. This is called fibrinolysis.
Immune system proteins, such as IgE, IgG, IgM.
Transport proteins such as retinol binding protein, α-1 microglobulin.
Defensins such as beta-defensin 1, Neutrophil defensins 1, 2 and 3.
Proteins found at the blood brain barrier or in neural tissues, such as melanocortin receptor, myelin, ascorbate transporter.
Transferrin receptor specific ligand-neuropharmaceutical agent fusion proteins (see U.S. Pat. No. 5,977,307); brain capillary endothelial cell receptor, transferrin, transferrin receptor, insulin, insulin-like growth factor 1 (IGF 1) receptor, insulin-like growth factor 2 (IGF 2) receptor, insulin receptor.
Proteins localised to the kidney, such as polycystin, type IV collagen, organic anion transporter K1, Heymann's antigen.
Proteins localised to the liver, for example alcohol dehydrogenase, G250.
Blood Coagulation Factor X
α-1 Antitrypsin
HNF 1α
Proteins localised to the lung, such as secretory component (binds IgA).
Proteins localised to the Heart, for example HSP 27. This is associated with dilated cardiomyopathy.
Proteins localised to the skin, for example keratin.
Bone specifc proteins, such as bone morphogenic proteins (BMPs), which are a subset of the transforming growth factor β superfamily that demonstrate osteogenic activity.
Examples include BMP-2,-4,-5,-6,-7 (also referred to as osteogenic protein (OP-1) and -8 (OP-2)
Tumour specific proteins, including human trophoblast antigen, herceptin receptor, oestrogen receptor, cathepsins eg cathepsin B (found in liver and spleen).
Disease-specific proteins, such as antigens expressed only on activated T-cells: including LAG-3 (lymphocyte activation gene); osteoprotegerin ligand (OPGL) see Nature 402, 304-309, 1999; OX40 (a member of the TNF receptor family, expressed on activated T cells and the only costimulatory T cell molecule known to be specifically up-regulated in human T cell leukaemia virus type-I (HTLV-I)-producing cells—see J. Immunol. Jul. 1, 2000; 16561):263-70; Metalloproteases (associated with arthritis/cancers), including CG6512 Drosophila, human paraplegin, human FtsH, human AFG3L2, murine ftsH; angiogenic growth factors, including acidic fibroblast growth factor (FGF-1), basic fibroblast growth factor (FGF-2), Vascular endothelial growth factor/vascular permeability factor (VEGF/VPF), transforming growth factor-α (TGF-α), tumor necrosis factor-alpha (TNF-α), angiogenin, interleukin-3 (IL-3), interleukin-8 (IL-8), platelet derived endothelial growth factor (PD-ECGF), placental growth factor (P1GF), midkine platelet-derived growth factor-BB (PDGF), fractalkine.
Stress Proteins (Heat Shock Proteins)
HSPs are normally found intracellularly. When they are found extracellularly, it is an indicator that a cell has died and spilled out its contents. This unprogrammed cell death (necrosis) only occurs when as a result of trauma, disease or injury and therefore in vivo, extracellular HSPs trigger a response from the immune system that will fight infection and disease. A dual specific which binds to extracellular HSP can be localised to a disease site.
Proteins Involved in Fc Transport
Brambell Receptor (Also Known as FcRB)
This Fc receptor has two functions, both of which are potentially useful for delivery The functions are (1) The transport of IgG from mother to child across the placenta (2) the protection of IgG from degradation thereby prolonging its serum half life of IgG. It is thought that the receptor recycles IgG from endosome. See Holliger et al, Nat Biotechnol 1997 July;15(7):632-6.
Ligands according to the invention may designed to be specific for the above targets without requiring any increase in or increasing half life in vivo. For example, ligands according to the invention can be specific for targets selected from the foregoing which are tissue-specifc, thereby enabling tissue-specific targeting of the dual specific ligand, or a dAb monomer that binds a tissue-specific therapeutically relevant target, irrespective of any increase in half-life, although this may result. Moreover, where the ligand or dAb monomer targets kidney or liver, this may redirect the ligand or dAb monomer to an alternative clearance pathway in vivo (for example, the ligand may be directed away from liver clearance to kidney clearance).
Other Approaches to Increasing In Vivo Half-Life:
In addition to the design of dual-specific ligands in which one of the specificities is for a target protein that increases the serum half-life of the antibody polypeptide construct, antibody polypeptides as described herein can be further stabilized by linkage to a chemical moiety that increases serum half-life. In order to provide improvement in the pharmacokinetics of antibody molecules, the present invention provides single domain variable region polypeptides that are linked to polymers which provide increased stability and half-life. The attachment of polymer molecules (e.g., polyethylene glycol; PEG) to proteins is well established and has been shown to modulate the pharmacokinetic properties of the modified proteins. For example, PEG modification of proteins has been shown to alter the in vivo circulating half-life, antigenicity, solubility, and resistance to proteolysis of the protein (Abuchowski et al., J. Biol. Chem. 1977, 252:3578; Nucci et al., Adv. Drug Delivery Reviews 1991, 6:133; Francis et al., Pharmaceutical Biotechnology Vol. 3 (Borchardt, R. T. ed.); and Stability of Protein Pharmaceuticals: in vivo Pathways of Degradation and Strategies for Ptotein Stabilization 1991 pp 235-263, Plenum, N.Y.).
Both site-specific and random PEGylation of protein molecules is known in the art (See, for example, Zalipsky and Lee, Poly(ethylene glycol) Chemistry: Biotechnical and Biomedical Applications 1992, pp 347-370, Plenum, N.Y.; Goodson and Katre, 1990, Bio/Technology, 8:343; Hershfield et al., 1991, PNAS 88:7185). More specifically, random PEGylation of antibody molecules has been described at lysine residues and thiolated derivatives (Ling and Mattiasson, 1983, Immunol. Methods 59: 327; Wilkinson et al., 1987, Immunol. Letters, 15: 17; Kitamura et al., 1991, Cancer Res. 51:4310; Delgado et al., 1996 Br. J Cancer, 73: 175; Pedley et al., 1994, Br. J. Cancer, 70:1126).
Methods of PEGylatioon are described herein below. Specific examples of PEGylation of antibody polypeptides, and dAbs in particular, are also provided in co-pending applications PCT/GB2004/002829, filed Jun. 30, 2004, which designated the U.S. and of U.S. provisional application No. 60/535,076, filed Jan. 8, 2004, the entirety of each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
Affinity/Activity Determination:
Isolated single domain antibody (e.g., dAb) polypeptides as described herein have affinities (dissociation constant, Kd, =KoffKon) of at least 300 nM or less, and preferably at least 300 nM-50 pM, 200 nM-50 pM, and more preferably at least 100 nM-50 pM, 75 nM-50 pM, 50 nM-50 pM, 25 nM-50 pM, 10 nM-50 pM, 5 nM-50 pM, 1 nM-50 pM, 950 pM-50 pM, 900 pM-50 pM, 850 pM-50 pM, 800 pM-50 pM, 750 pM-50 pM, 700 pM-50 pM, 650 pM-50 pM, 600 pM-50 pM, 550 pM-50 pM, 500 pM-50 pM, 450 pM-50 pM, 400 pM-50 pM,350 pM-50 pM,300 pM-50 pM,250 pM-50 pM,200 pM-50 pM, 150 pM-50 pM, 100 pM-50 pM, 90 pM-50 pM, 80 pM-50 pM, 70 pM-50 pM,60pM-50 pM, or even as low as 50 pM.
The antigen-binding affinity of a variable domain polypeptide can be conveniently measured by surface plasmon resonance (SPR) using the BIAcore system (Pharmacia Biosensor, Piscataway, N.J.). In this method, antigen is coupled to the BIAcore chip at known concentrations, and variable domain polypeptides are introduced. Specific binding between the variable domain polypeptide and the immobilized antigen results in increased protein concentration on the chip matrix and a change in the SPR signal. Changes in SPR signal are recorded as resonance units (RU) and displayed with respect to time along the Y axis of a sensorgram. Baseline signal is taken with solvent alone (e.g., PBS) passing over the chip. The net difference between baseline signal and signal after completion of variable domain polypeptide injection represents the binding value of a given sample. To determine the off rate (Koff), on rate (Kon) and dissociation rate (Kd) constants, BIAcore kinetic evaluation software (e.g., version 2.1) is used.
High affinity is dependent upon the complementarity between a surface of the antigen and the CDRs of the antibody or antibody fragment. Complementarity is determined by the type and strength of the molecular interactions possible between portions of the target and the CDR, for example, the potential ionic interactions, van der Waals attractions, hydrogen bonding or other interactions that can occur. CDR3 tends to contribute more to antigen binding interactions than CDRs 1 and 2, probably due to its generally larger size, which provides more opportunity for favorable surface interactions. (See, e.g., Padlan et al., 1994, Mol. Immunol. 31: 169-217; Chothia & Lesk, 1987, J. Mol. Biol. 196: 904-917; and Chothia et al., 1985, J. Mol. Biol. 186: 651-663.) High affinity indicates single immunoglobulin variable domain/antigen pairings that have a high degree of complementarity, which is directly related to the structures of the variable domain and the target.
The structures conferring high affinity of a single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptide for a given antigen can be highlighted using molecular modeling software that permits the docking of an antigen with the polypeptide structure. Generally, a computer model of the structure of a single immunoglobulin variable domain of known affinity can be docked with a computer model of a polypeptide or other target antigen of known structure to determine the interaction surfaces. Given the structure of the interaction surfaces for such a known interaction, one can then predict the impact, positive or negative, of conservative or less-conservative substitutions in the variable domain sequence on the strength of the interaction, thereby permitting the rational design of improved binding molecules.
Multimeric Forms of Antibody Single Variable Domains:
In one aspect, an antibody polypeptide construct (e.g., a dAb) as described herein is multimerized, as for example, hetero- or homodimers, hetero- or homotrimers, hetero- or homotetramers, or higher order hetero- or homomultimers (e.g., hetero- or homo-pentamer and up to octomers). Multimerization can increase the strength of antigen binding through the avidity effect, wherein the strength of binding is related to the sum of the binding affinities of the multiple binding sites.
Hetero- and Homomultimers are prepared through expression of single domain antibodies fused, for example, through a peptide linker, leading to the configuration dAb-linker-dAb or a higher multiple of that arrangement. The multimers can also be linked to additional moieties, e.g., a polypeptide sequence that increases serum half-life or another effector moiety, e.g., a toxin or targeting moiety; e.g., PEG. Any linker peptide sequence can be used to generate hetero- or homomultimers, e.g., a linker sequence as would be used in the art to generate an scFv. One commonly useful linker comprises repeats of the peptide sequence (Gly4Ser), (SEQ ID NO: 7), wherein n=1 to about 10 (e.g., n=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10). For example, the linker can be (Gly4Ser)3 (SEQ ID NO: 8), (Gly4Ser)5 (SEQ ID NO: 9), (Gly4Ser)7 (SEQ ID NO: 10) or another multiple of the (Gly4Ser) (SEQ ID NO: 7) sequence.
An alternative to the expression of multimers as monomers linked by peptide sequences is linkage of the monomeric immunoglobulin variable domains post-translationally through, for example, disulfide bonding or other chemical linkage. For example, a free cysteine is engineered, e.g., at the C-terminus of the monomeric polypeptide, permits disulfide bonding between monomers. In this aspect or others requiring a free cysteine, the cysteine is introduced by including a cysteine codon (TGT, TGC) into a PCR primer adjacent to the last codon of the dAb sequence (for a C-terminal cysteine, the sequence in the primer will actually be the reverse complement, i.e., ACA or GCA, because it will be incorporated into the downstream PCR primer) and immediately before one or more stop codons. If desired, a linker peptide sequence, e.g., (Gly4Ser)n (SEQ ID NO: 7) is placed between the dAb sequence and the free cysteine. Expression of the monomers having a free cysteine residue results in a mixture of monomeric and dimeric forms in approximately a 1:1 mixture. Dimers are separated from monomers using gel chromatography, e.g., ion-exchange chromatography with salt gradient elution.
Alternatively, an engineered free cysteine is used to couple monomers through thiol linkages to a multivalent chemical linker, such as a trimeric maleimide molecule (e.g., Tris[2-maleimidoethyl]amine, TMEA) or a bi-maleimide PEG molecule (available from, for example, Nektar (Shearwater).
In one embodiment, a homodimer or heterodimer of the invention includes VH or VL domains which are covalently attached at a C-terminal amino acid to an immunoglobulin CH1 domain or CK domain, respectively. Thus the hetero- or homodimer may be a Fab-like molecule wherein the antigen binding domain contains associated VH and/or VL domains covalently linked at their C-termini to a CH1 and CK domain respectively. In addition, or alternatively, a dAb multimer of the invention may be modeled on the camelid species which express a large proportion of fully functional, highly specific antibodies that are devoid of light chain sequences. The camelid heavy chain antibodies are found as homodimers of a single heavy chain, dimerized via their constant regions. The variable domains of these camelid heavy chain antibodies are referred to as VHH domains and retain the ability, when isolated as fragments of the VH chain, to bind antigen with high specificity ((Hamers-Casterman et al., 1993, Nature 363: 446-448; Gahroudi et al., 1997, FEBS Lett. 414: 521-526). Thus, an antibody single variable domain multimer of the invention may be constructed, using methods known in the art, and described above, to possess the VHH conformation of the camelid species heavy chain antibodies.
PEGylation of Antibody Polypeptides
The present invention provides PEGylated antibody polypeptide (e.g., dAb) monomers and multimers which provide increased half-life and resistance to degredation without a loss in activity (e.g., binding affinity) relative to non-PEGylated antibody polypeptides.
Antibody polypeptide molecules as described herein can be coupled, using methods known in the art, to polymer molecules (preferably PEG) useful for achieving the increased half-life and degradation resistance properties. Polymer moieties which can be utilized in the invention can be synthetic or naturally occurring and include, but are not limited to straight or branched chain polyalkylene, polyalkenylene or polyoxyalkylene polymers, or a branched or unbranched polysaccharide such as a homo- or heteropolysaccharide. Preferred examples of synthetic polymers which can be used in the invention include straight or branched chain poly(ethylene glycol) (PEG), poly(propylene glycol), or poly(vinyl alcohol) and derivatives or substituted forms thereof. Particularly preferred substituted polymers for linkage to antibody polypeptides as described herein include substituted PEG, including methoxy(polyethylene glycol). Naturally occurring polymer moieties which can be used in addition to or in place of PEG include lactose, amylose, dextran, or glycogen, as well as derivatives thereof which would be recognized by one of skill in the art. Derivatized forms of polymer molecules include, for example, derivatives which have additional moieties or reactive groups present therein to permit interaction with amino acid residues of the antibody polypeptides described herein. Such derivatives include N-hydroxylsuccinimide (NHS) active esters, succinimidyl propionate polymers, and sulfhydryl-selective reactive agents such as maleimide, vinyl sulfone, and thiol. Particularly preferred derivatized polymers include, but are not limited to PEG polymers having the formulae: PEG-O—CH2CH2CH2—CO2—NHS; PEG-O—CH2—NHS; PEG-O—CH2CH2—CO2—NHS; PEG-S—CH2CH2—CO—NHS; PEG-O2CNH—CH(R)—CO2—NHS; PEG-NHCO—CH2CH2—CO—NHS; and PEG-O—CH2—CO2—NHS; where R is (CH2)4)NHCO2(mPEG). PEG polymers can be linear molecules, or can be branched wherein multiple PEG moieties are present in a single polymer. Some particularly preferred PEG derivatives which are useful in the invention include, but are not limited to the following:
The reactive group (e.g., MAL, NHS, SPA, VS, or Thiol) may be attached directly to the PEG polymer or may be attached to PEG via a linker molecule.
The size of polymers useful in the invention can be in the range of between 500 Da to 60 kDa, for example, between 1000 Da and 60 kDa, 10 kDa and 60 kDa, 20 kDa and 60 kDa, 30 kDa and 60 kDa, 40 kDa and 60 kDa, and up to between 50 kDa and 60 kDa. The polymers used in the invention, particularly PEG, can be straight chain polymers or may possess a branched conformation. Depending on the combination of molecular weight and conformation, the polymer molecules, when attached to an antibody construct (e.g., dAb) monomer or multimer, will yield a molecule having an average hydrodynamic size of between 24 and 500 kDa. The hydrodynamic size of a polymer molecule used herein refers to the apparent size of a molecule (e.g., a protein molecule) based on the diffusion of the molecule through an aqueous solution. The diffusion, or motion of a protein through solution can be processed to derive an apparent size of the protein, where the size is given by the Stokes radius or hydrodynamic radius of the protein particle. The “hydrodynamic size” of a protein depends on both mass and shape (conformation), such that two proteins having the same molecular mass may have differing hydrodynamic sizes based on the overall conformation of the protein. The hydrodynamic size of a PEG-linked antibody single variable domain (including single domain antibody multimers as described herein) can be in the range of 24 kDa to 500 kDa; 30 to 500 kDa; 40 to 500 kDa; 50 to 500 kDa; 100 to 500 kDa; 150 to 500 kDa; 200 to 500 kDa; 250 to 500 kDa; 300 to 500 kDa; 350 to 500 kDa; 400 to 500 kDa and 450 to 500 kDa. Preferably the hydrodynamic size of a PEGylated dAb is 30 to 40 kDa; 70 to 80 kDa or 200 to 300 kDa. The size of a polymer molecule attached to an antibody polypeptide, such as a dAb or dAb multimer, can be thus varied depending on the desired application. For example, where the PEGylated dAb is intended to leave the circulation and enter into peripheral tissues, it is desirable to keep the size of the attached polymer low to facilitate extravazation from the blood stream. Alternatively, where it is desired to have the PEGylated dAb remain in the circulation for a longer period of time, a higher molecular weight polymer can be used (e.g., a 30 to 60 kDa polymer).
The polymer (PEG) molecules useful in the invention can be attached to antibody polypeptide constructs using methods which are well known in the art. The first step in the attachment of PEG or other polymer moieties to an antibody polypeptide monomer or multimer of the invention is the substitution of the hydroxyl end-groups of the PEG polymer by electrophile-containing functional groups. Particularly, PEG polymers are attached to either cysteine or lysine residues present in the antibody polypeptide monomers or multimers. The cysteine and lysine residues can be naturally occurring, or can be engineered into the antibody polypeptide molecule. For example, cysteine residues can be recombinantly engineered at the C-terminus of a dAb polypeptide, or residues at specific solvent accessible locations in a dAb or other antibody polypeptide can be substituted with cysteine or lysine. In a preferred embodiment, a PEG moiety is attached to a cysteine residue which is present in the hinge region at the C-terminus of a dAb monomer or multimer as described herein.
In one embodiment, the PEG polymer(s) is attached to one or more cysteine or lysine residues present in a framework region (FWs) and one or more heterologous CDRs of a dAb. CDRs and framework regions are those regions of an immunoglobulin variable domain as defined in the Kabat database of Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest (Kabat et al. (1991) Sequences of proteins of immunological interest, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services). In a preferred embodiment, a PEG polymer is linked to a cystine or lysine residue in the VH framework segment DP47, or the Vk framework segment DPK9. Cysteine and/or lysine residues of DP47 which can be linked to PEG include the cysteine at positions 22, or 96 and the lysine at positions 43, 65, 76, or 98 of SEQ ID NO: 1 (
In addition, specific solvent accessible sites in a dAb molecule which are not naturally occuring cysteine or lysine residues can be mutated to a cysteine or lysine for attachment of a PEG polymer. Solvent accessible residues in any given dAb monomer or multimer can be determined using methods known in the art such as analysis of the crystal structure of a given dAb. For example, using the solved crystal structure of the VH dAb HEL4 (which binds hen egg lysozyme; see below),
Primary amino acid sequence of HEL4 (SEQ ID NO: 5).
Primary amino acid sequence of Vk dummy (SEQ ID NO: 6).
the residues Gln-12, Pro-41, Asp-62, Glu-89, Gln-112, Leu-115, Thr-117, Ser-119, and Ser-120 have been identified as being solvent accessible, and would be attractive candidates for mutation to cysteine or lysine residues for the attachment of a PEG polymer. In addition, using the solved crystal structure of the Vk dummy dAb (see above), the residues Val-15, Pro-40, Gly-41, Ser-56, Gly-57, Ser-60, Pro-80, Gly-71, Gln-100, Lys-107, and Arg-108 have been identified as being solvent accessible, and would be attractive candidates for mutation to cysteine or lysine residues for the attachment of a PEG polymer. In one embodiment, a PEG polymer is linked to multiple solvent accessible cysteine or lysine residues, or to solvent accessible residues which have been mutated to a cysteine or lysine residue. Alternatively, only one solvent accessible residue is linked to PEG, either where the particular antibody polypeptide construct only possesses one solvent accessible cysteine or lysine (or residue modified to a cysteine or lysine) or where a particular solvent accessible residue is selected from among several such residues for PEGylation.
Several attachment schemes which are useful in the invention are provided by the company Nektar (SanCarlos, Calif.). For example, where attachment of PEG or other polymer to a lysine residue is desired, active esters of PEG polymers which have been derivatized with N-hydroxylsuccinimide, such as succinimidyl propionate may be used. Where attachment to a cysteine residue is intended, PEG polymers which have been derivatized with sulfhydryl-selective reagents such as maleimide, vinyl sulfone, or thiols may be used. Other examples of specific embodiments of PEG derivatives which may be used according to the invention to generate PEGylated dAbs may be found in the Nektar Catalog (available on the world wide web at nektar.com). In addition, several derivitized forms of PEG may be used according to the invention to facilitate attachment of the PEG polymer to a dAb monomer or multimer of the invention. PEG derivatives useful in the invention include, but are not limited to PEG-succinimidyl succinate, urethane linked PEG, PEG phenylcarbonate, PEG succinimidyl carbonate, PEG-carboxymethyl azide, dimethylmaleic anhydride PEG, PEG dithiocarbonate derivatives, PEG-tresylates (2,2,2-trifluoroethanesolfonates), mPEG imidoesters, and other as described in Zalipsky and Lee, (1992) (“Use of functionalized poly(ethylene glycol)s for modification of peptides” in Poly(Ethylene Glycol) Chemistry: Biotechnical and Biomedical Applications, J. Milton Harris, Ed., Plenum Press, N.Y.).
In each of the above embodiments, the PEG polymers can be attached to any amenable residue present in the antibody polypeptide construct peptides, or, preferably, one or more residues of the construct can be modified or mutated to a cysteine or lysine residue which may then be used as an attachment point for a PEG polymer. Preferably, a residue to be modified in this manner is a solvent accessible residue; that is, a residue, which when the antibody polypeptide construct is in its natural folded configuration is accessible to an aqueous environment and to a derivatized PEG polymer. Once one or more of these residues is mutated to a cysteine residue according to the invention, it is available for PEG attachment using a linear or branched MAL derivatized PEG (MAL-PEG).
In one embodiment, there is provided an antibody construct comprising an antibody single variable domain and PEG polymer wherein the ratio of PEG polymer to antibody single variable domain is a molar ratio of at least 0.25:1. In a further embodiment, the molar ratio of PEG polymer to antibody single variable domain is 0.33:1 or greater. In a still further embodiment the molar ratio of PEG polymer to antibody single variable domain is 0.5:1 or greater.
H: Use of Ligands as Described Herein.
1) Use of Multispecific Ligands According to the Second Configuration of the Invention.
Multispecific ligands according to the method of the second configuration of the present invention may be employed in in vivo therapeutic and prophylactic applications, in vitro and in vivo diagnostic applications, in vitro assay and reagent applications, and the like. For example antibody molecules may be used in antibody based assay techniques, such as μ ELISA techniques, according to methods known to those skilled in the art.
As alluded to above, the multispecific ligands according to the invention are of use in diagnostic, prophylactic and therapeutic procedures. Multispecific antibodies according to the invention are of use diagnostically in Western analysis and in situ protein detection by standard immunohistochemical procedures; for use in these applications, the ligands may be labelled in accordance with techniques known to the art. In addition, such antibody polypeptides may be used preparatively in affinity chromatography procedures, when complexed to a chromatographic support, such as a resin. All such techniques are well known to one of skill in the art.
Diagnostic uses of the closed conformation multispecific ligands according to the invention include homogenous assays for analyses which exploit the ability of closed conformation multispecific ligands to bind two targets in competition, such that two targets cannot bind simultaneously (a closed conformation), or alternatively their ability to bind two targets simultaneously (an open conformation).
A true homogenous immunoassay format has been avidly sought by manufacturers of diagnostics and research assay systems used in drug discovery and development. The main diagnostics markets include human testing in hospitals, doctor's offices and clinics, commercial reference laboratories, blood banks, and the home, non-human diagnostics (for example food testing, water testing, environmental testing, bio-defence, and veterinary testing), and finally research (including drug development; basic research and academic research).
At present all these markets utilise immunoassay systems that are built around chemiluminescent, ELISA, fluorescence or in rare cases radio-immunoassay technologies. Each of these assay formats requires a separation step (separating bound from un-bound reagents). In some cases, several separation steps are required. Adding these additional steps adds reagents and automation, takes time, and affects the ultimate outcome of the assays. In human diagnostics, the separation step may be automated, which masks the problem, but does not remove it. The robotics, additional reagents, additional incubation times, and the like add considerable cost and complexity. In drug development, such as high throughput screening, where literally millions of samples are tested at once, with very low levels of test molecule, adding additional separation steps can eliminate the ability to perform a screen. However, avoiding the separation creates too much noise in the read out. Thus, there is a need for a true homogenous format that provides sensitivities at the range obtainable from present assay formats. Advantageously, an assay possesses fully quantitative read-outs with high sensitivity and a large dynamic range. Sensitivity is an important requirement, as is reducing the amount of sample required. Both of these features are features that a homogenous system offers. This is very important in point of care testing, and in drug development where samples are precious. Heterogenous systems, as currently available in the art, require large quantities of sample and expensive reagents.
Applications for homogenous assays include cancer testing, where the biggest assay is that for Prostate Specific Antigen, used in screening men for prostate cancer. Other applications include fertility testing, which provides a series of tests for women attempting to conceive including beta-hcg for pregnancy. Tests for infectious diseases, including hepatitis, HIV, rubella, and other viruses and microorganisms and sexually transmitted diseases. Tests are used by blood banks, especially tests for HIV, hepatitis A, B, C, non A non B. Therapeutic drug monitoring tests include monitoring levels of prescribed drugs in patients for efficacy and to avoid toxicity, for example digoxin for arrhythmia, and phenobarbital levels in psychotic cases; theophylline for asthma. Diagnostic tests are moreover useful in abused drug testing, such as testing for cocaine, marijuana and the like. Metabolic tests are used for measuring thyroid function, anaemia and other physiological disorders and functions.
The homogenous immunoassay format is moreover useful in the manufacture of standard clinical chemistry assays. The inclusion of immunoassays and chemistry assays on the same instrument is highly advantageous in diagnostic testing. Suitable chemical assays include tests for glucose, cholesterol, potassium, and the like.
A further major application for homogenous immunoassays is drug discovery and development: high throughput screening includes testing combinatorial chemistry libraries versus targets in ultra high volume. Signal is detected, and positive groups then split into smaller groups, and eventually tested in cells and then animals. Homogenous assays may be used in all these types of test. In drug development, especially animal studies and clinical trials heavy use of immunoassays is made. Homogenous assays greatly accelerate and simplify these procedures. Other Applications include food and beverage testing: testing meat and other foods for E. colt, salmonella, etc; water testing, including testing at water plants for all types of contaminants including E. coli; and veterinary testing.
In a broad embodiment, the invention provides a binding assay comprising a detectable agent which is bound to a closed conformation multispecifc ligand according to the invention, and whose detectable properties are altered by the binding of an analyte to said closed conformation multispecific ligand. Such an assay may be configured in several different ways, each exploiting the above properties of closed conformation multispecific ligands.
The assay relies on the direct or indirect displacement of an agent by the analyte, resulting in a change in the detectable properties of the agent. For example, where the agent is an enzyme which is capable of catalysing a reaction which has a detectable end-point, said enzyme can be bound by the ligand such as to obstruct its active site, thereby inactivating the enzyme. The analyte, which is also bound by the closed conformation multispecific ligand, displaces the enzyme, rendering it active through freeing of the active site. The enzyme is then able to react with a substrate, to give rise to a detectable event. In an alternative embodiment, the ligand may bind the enzyme outside of the active site, influencing the conformation of the enzyme and thus altering its activity. For example, the structure of the active site may be constrained by the binding of the ligand, or the binding of cofactors necessary for activity may be prevented.
The physical implementation of the assay may take any form known in the art. For example, the closed conformation multispecific ligandlenzyme complex may be provided on a test strip; the substrate may be provided in a different region of the test strip, and a solvent containing the analyte allowed to migrate through the ligand/enzyme complex, displacing the enzyme, and carrying it to the substrate region to produce a signal. Alternatively, the ligandlenzyme complex may be provided on a test stick or other solid phase, and dipped into an analyte/substrate solution, releasing enzyme into the solution in response to the presence of analyte.
Since each molecule of analyte potentially releases one enzyme molecule, the assay is quantitative, with the strength of the signal generated in a given time being dependent on the concentration of analyte in the solution.
Further configurations using the analyte in a closed conformation are possible. For example, the closed conformation multispecific ligand may be configured to bind an enzyme in an allosteric site, thereby activating the enzyme. In such an embodiment, the enzyme is active in the absence of analyte. Addition of the analyte displaces the enzyme and removes allosteric activation, thus inactivating the enzyme.
In the context of the above embodiments which employ enzyme activity as a measure of the analyte concentration, activation or inactivation of the enzyme refers to an increase or decrease in the activity of the enzyme, measured as the ability of the enzyme to catalyse a signal-generating reaction. For example, the enzyme may catalyse the conversion of an undetectable substrate to a detectable form thereof. For example, horseradish peroxidase is widely used in the art together with chromogenic or chemiluminescent substrates, which are available commercially. The level of increase or decrease of the activity of the enzyme may between 10% and 100%, such as 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80% or 90%; in the case of an increase in activity, the increase may be more than 100%, i.e. 200%, 300%, 500% or more, or may not be measurable as a percentage if the baseline activity of the inhibited enzyme is undetectable.
In a further configuration, the closed conformation multispecific ligand may bind the substrate of an enzyme/substrate pair, rather than the enzyme. The substrate is therefore unavailable to the enzyme until released from the closed conformation multispecific ligand through binding of the analyte. The implementations for this configuration are as for the configurations which bind enzyme.
Moreover, the assay may be configured to bind a fluorescent molecule, such as a fluorescein or another fluorophore, in a conformation such that the fluorescence is quenched on binding to the ligand. In this case, binding of the analyte to the ligand will displace the fluorescent molecule, thus producing a signal. Alternatives to fluorescent molecules which are useful in the present invention include luminescent agents, such as luciferin/luciferase, and chromogenic agents, including agents commonly used in immunoassays such as HRP.
Therapeutic and prophylactic uses of multispecific ligands prepared according to the invention involve the administration of ligands according to the invention to a recipient mammal, such as a human. Multi-specificity can allow antibodies to bind to multimeric antigen with great avidity. Multispecific ligands can allow thecross-linking of two antigens, for example in recruiting cytotoxic T-cells to mediate the killing of tumour cell lines.
Substantially pure ligands or binding proteins thereof, for example dAb monomers, of at least 90 to 95% homogeneity are preferred for administration to a mammal, and 98 to 99% or more homogeneity is most preferred for pharmaceutical uses, especially when the mammal is a human. Once purified, partially or to homogeneity as desired, the ligands may be used diagnostically or therapeutically (including extracorporeally) or in developing and performing assay procedures, immunofluorescent stainings and the like (Lefkovite and Pernis, (1979 and 1981) Immunological Methods, Volumes I and II, Academic Press, N.Y.).
The ligands or binding proteins thereof, for example dAb monomers, of the present invention will typically find use in preventing, suppressing or treating inflammatory states, allergic hypersensitivity, cancer, bacterial or viral infection, and autoimmune disorders (which include, but are not limited to, Type I diabetes, asthma, multiple sclerosis, rheumatoid arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, Crohn's disease and myasthenia gravis).
In addition to rheumatoid arthritis, anti-TNF-alpha polypeptides as described herein are applicable to the treatment of autoimmune diseases, such as (parentheticals indicate affected organ), but not limited to: Addison's disease (adrenal); autoimmune diseases of the ear (ear); autoimmune diseases of the eye (eye); autoimmune hepatitis (liver); autoimmune parotitis (parotid glands); Crohn's disease and inflammatory bowel disease (intestine); Diabetes Type I (pancreas); epididymitis (epididymis), glomerulonephritis (kidneys); Graves' disease (thyroid); Guillain-Barre syndrome (nerve cells); Hashimoto's disease (thyroid); hemolytic anemia (red blood cells); systemic lupus erythematosus (multiple tissues); male infertility (sperm); multiple sclerosis (nerve cells); myasthenia gravis (neuromuscular junction); pemphigus (primarily skin); psoriasis (skin); rheumatic fever (heart and joints); sarcoidosis (multiple tissues and organs); scleroderma (skin and connective tissues); Sjogren's syndrome (exocrine glands, and other tissues); spondyloarthropathies (axial skeleton, and other tissues); thyroiditis (thyroid); ulcerative colitis (intestine); and vasculitis (blood vessels).
In addition to rheumatoid arthritis and other chronic inflammatory disorders (e.g., Crohn's disease, psoriasis, etc.), anti-VEGF polypeptides as described herein can be used to treat diabetes, acute myeloid leukemia, leukemia and ophthalmic disorders, including macular degeneration and diabetic retinopathy.
In the instant application, the term “prevention” involves administration of the protective composition prior to the induction of the disease. “Suppression” refers to administration of the composition after an inductive event, but prior to the clinical appearance of the disease.
Animal model systems which can be used to screen the effectiveness of the antibodies or binding proteins thereof in protecting against or treating the disease are available. Methods for the testing of systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE) in susceptible mice are known in the art (Knight et al. (1978) J. Exp. Med., 147: 1653; Reinersten et al. (1978) New Eng. J. Med., 299: 515). Myasthenia Gravis (MG) is tested in SJL/J female mice by inducing the disease with soluble AchR protein from another species (Lindstrom et al. (1988) Adv. Immurzol., 42: 233). Arthritis is induced in a susceptible strain of mice by 30 injection of Type II collagen (Stuart et al. (1984) Ann. Rev. Immunol., 42: 233). A model by which adjuvant arthritis is induced in susceptible rats by injection of mycobacterial heat shock protein has been described (Van Eden et al. (1988) Nature, 331: 171). Thyroiditis is induced in mice by administration of thyroglobulin as described (Maron et al. (1980) J. Exp. Med., 152: 1115). Insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (IDDM) occurs naturally or can be induced in certain strains of mice such as those described by Kanasawa et al. (1984) Diabetologia, 27: 113. EAE in mouse and rat serves as a model for MS in human. In this model, the demyelinating disease is induced by administration of myelin basic protein (see Paterson (1986) Textbook of Immuopathology, Mischer et al., eds., Grune and Stratton, New York, pp. 179-213; McFarlin et al. (1973) Science, 179: 478: and Satoh et al. (1987) J. Immunol., 138: 179).
Generally, the present ligands will be utilised in purified form together with pharmacologically appropriate carriers. Typically, these carriers include aqueous or alcoholic/aqueous solutions, emulsions or suspensions, any including saline and/or buffered media. Parenteral vehicles include sodium chloride solution, Ringer's dextrose, dextrose and sodium chloride and lactated Ringer's . Suitable physiologically-acceptable adjuvants, if necessary to keep a polypeptide complex in suspension, may be chosen from thickeners such as carboxymethylcellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gelatin and alginates.
Intravenous vehicles include fluid and nutrient replenishers and electrolyte replenishers, such as those based on Ringer's dextrose. Preservatives and other additives, such as antimicrobials, antioxidants, chelating agents and inert gases, may also be present (Mack (1982) Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 16th Edition).
The ligands of the present invention may be used as separately administered compositions or in conjunction with other agents. These can include various immunotherapeutic drugs, such as cylcosporine, methotrexate, adriamycin or cisplatinum, and immunotoxins. Pharmaceutical compositions can include “cocktails” of various cytotoxic or other agents in conjunction with the ligands of the present invention, or even combinations of lignds according to the present invention having different specificities, such as ligands selected using different target antigens or epitopes, whether or not they are pooled prior to administration.
The route of administration of pharmaceutical compositions according to the invention may be any of those commonly known to those of ordinary skill in the art. For therapy, including without limitation immunotherapy, the selected ligands thereof of the invention can be administered to any patient in accordance with standard techniques. The administration can be by any appropriate mode, including parenterally, intravenously, intramuscularly, intraperitoneally, transdermally, via the pulmonary route, or also, appropriately, by direct infusion with a catheter. The dosage and frequency of administration will depend on the age, sex and condition of the patient, concurrent administration of other drugs, counterindications and other parameters to be taken into account by the clinician.
As will be appreciated by the skilled artisan, the route and/or mode of administration will vary depending upon the desired results. In certain embodiments, the active compound can be prepared with a carrier that will protect the compound against rapid release, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants, transdermal patches, and microencapsulated delivery systems. Single domain antibody constructs are well suited for formulation as extended release preparations due, in part, to their small size—the number of moles per dose can be significantly higher than the dosage of, for example, full sized antibodies. BiodegradAble, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Prolonged absorption of injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent that delays absorption, for example, monostearate salts and gelatin. Many methods for the preparation of such formulations are patented or generally known to those skilled in the art. See, e.g., Sustained and Controlled Release Drug Delivery Systems, J. R. Robinson, ed., Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, 1978. Additional methods applicable to the controlled or extended release of polypeptide agents such as the single immunoglobulin variable domain polypeptides disclosed herein are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,306,406 and 6,346,274, as well as, for example, in U.S. Patent Application Nos. US 20020182254 and US20020051808, all of which are incorporated herein by reference.
The ligands as described herein can be lyophilised for storage and reconstituted in a suitable carrier prior to use. This technique has been shown to be effective with conventional immunoglobulins and art-known lyophilisation and reconstitution techniques can be employed. It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that lyophilisation and reconstitution can lead to varying degrees of antibody activity loss (e.g. with conventional immunoglobulins, IgM antibodies tend to have greater activity loss than IgG antibodies) and that use levels may have to be adjusted upward to compensate.
The compositions containing the present ligands or a cocktail thereof can be administered for prophylactic andlor therapeutic treatments. In certain therapeutic applications, an adequate amount to accomplish at least partial inhibition, suppression, modulation, killing, or some other measurable parameter, of a population of selected cells is defined as a “therapeutically-effective dose”. Amounts needed to achieve this dosage will depend upon the severity of the disease and the general state of the patient's own immune system, but generally range from 0.005 to 5.0 mg of ligand, e.g. antibody, receptor (e.g. a T-cell receptor) or binding protein thereof per kilogram of body weight, with doses of 0.05 to 2.0 mg/kg/dose being more commonly used. For prophylactic applications, compositions containing the present ligands or cocktails thereof may also be administered in similar or slightly lower dosages.
Treatment performed using the compositions described herein is considered “effective” if one or more symptoms is reduced (e.g., by at least 10% or at least one point on a clinical assessment scale), relative to such symptoms present before treatment, or relative to such symptoms in an individual (human or model animal) not treated with such composition. Symptoms will obviously vary depending upon the disease or disorder targeted, but can be measured by an ordinarily skilled clinician or technician. Such symptoms can be measured, for example, by monitoring the level of one or more biochemical indicators of the disease or disorder (e.g., levels of an enzyme or metabolite correlated with the disease, affected cell numbers, etc.), by monitoring physical manifestations (e.g., inflammation, tumor size, etc.), or by an accepted clinical assessment scale, for example, the Expanded Disability Status Scale (for multiple sclerosis), the Irvine Inflammatory Bowel Disease Questionnaire (32 point assessment evaluates quality of life with respect to bowel function, systemic symptoms, social function and emotional status—score ranges from 32 to 224, with higher scores indicating a better quality of life), the Quality of Life Rheumatoid Arthritis Scale, or other accepted clinical assessment scale as known in the field. A sustained (e.g., one day or more, preferably longer) reduction in disease or disorder symptoms by at least 10% or by one or more points on a given clinical scale is indicative of “effective” treatment. Similarly, prophylaxis performed using a composition as described herein is “effective” if the onset or severity of one or more symptoms is delayed, reduced or abolished relative to such symptoms in a similar individual (human or animal model) not treated with the composition.
A composition containing a ligand or cocktail thereof according to the present invention may be utilised in prophylactic and therapeutic settings to aid in the alteration, inactivation, killing or removal of a select target cell population in a mammal. In addition, the selected repertoires of polypeptides described herein may be used exhacorporeally or in vitro selectively to kill, deplete or otherwise effectively remove a target cell population from a heterogeneous collection of cells. Blood from a mammal may be combined extracorporeally with the ligands, e.g. antibodies, cell-surface receptors or binding proteins thereof whereby the undesired cells are killed or otherwise removed from the blood for return to the mammal in accordance with standard techniques.
2: Use of Half-Life Enhanced Dual-Specific Ligands According to the Invention.
Dual-specific ligands according to the method of the present invention may be employed in in vivo therapeutic and prophylactic applications, in vivo diagnostic applications and the like.
Therapeutic and prophylactic uses of dual-specific ligands prepared according to the invention involve the administration of ligands according to the invention to a recipient mammal, such as a human. Dual specific antibodies according to the invention comprise at least one specificity for a half-life enhancing molecule; one or more further specificities may be directed against target molecules. For example, a dual-specific IgG may be specific for four epitopes, one of which is on a half-life enhancing molecule. Dual-specificity can allow antibodies to bind to multimeric antigen with great avidity. Dual-specific antibodies can allow the cross-linking of two antigens, for example in recruiting cytotoxic T-cells to mediate the killing of tumour cell lines.
Substantially pure ligands or binding proteins thereof, such as dAb monomers, of at least 90 to 95% homogeneity are preferred for administration to a mammal, and 98 to 99% or more homogeneity is most preferred for pharmaceutical uses, especially when the mammal is a human. Once purified, partially or to homogeneity as desired, the ligands may be used diagnostically or therapeutically (including extracorporeally) or in developing and performing assay procedures, immunofluorescent stainings and the like (Lefkovite and Pernis, (1979 and 1981) Immunological Methods, Volumes I and II, Academic Press, NY).
The ligands of the present invention will typically find use in preventing, suppressing or treating inflammatory states, allergic hypersensitivity, cancer, bacterial or viral infection, and autoimmune disorders (which include, but are not limited to, Type I diabetes, multiple sclerosis, rheumatoid arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, Crohn's disease and myasthenia gravis).
Animal model systems which can be used to screen the effectiveness of the dual specific ligands in protecting against or treating the disease are available. Methods for the testing of systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE) in susceptible mice are known in the art (Knight et al. (1978) J. Exp. Med., 147: 1653; Reinersten et al. (1978) New Eng J. Med., 299: s 515). Myasthenia Gravis (MG) is tested in SJL/J female mice by inducing the disease with soluble AchR protein from another species (Lindstrom et al. (1988) Adv. Immunol., 42: 233). Arthritis is induced in a susceptible strain of mice by injection of Type II collagen (Stuart et al. (1984) Ann. Rev. Immunol., 42: 233). A model by which adjuvant arthritis is induced in susceptible rats by injection of mycobacterial heat shock protein has been described (Van Eden et al. (1988) Nature, 331: 171). Thyroiditis is induced in mice by administration of thyroglobulin as described (Maron et al. (1980) J. Exp. Med., 152: 1115). Insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (IDDM) occurs naturally or can be induced in certain strains of mice such as those described by Kanasawa et al. (1984) Diabetologia, 27: 113. EAR in mouse and rat serves as a model for MS in human. In this model, the 5 demyelinating disease is induced by administration of myelin basic protein (see Paterson (1986) Textbook of Immunopathology, Mischer et al., eds., Grune and Stratton, New York, pp. 179-213; McFarlin et al. (1973) Science, 179: 478: and Satoh et al. (1987) J; Immunol., 138: 179).
Dual specific ligands according to the invention and dAb monomers able to bind to extracellular targets involved in endocytosis (e.g. Clathrin) enable dual specifc ligands to be endocytosed, enabling another specificity able to bind to an intracellular target to be delivered to an intracellular environment. This strategy requires a dual specific ligand with physical properties that enable it to remain functional inside the cell. Alternatively, if the final destination intracellular compartnent is oxidising, a well folding ligand may not need to be disulphide free.
Generally, the present dual specific ligands will be utilised in purified form together with pharmacologically appropriate carriers. Typically, these carriers include aqueous or alcoholic/aqueous solutions, emulsions or suspensions, any including saline and/or buffered media. Parenteral vehicles include sodium chloride solution, Ringer's dextrose, dextrose and sodium chloride and lactated Ringer's . Suitable physiologically-acceptable adjuvants, if necessary to keep a polypeptide complex in suspension, may be chosen from thickeners such as carboxymethylcellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gelatin and alginates. Intravenous vehicles include fluid and nutrient replenishers and electrolyte replenishers, such as those based on Ringer's dextrose. Preservatives and other additives, such as antimicrobials, antioxidants, chelating agents and inert gases, may also be present (Mack (1982) Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 16th Edition).
The ligands of the present invention may be used as separately administered compositions or in conjunction with other agents. These can include various immunotherapeutic drugs, such as cylcosporine, methotrexate, adriamycin or cisplatinum, and immunotoxins. Pharmaceutical compositions can include “cocktails” of various cytotoxic or other agents in conjunction with the ligands of the present invention.
The route of administration of pharmaceutical compositions according to the invention may be any of those commonly known to those of ordinary skill in the art. For therapy, including without limitation immunotherapy, the ligands of the invention can be administered to any patient in accordance with standard techniques. The administration can be by any appropriate mode, including parenterally, intravenously, intramuscularly, intraperitoneally, kansdermally, via the pulmonary route, or also, appropriately, by direct infusion with a catheter. The dosage and frequency of administration will depend on the age, sex and condition of the patient, concurrent administration of other drugs, counterindications and other parameters to be taken into account by the clinician.
The ligands of the invention can be lyophilised for storage and reconstituted in a suitable carrier prior to use. This technique has been shown to be effective with conventional immunoglobulins and art-known lyophilisation and reconstitution techniques can be employed. It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that lyophilisation and 30 reconstitution can lead to varying degrees of antibody activity loss (e.g. with conventional immunoglobulins, IgM antibodies tend to have greater activity loss than IgG antibodies) and that use levels may have to be adjusted upward to compensate.
The compositions containing the present ligands or a cocktail thereof can be administered for prophylactic and/or therapeutic treatments. In certain therapeutic applications, an adequate amount to accomplish at least partial inhibition, suppression, modulation, killing, or some other measurable parameter, of a population of selected cells is defined as a “therapeutically-effective dose”. Amounts needed to achieve this dosage will depend upon the severity of the disease and the general state of the patient's own immune system, but generally range from 0.005 to 5.0 mg of ligandper kilogram of body weight, with doses of 0.05 to 2.0 mg/kgldose being more commonly used. For prophylactic applications, compositions containing the present ligands or cocktails thereof may also be administered in similar or slightly lower dosages.
A composition containing a ligand according to the present invention may be utilised in prophylactic and therapeutic settings to aid in the alteration, inactivation, killing or removal of a select target cell population in a mammal.
In addition, the selected repertoires of polypeptides described herein may be used extracorporeally or in vitro selectively to kill, deplete or otherwise effectively remove a target cell population from a heterogeneous collection of cells. Blood from a mammal may be combined extracorporeally with the ligands, e.g. antibodies, cell-surface receptors or binding proteins thereof whereby the undesired cells are killed or otherwise removed from the blood for return to the mammal in accordance with standard techniques. The invention is further described, for the purposes of illustration only, in the following examples. As used herein, for the purposes of dAb nomenclature, human TNF-α is referred to as TAR1 and human TNFa receptor 1 (p55 receptor) is referred to as TAR2.
3. Treatment of Rheumatoid Arthritis
In a preferred embodiment, ligands as described herein can be used to treat rheumatoid arthritis.
In one aspect, the invention provides methods of treating rheumatoid arthritis, comprising the use of one or more single domain antibody polypeptide constructs, wherein one or more of the constructs antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor. The present invention encompasses compositions comprising one or more single domain antibody polypeptide constructs that antagonize human TNFα's binding to a receptor, and dual specific ligands in which one specificity of the ligand is a single domain antibody directed toward TNFα and a second specificity is a single domain antibody directed to VEGF or HSA. The present invention further encompasses dual specific ligands in which one specificity of the ligand is directed toward VEGF and a second specificty is directed to HSA.
In one embodiment the invention provides methods of treatment of rheumatoid arthritis comprising administering a composition comprising one or more single domain antibody polypeptide constructs, wherein one or more of the constructs antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor, and/or prevents an increase in arthritic score when administered to a mouse of the Tg197 transgenic mouse model of arthritis, and/or neutralizes TNF-α in the L929 cytotoxicity assay. In particular, methods of treatment of arthritis comprise the administration of a composition comprising one or more single domain antibody polypeptide constructs, wherein one or more of the constructs antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor, and wherein the administration of the composition to a Tg197 transgenic mouse prevents an increase in arthritic score.
a) Receptor Binding Assays
Ligands for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis can interfere with the binding of TNF-α to a TNF-α receptor. The receptor can be an isolated (usually membrane-bound) receptor, or it can be a receptor present on a cell, either in vitro or in vivo.
Assays for the measurement of TNF-α receptor binding and interference with such binding by ligands as described herein are described below in Example 6. These include ELISAs (Example 6, section 1.3.1), BIAcore analyses (Example 6, section 1.3.2) and biochemical receptor binding assays using both isolated (or membrane-associated) receptors (Example 6, section 1.3.3) and receptors expressed on the surface of cultured cells (Example 6, section 1.3.3).
As used herein, the term “antagonizes binding” of the receptor refers to the ability or effect of a given antibody polypeptide construct to interfere with the binding of TNF-α (or VEGF or other factor) to a cognate receptor. Antagonism is measured using one or more of the in vitro, cell-based or in vivo assays as described herein. Thus, the receptor can be isolated, membrane bound, or present on the cell surface. A construct interferes with or antagonizes binding to a cognate receptor (e.g., TNFR1, TNFR2, VEGFR1, VEGFR2) if there is a statistically significant decrease in binding detected in the presence of the construct relative to the absence of the construct. Alternatively, a construct interferes with binding if there is at least a 10% decrease in measured binding in the presence of the construct, relative to its absence.
b) L929 Cytotoxicity Assay
Ligands for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis can interfere with the cytotoxic effects of TNF-α in the L929 cytotoxicity assay. This assay, based on the assay described by Evans et al., 2000, Molecular Biotechnology 15: 243-248, is described in Example 6, section 1.3.3. Anti-TNF-α ligands useful for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis can neutralize the activity of TNF-α in this cell assay.
As used herein, the term “neutralizing,” when used in reference to an antibody or dAb polypeptide as described herein, means that the polypeptide interferes with a measurable activity or function of the target antigen. A polypeptide is a “neutralizing” polypeptide if it reduces a measurable activity or function of the target antigen by at least 50%, and preferably at least 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95% or more, up to and including 100% inhibition (i.e., no detectable effect or function of the target antigen). Thus, where the target is TNF-α, neutralizing activity can be assessed using the standard L929 cell killing assay described herein or by measuring the ability of an anti-TNF-α polypeptide construct to inhibit TNF-α-induced expression of ELAM-1 on HUVEC, which measures TNF-α-induced cellular activation.
Additional assays for antibody polypeptide interference with the receptor biding activity of TNF-α include the HeLa IL-8 assay also described in Example 6, section 1.3.3.
c) In vivo Assays.
The efficacy of anti-TNF-α ligands as described herein can be assessed using the Tg197 transgenic mouse arthritis model. Tg197 mice are transgenic for the human TNF-globin hybrid gene and heterozygotes at 4-7 weeks of age develop a chronic, progressive polyarthritis with histological features in common with rheumatoid arthritis (Keffer et al., 1991, EMBO J. 10: 4025-4031). The arthritic phenotype can be scored by assessing joint mobility and joint swelling. The arthritic phenotype of the joints can be scored by X-ray imaging of the joints and by histolopathological analysis of fixed sections of the knee and ankle/paw joints.
Experimental treatment to assess the efficacy of a given antibody polypeptide construct is performed as follows:
1) To test the prevention of arthritis with an antibody polypeptide construct, animals are treated as follows:
a) heterozygous Tg197 mice are divided into groups of 10 animals with equal numbers of males and females. Treatment commences at 3 weeks of age, with weekly intraperitoneal administration of the antibody polypeptide in PBS, or PBS alone in the control animals;
b) weigh the mice weekly;
c) score the mice for macrophenotypic signs of arthritis according to the following system: 0=no arthritis (normal appearance and flexion), 1=mild arthritis (joint distortion), 2=moderate arthritis (swelling, joint deformation), 3=heavy arthritis (severely impaired movement).
The studies should best be performed such that the individual scoring is blinded to the test groupings. The preferred mechanism of antibody delivery for this assay is IP injection. However, the assay can be adapted to use subcutaneous injection, IV injection (e.g., via tail vein), intramuscular injection, or oral, inhalation or topical administration.
A treatment is effective in the Tg197 model system if the average arthritic score in the treatment group is lower (by a stistically significant amount) than that of the vehicle-only control group. Treatment is also considered effective if the average arthritic score is lower by at least 0.5 units, at least 1.0 units, at least 1.5 units or by at least 2 units relative to the vehicle-only control animals. Alternatively, the treatment is effective is the average arthritic score remains at or is lowered to 0 to 0.25 throughout the course of the therapeutic regimen.
A treatment is effective in the Tg197 model system if the average arthritic score in the treatment group increases during the course of the experiment but the start of this increase is delayed when compared with the vehicle only control. Treatment is also considered effective if the start of the increase in the average arthritic score of the treatment group when compared to the vehicle only control is delayed by 0.5 weeks, at least 1 week, at least 1.5 weeks, at least 2 weeks or by greater than 3 weeks.
As an alternative to the macrophenotypic scoring, at various intervals durint treatment, ankle/paw and knee joints can be fixed and analyzed histopathologically using the following system: 0=no detectable pathology; 1=hyperplasia of the synovial membrane and presence of polymorphonuclear infiltrates; 2=pannus and fibrous tissue formation and focal subchondral bone erosion; 4=extensive articular cartilage destruction and bone erosion. Treatment is considered effective if the average histopathological score is lower (by a statistically significant amount) than that of the vehicle control group. Treatment is also considered effective if the average histopathological score is lower by at least 0.5 units, at least 1.0 unit, at least 1.5 units, at least 2.0 units, at least 2.5 units, at least 3.0 units, or by at least 3.5 units relative to the vehicle-only control group. Alternatively, the treatment is effective is the average histopatholigical score remains at or is lowered to 0 to 0.5 throughout the course of the therapeutic regimen.
2) To test the effect of an antibody polypeptide construct (anti-TNF-α, anti-VEGF, etc.) on established arthritis, the assay can be performed on Tg197 animals as described above, only beginning treatment at 6 weeks of age, a time at which the animals have significant arthritic phenotypes. Scoring and efficacy analyses are also as described above. Anti-TNF-α dAb constructs as described herein can halt or reverse the progression of established arthritis in one or more of the model systems described.
In either format, treatment approaches include anti-TNF-α (e.g., anti-TNF-α dAb as described herein) in monomeric, dimeric or other multimeric forms, anti-VEGF (e.g., anti-VEGF dAb as described herein, including also camelid anti-VEGF dAbs) in monomeric, dimeric or other multimeric forms, a dual specific format of anti-TNF/anti-VEGF, and individual or dual specific constructs bearing anti-HSA, PEG or other half-life modifying moiet(ies). Additionally, anti-VEGF compositions described herein can be administered in combination with other anti-TNF compositions, such as etanercept (Enbrel), D2E7 (Humira) and infliximab (Remicade). The effectiveness of such combination therapy can be assessed using, for example, the cell culture and in vivo model systems described herein.
Additional accepted animal models of arthrits include collagen induced arthritis (CIA), described, for example, by Horsfall et al., 1997, J. of Immunol. 159:5687), and pristane-induced arthritis, described, for example, by Stasluk et al., 1997, Immunol. 90:81.
Assays for anti-VEGF polypeptide construct effectiveness:
a) VEGF Receptor 2 binding assay
This method describes a VEGF receptor binding assay for measuring the ability of soluble domain antibodies (dAbs) to prevent VEGF165 binding to VEGF Receptor 2.
VEGF is a specific mitogen for endothelial cells in vitro and a potent angiogenic factor in vivo, with high levels of the protein being expressed in various types of tumours. It is a 45 kDa glycoprotein that is active as a homodimer. So far five different isoforms have been described which occur through alternative mRNA splicing. Of these isoforms VEGF121 and VEGF165 are the most abundant.
The specific action of VEGF on endothelial cells is mainly regulated by two types of receptor tyrosine kinases (RTK), VEGF R1 (Flt-1), and VEGF R2 (KDR/Flk-1). However, it appears that the VEGF activities such as mitogenicity, chemotaxis, and induction of morphological changes are mediated by VEGF R2, even though both receptors undergo phosphorylation upon binding of VEGF.
A recombinant human VEGF R2/Fc chimera is used in this assay, comprising the extracellular domain of human VEGF R2 fused to the Fc region of human IgG1. Briefly, the receptor is captured on an ELISA plate, then the plate is blocked to prevent non specific binding. A mixture of VEGF165 and dAb protein is then added, the plate is washed and receptor bound VEGF165 detected using a biotinylated anti-VEGF antibody and an HRP conjugated anti-biotin antibody. The plate is developed using a colorimetric substrate and the OD read at 450 nm. If the dAb blocks VEGF binding to the receptor then no colour is detected.
The assay is performed as follows. A 96 well Nunc Maxisorp assay plate is coated overnight at 4 C with 100 μl per well of recombinant human VEGF R2/Fc (R&D Systems, Cat. No: 357-KD-050) @ 0.5 μg/ml in carbonate buffer. Wells are washed 3 times with 0.05% tween/PBS and 3 times with PBS. 200 μl per well of 2% BSA in PBS is added to block the plate and the plate is incubated for a minimum of 1 h at room temperature.
Wells are washed (as above), then 50 μl per well of purified dAb protein is added to each well. 50 μl of VEGF, @ 6 ng/ml in diluent (for a final concentration of 3 ng/ml), is then added to each well and the plate incubated for 2 hr at room temperature (for assay of supernatants; add 80 μl of supernatant to each well then 20 μl of VEGF @ 15 ng/ml).
The following controls should be included: 0 ng/ml VEGF (diluent only); 3 ng/ml VEGF (R&D Systems, Cat No: 293-VE-050); 3 ng/ml VEGF with 0.1 pg/ml anti-VEGF neutralizing antibody (R&D Systems cat#MAB293).
The plate is washed (as above) and then 100 μl biotinylated anti-VEGF antibody (R&D Systems, Cat No: BAF293), 0.5 μg/ml in diluent, is added and incubated for 2 hr at room temperature.
Wells are washed (as above) then add 100 μl HRP conjugated anti-biotin antibody (1:5000 dilution in diluent; Stratech, Cat No: 200-032-096). The plate is then incubated for 1 hr at room temperature.
The plate is washed (as above) ensuring any traces of Tween-20 have been removed to limit background in the subsequent peroxidase assay and to help the prevention of bubbles in the assay plate wells that will give inaccurate OD readings.
100 μl of SureBlue 1-Component TMB MicroWell Peroxidase solution is added to each well, and the plate is left at room temperature for up to 20min. A deep blue soluble product will develop as bound HRP labelled conjugate reacts with the substrate. The reaction is stopped by the addition of 100 μl 1M hydrochloric acid (the blue colour will turn yellow). The OD, at 450 nm, of the plate should be read in a 96-well plate reader within 30 min of acid addition. The OD450 nm is proportional to the amount of bound streptavidin-HRP conjugate.
Expected result from the controls are as follows: 0 ng/ml VEGF should give a low signal of <0.15 OD; 3 ng/ml VEGF should give a signal of >0.5 OD; and 3 ng/ml VEGF pre-incubated with 0.1 μg/ml neutralising antibody should give a signal<0.2 OD.
b) VEGF Receptor 1 Binding Assay
This assay measures the binding of VEGF165 to VEGF R1 and the ability of dAbs to block this interaction.
A recombinant human VEGF R1/Fc chimera is used here, comprising the extracellular domain of human VEGF R1 fused to the Fc region of human IgG1. The receptor is captured on an ELISA plate then the plate is blocked to prevent non specific binding. A mixture of VEGF165 and dAb protein is then added, the plate is washed and receptor bound VEGF165 detected using a biotinylated anti-VEGF antibody and an HRP conjugated anti-biotin antibody. The plate is developed using a colorimetric substrate and the OD read at 450 nm. If the dAb blocks VEGF binding to the receptor then no colour will show.
The assay is performed as follows. A 96 well Nunc Maxisorp assay plate is coated overnight at 4C with 100 μl per well of recombinant human VEGF R1/Fc (R&D Systems, Cat No: 321-FL-050) @ 0.1 μg/ml in carbonate buffer. Wells are washed 3 times with 0.05% tween/PBS and 3 times with PBS.
200 μl per well of 2% BSA in PBS is added to block the plate and the plate is incubated for a minimum of 1 h at room temperature.
Wells are washed (as above), then 50 μl per well of purified dAb protein is added to each well. 50 μl of VEGF, @ 1 ng/ml in diluent (for a final concentration of 500 pg/ml), is then added to each well and the plate incubated for 1 hr at room temperature (assay of supernatants; add 80 μl of supernatant to each well then 20 μl of VEGF @ 2.5 ng/ml).
The following controls should be included: 0 ng/ml VEGF (diluent only); 500 pg/ml VEGF; and 500 pg/ml VEGF with 1 μg/ml anti-VEGF antibody (R&D Systems cat#MAB293).
The plate is washed (as above) and then 100 μl biotinylated anti-VEGF antibody, 50 ng/ml in diluent, is added and incubated for 1 hr at room temperature.
Wells are washed (as above) then add 100 μl HRP conjugated anti-biotin antibody (1:5000 dilution in diluent). The plate is then incubated for 1 hr at room temperature.
The plate is washed (as above), ensuring any traces of Tween-20 have been removed to limit background in the subsequent peroxidase assay and to help the prevention of bubbles in the assay plate wells that will give inaccurate OD readings.
100 μl of SureBlue 1-Component TMB MicroWell Peroxidase solution is added to each well, and the plate is left at room temperature for up to 20 min. A deep blue soluble product will develop as bound HRP labelled conjugate reacts with the substrate. The reaction is stopped by the addition of 100 μl 1M hydrochloric acid (the blue colour will turn yellow). The OD, at 450 nm, of the plate should be read in a 96-well plate reader within 30 min of acid addition. The OD450 nm is proportional to the amount of bound streptavidin-HRP conjugate.
Expected result from the controls: 0 ng/ml VEGF should give a low signal of <0.15 OD; 500 pg/ml VEGF should give a signal of >0.8 OD; and 500 pg/ml VEGF pre-incubated with 1 μg/ml neutralising antibody should give a signal<0.3 OD
c) Cell-Based Assay for VEGF Activity:
This bioassay measures the ability of antibody polypeptides (e.g., dAbs) and other inhibitors to neutralise the VEGF induced proliferation of HUVE cells. HUVE cells plated in 96 well plates are incubated for 72 hours with pre-equilibrated VEGF and dAb protein. Cell number is then measured using a cell viability dye.
The assay is performed as follows. HUVE cells are trypsinized from a sub-confluent 175cm2 flask. Medium is aspirated off, the cells are washed with 5ml trypsin and then incubated with 2 ml trypsin at room temperature for 5 min. The cells are gently dislodged from the base of the flask by knocking against your hand. 8 ml of induction medium are then added to the flask, pipetting the cells to disperse any clumps. Viable cells are counted using trypan blue stain.
Cells are spun down and washed 2× in induction medium, spinning cells down and aspirating the medium after each wash. After the final aspiration the cells are diluted to 105 cells/ml (in induction medium) and plated at 100 μl per well into a 96 well plate (10,000 cells/well). The plate is incubated for >2h @ 37 C to allow attachment of cells.
60 μl dAb protein and 60 μl induction media containing 40 ng/ml VEGF165 (for a final concentration of 10 ng/ml) is added to a v bottom 96 well plate and sealed with film. The dAb/VEGF mixture is then incubated at 37C for 0.5-1 hour.
The dAb/VEGF plate is removed from the incubator and 100 μl of solution added to each well of the HUVEC containing plate (final volume of 200 μl). This plate is then returned to the 37 C incubator for a period of at least 72 hours.
Control wells include the following: wells containing cells, but no VEGF; wells containing cells, a positive control neutralising anti-VEGF antibody and VEGF; and control wells containing cells and VEGF only.
Cell viability is assessed by adding 20 μl per well Celltiter96 reagent, and the plate incubated at 37 C for 2-4 h until a brown colour develops. The reaction is stopped by the addition of 20 μl per well of 10% (w/v) SDS. The absorbance is then read at 490mn using a Wallac microplate reader.
The absorbance of the no VEGF control wells is subtracted from all other values. Absorbance is proportional to cell number. The control wells containing control anti-VEGF antibodies should also exhibit minimum cell proliferation. The wells containing VEGF only should exhibit maximum cell proliferation.
d) In vivo Assay for VEGF Activity:
The efficacy of anti-VEGF polypeptide constructs (monomers, multimers or dual- or multi-specific) can also be tested in the Tg197 transgenic mouse model of arthritic disease. Dosing regimens and scoring are essentially as described for anti-TNF-α polypeptide constructs.
4. Treatment of Crohn's Disease
Anti-TNF-α polypeptides as described herein can be used to treat Crohn's disease in humans. In one embodiment the invention provides methods of treatment of Crohn's disease or other inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) in which TNF-α is involved. The methods comprise administering a composition comprising one or more single domain antibody polypeptide constructs, wherein one or more of the constructs antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor, and/or prevents an increase in acute or chronic inflammatory bowel score when administered to a mouse of the TnfΔARE transgenic mouse model of IBD, and/or neutralizes TNF-α in the L929 cytotoxicity assay. In particular, methods of treatment of Crohn's or other inflammatory bowel disorders comprise the administration of a composition comprising one or more single domain antibody polypeptide constructs, wherein one or more of the constructs antagonizes human TNFα's binding to a receptor, and wherein the administration of the composition to a TnfΔARE transgenic mouse prevents an increase or effects a decrease in acute or chronic inflammatory bowel score.
The TnfΔARE transgenic mouse model of Crohn's disease was originally described by Kontoyiannis et al., 1999, Immunity 10: 387-398; see also Kontoyiannis et al., 2002, J. Exp. Med. 196: 1563-1574. These mice bear a targeted deletion mutation in the 3′ AU-rich elements (AREs) of TNF-α mRNA. AU-rich elements are involved in maintaining low mRNA stability, and their disruption leads to overexpression of murine TNF-α in these animals. The animals develop an IBD phenotype with remarkable similarity to Crohn's disease starting between 4 and 8 weeks of age. The basic histopathological characteristics include villus blunting and submucosal inflammation with prevailing PMN/macrophage and lymphocytic exudates, proceeding to patchy transmural inflammation and the appearance of lymphoid aggregates and rudimentary granulomata (Kontoyiannis et al., 2002, supra.). These animals also develop an arthritic phenotype and can thus also be used to separately evaluate the efficacy of anti-TNF-α treatments in RA.
Where treatment is to be evaluated for its effect in preventing IBD, treatment is initiated at, for example, 3 weeks of age, with initial weekly IP doses of a given antibody polypeptide construct. More or less frequent dosing intervals can be selected by one of skill in the art, depending upon the outcome of initial studies. Animals can then be monitored for bowel disease according to a standard scale as described in Kontoyiannis et al., 2002, supra. Paraffin-embedded intestinal tissue sections of ileum are histologically evaluated in a blinded fashion according to the following scale: Acute and chronic inflammation are assessed separately in a minimum of 8 high power fields (hpf) as follows—acute inflammatory score 0=0-1 polymorphonuclear (PMN) cells per hpf (PMN/hpf); 1=2-10 PMN/hpf within mucosa; 2=11-20 PMN/hpf within mucosa; 3=21-30 PMN/hpf within mucosa or 11-20 PMN/hpf with extension below muscularis mucosae; and 4=>30 PMN/hpf within mucosa or >20 PMN/hpf with extension below muscularis mucosae. Chronic inflammatory score 0=0-10 mononuclear leukocytes (ML) per hpf (ML/hpf) within mucosa; 1=11-20 ML/hpf within mucosa; 2=21-30 ML/hpf within mucosa or 11-20 ML/hpf with extension below muscularis mucosae; 3=31-40 ML/hpf within mucosa or 21-30 ML/hpf with extension below muscularis mucosae or follicular hyperplasia; and 4=>40 ML/hpf within mucosa or >30 ML/hpf with extension below muscularis mucosae or follicular hyperplasia. Total disease score per mouse is calculated by summation of the acute inflammatory or chronic inflammatory scores for each mouse.
To evaluate the effect of treatment on established disease, treatment can be begun at 6-8 weeks of age, with scoring performed in the same manner.
Treatment is considered effective if the average histopathological disease score is lower in treated animals (by a statistically significant amount) than that of the vehicle control group. Treatment is also considered effective if the average histopathological score is lower by at least 0.5 units, at least 1.0 units, at least 1.5 units, at least 2.0 units, at least 2.5 units, at least 3.0 units, or by at least 3.5 units relative to the vehicle-only control group. Alternatively, the treatment is effective if the average histopatholigical score remains at or is lowered to 0 to 0.5 throughout the course of the therapeutic regimen.
Other models of IBD include, for example, the DSS (dextran sodium sulfate) model of chronic colitis in BALB/c mice. The DSS model was originally described by Okayasu et al., 1990, Gastroenterology 98: 694-702 and was modified by Kojouharoff et al., 1997, Clin Exp. Immunol. 107: 353-358 (see also WO 2004/041862, which designates the U.S., incorporated herein by reference). BALB/c mice weighing 21-22 g are treated to induce chronic colitis by the administration of DSS in their drinking water at 5% w/v in cycles of 7 days of treatment and 12 days recovery interval without DSS. The 4th recovery period can be extended from 12 to 21 days to represent a chronic inflammation status, rather than the acute status modeled by shorter recovery. After the last recovery period, treatment with antibody polypeptide, e.g., anti-TNF-α polypeptide as described herein is administered. Weekly administration is recommended initially, but can be adjusted by one of skill in the art as necessary (especially, e.g., to evaluate dosage forms with different half-life modifying moieties). At intervals during treatment, animals are killed, intestine is dissected and histopathological scores are assessed as described herein or as described in Kojouharoff et al., 1997, supra.
Other animal models of inflammatory bowel disease include the chronic intestinal inflammation induced by rectal instillation of 2,4,6-Trinitrobenzene sulfonic acid (TNBS; method described by Neurath et al., 1995, J. Exp. Med. 182: 1281; see also U.S. Pat. No. 6,764,838, incorporated herein by reference). Histopathological scoring can be performed using the same standard described above.
Comparison with Other Anti-TNF-α Agents:
Disclosed herein are anti-TNF-α dAb constructs effective for the treatment of RA, Crohn's disease and other TNF-α mediated disorders. In one aspect, the effectiveness of the anti-TNF-α dAb constructs is greater than or equal to that of an agent selected from the group consisting of etanercept (ENBREL), infliximab (REMICADE) and D2E7 (HUMIRA; see U.S. Pat. No. 6,090,382, incorporated herein by reference).
Clinical trials of a recombinant version of the soluble human TNFR (p75) linked to the Fc portion of human IgG1 (sTNFR(p75):Fc, ENBREL, Immunex) have shown that its administration resulted in significant and rapid reductions in RA disease activity (Moreland et al., 1997, N. Eng. J. Med., 337:141-147). In addition, preliminary safety data from a pediatric clinical trial for sTNFR(p75):Fc indicates that this drug is generally well-tolerated by patients with juvenile rheumatoid arthritis (JRA) (Garrison et al, 1998, Am. College of Rheumatology meeting, Nov. 9, 1998, abstract 584).
As noted above, ENBREL is a dimeric fusion protein consisting of the extracellular ligand-binding portion of the human 75 kilodalton (p75) TNFR (GenBank Accession No. P20333) linked to the Fc portion of human IgG1. The Fc component of ENBREL contains the CH2 domain, the CH3 domain and hinge region, but not the CH1 domain of IgG1 . ENBREL is produced in a Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) mammalian cell expression system. It consists of 934 amino acids and has an apparent molecular weight of approximately 150 kilodaltons (Smith et al., 1990, Science 248:1019-1023; Mohler et al., 1993, J. Immunol. 151:1548-1561; U.S. Pat. No. 5,395,760 (Immunex Corporation, Seattle, Wash.; incorporated herein by reference); U.S. Pat. No. 5,605,690 (Immunex Corporation, Seattle, Wash.; incorporated herein by reference).
A monoclonal antibody directed against TNF-α. (infliximab, REMICADE, Centocor), administered with and without methotrexate, has demonstrated clinical efficacy in the treatment of RA (Elliott et al., 1993, Arthritis Rheum. 36:1681-1690; Elliott et al., 1994, Lancet 344:1105-1110). These data demonstrate significant reductions in Paulus 20% and 50% criteria at 4, 12 and 26 weeks. This treatment is administered intravenously and the anti-TNF monoclonal antibody disappears from circulation over a period of two months. The duration of efficacy appears to decrease with repeated doses. The patient can generate antibodies against the anti-TNF antibodies which limit the effectiveness and duration of this therapy (Kavanaugh et al., 1998, Rheum. Dis. Clin. North Am. 24:593-614). Administration of methotrexate in combination with infliximab helps prevent the development of anti-infliximab antibodies (Maini et al., 1998, Arthritis Rheum. 41:1552-1563). Infliximab has also demonstrated clinical efficacy in the treatment of the inflammatory bowel disorder Crohn's disease (Baert et al., 1999, Gastroenterology 116:22-28).
As discussed in the background section, infliximab is a chimeric monoclonal IgG antibody bearing human IgG4 constant and mouse variable regions. The infliximab polypeptide is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,698,195 and 5,656,272, which are incorporated herein by reference.
To compare efficacy with these or other anti-TNF-α compositions, one need only perform one or more of the receptor binding, cell-based or in vivo assays as described herein above using the anti-TNF-α dAb construct in parallel with the existing composition. This approach thus identifies those anti-TNF-α dAb constructs that show an effectiveness at inhibiting the effects of TNF-α in one or more of the assays that is equal to or greater than (in a statistically significant manner) the effectiveness of the comparison composition. Examples of such constructs and the analyses demonstrating equal or superior effectiveness are provided in the Examples.
This example explains a method for making a dual specific antibody directed against β-gal and HSA in which a repertoire of VK variable domains linked to a gernline (dummy) VH domain is selected for binding to p-gal and a repertoire of VH variable domains linked to a germline (dummy) VK domain is selected for binding to HSA. The selected variable VH HSA and VKB-gal domains are then combined and the antibodies selected for binding to β-gal and HSA. HSA is a half-life increasing protein found in human blood.
s Four human phage antibody libraries were used in this experiment.
All libraries are based on a single human framework for VH (V3-23/DP47 and JH4b) and Vκ (012/O2/DPK9 and Jκ1) with side chain diversity incorporated in complementarity determining regions (CDR2 and CDR3).
Library 1 and Library 2 contain a dummy Vκ sequence, whereas the sequence of VH is diversified at positions H50, H52, H52a, H53, H55, H56, H58, H95, H96, H97 and H98 (DVT or NNK encoded, respectively) (
Three rounds of selections were performed on β-gal using Vκ/dummy VH library and three rounds of selections were performed on HSA using VH/dummy Vκ library. In the case of β-gal the phage titres went up from 1.1×106 in the first round to 2.0×108 in the third round. In the case of HSA the phage titres went up from 2×104 in the first round to 1.4×109 in the third round. The selections were performed as described by Griffith et al., (1993), except that KM13 helper phage (which contains a pIII protein with a protease cleavage site between the D2 and D3 domains) was used and phage were eluted with 1 mg/ml trypsin in PBS. The addition of trypsin cleaves the pIII proteins derived from the helper phage (but not those from the phagemid) and elutes bound scFv-phage fusions by cleavage in the c-myc tag (
To check for binding, 24 colonies from the third round of each selection were screened by monoclonal phage ELISA. Phage particles were produced as described by Harrison et al., Methods Enzymol. 1996;267:83-109. 96-well ELISA plates were coated with 100 μl of HSA or β-gal at 10 μg/ml concentration in PBS overnight at 4° C. A standard ELISA protocol was followed (Hoogenboom et al., 1991) using detection of bound phage with anti-M13-HRP conjugate. A selection of clones gave ELISA signals of greater than 1.0 with 50 μl supernatant.
Next, DNA preps were made from VH/dummy Vκ library selected on HSA and from Vκ/dummy VH library selected on β-gal using the QIAprep Spin Miniprep kit (Qiagen).
To access most of the diversity, DNA preps were made from each of the three rounds of selections and then pulled together for each of the antigens. DNA preps were then digested with SalI/NotI overnight at 37° C. Following gel purification of the fragments, Vκ chains from the Vκ/dummy VH library selected on β-gal were ligated in place of a dummy Vκ, chain of the VH/dummy Vκ library selected on HSA creating a library of 3. 3×109 clones.
This library was then either selected on HSA (first round) and β-gal (second round), HSA/β-gal selection, or on β-gal (first round) and HSA (second round), β-gal/HSA selection. Selections were performed as described above. In each case after the second round 48 clones were tested for binding to HSA and β-gal by the monoclonal phage ELISA (as described above) and by ELISA of the soluble scFv fragments. Soluble antibody fragments were produced as described by Harrison et al., (1996), and standard ELISA protocol was followed (Hoogenboom et al. (1991) Nucleic Acids Res., 19: 4133), except that 2% Tween/PBS was used as a blocking buffer and bound scFvs were detected with Protein L-HRP. Three clones (E4, E5 and E8) from the HSA/β-gal selection and two clones (K8 and K10) from the β-gal/HSA selection were able to bind both antigens. scFvs from these clones were PCR amplified and sequenced as described by Ignatovich et al., (1999) J. Mol. Biol. Nov. 26, 1999; 294(2):457-65, using the primers LMB3 and pHENseq. Sequence analysis revealed that all clones were identical. Therefore, only one clone encoding a dual specific antibody (K8) was chosen for further work (
Firstly, the binding properties of the K8 antibody were characterized by the monoclonal phage ELISA. A 96-well plate was coated with 100 μl of HSA and β-gal alongside with alkaline phosphatase (APS), bovine serum albumin (BSA), peanut agglutinin, lysozyme and cytochrome c (to check for cross-reactivity) at 10 μg/ml concentration in PBS overnight at 4° C. The phagemid from K8 clone was rescued with KM13 as described by Harrison et al., (1996) and the supernatant (50 μl) containing phage assayed directly. A standard ELISA protocol was followed (Hoogenboom et al., 1991) using detection of bound phage with anti-M13-HRP conjugate. The dual specific K8 antibody was found to bind to HSA and β-gal when displayed on the surface of the phage with absorbance signals greater than 1.0 (
Since HSA and BSA are 76% homologous on the amino acid level, it is not surprising that K8 antibody recognised both of these structurally related proteins. No cross-reactivity with other proteins was detected (
Secondly, the binding properties of the K8 antibody were tested in a soluble scFv ELISA.
Production of the soluble scFv fragment was induced by IPTG as described by Harrison et al., (1996). To determine the expression levels of K8 scFv, the soluble antibody fragments were purified from the supernatant of 50 ml inductions using Protein A Sepharose columns as described by Harlow and Lane, Antibodies: a Laboratory Manual, (1988) Cold Spring Harbor. OD280 was then measured and the protein concentration calculated as described by Sambrook et al., (1989). K8 scFv was produced in supernatant at 19mg/1.
A soluble scFv ELISA was then performed using known concentrations of the K8 antibody fragment. A 96-well plate was coated with 100 μl of HSA, BSA and β-gal at 10 μg/ml and 100 μl of Protein A at 1 μg/ml concentration. 50 μl of the serial dilutions of the K8 scFv was applied and the bound antibody fragments were detected with Protein L-HRP. ELISA results confirmed the dual specific nature of the K8 antibody (
To confirm that binding to β-gal is determined by the Vκ domain and binding to HAS/BSA by the VH domain of the K8 scFv antibody, the Vκ domain was cut out from K8 scFv DNA by SalI/NotI digestion and ligated into a SalI/NotI digested pIT2 vector containing dummy VH chain (
This example describes a method for making single VH domain antibodies directed against antigens A and B and single Vκ domain antibodies directed against antigens C and D by selecting repertoires of virgin single antibody variable domains for binding to these antigens in the absence of the complementary variable domains.
Selections and characterization of the binding clones is performed as described previously (see Example 5, PCT/GB 02/003014). Four clones are chosen for further work:
VH1—Anti A VH
VH2—Anti B VH
VK1—Anti C Vκ
VK2—Anti D Vκ
The procedures described above in Examples 1-3 may be used, in a similar manner as that described, to produce dimer molecules comprising combinations of VH domains (i.e., VH ligands) and cominations of VL domains (VL-VL ligands).
This example demonstrates that dual specific ScFv antibodies (VH1/VH2 directed against antigens A and B and VK1/VK2 directed against antigens C and D) could be created by combining Vκ and VH single domains selected against respective antigens in a ScFv vector. To create dual specific antibody VH1/VH2, VH1 single domain is excised from variable domain vector 1 (
VK1/VK2/variable domain vector 2 is created in a similar way. The dual specific nature of the produced VH1/VH2 ScFv and VK1/VK2 ScFv is tested in a soluble ScFv ELISA as described previously (see Example 6, PCT/GB02/003014). Competition ELISA is performed as described previously (see Example 8, PCT/GB02/003014).
Possible Outcomes:
-VH1/VH2 ScFv is able to bind antigens A and B simultaneously
-VK1/VK2 ScFv is able to bind antigens C and D simultaneously
-VH1/VH2 ScFv binding is competitive (when bound to antigen A, VH1/VH2 ScFv cannot bind to antigen B)
-VK1/VK2 ScFv binding is competitive (when bound to antigen C, VK1/VK2 ScFv cannot bind to antigen D)
To create VH1/VH2 Fab, VH1 single domain is ligated into NcoI/XhoI digested CH vector (
The clone containing VH1/CH and VH2/CK plasmids is then induced by IPTG to produce soluble VH1/VH2 Fab as described previously (see Example 8, PCT/GB 02/003014).
VK1/VK2 Fab is produced in a similar way.
Binding properties of the produced Fabs are tested by competition ELISA as described previously (see Example 8, PCT/GB 02/003014).
Possible Outcomes
-VH1/VH2 Fab is able to bind antigens A and B simultaneously
-VK1/VK2 Fab is able to bind antigens C and D simultaneously
-VH1/VH2 Fab binding is competitive (when bound to antigen A, VH1/VH2 Fab cannot bind to antigen B)
-VK1/VK2 Fab binding is competitive (when bound to antigen C, VK1NK2 Fab cannot bind to antigen D)
VH and VK homo-dimers are created in a dAb-linker-dAb format using flexible polypeptide linkers. Vectors were created in the dAb linker-dAb format containing glycine-serine linkers of different lengths 3U:(Gly4Ser)3, 5U:(Gly4Ser)5, 7U:(Gly4Ser)7. Dimer libraries were using guiding dAbs upstream of the linker: TAR1-5 (VK), 5 TAR1-27(VK), TAR2-5(VH) or TAR2-6(VK) and a library of corresponding second dAbs after the linker. Using this method, novel dimeric dabs were selected. The effect of dimerisation on antigen binding was determined by ELISA and BIAcore studies and in cell neutralization and receptor binding assays. Dimerisation of both TAR1-5 and TAR1-27 resulted in significant improvement in binding affinity and neutralization levels.
1.0 Methods
1.1 Library Generation
1.1.1 Vectors
pEDA3U, pEDA5U and pEDA7U vectors were designed to introduce different linker lengths compatible with the dAb-linker-dAb format. For pEDA3U, sense and anti-sense 73-base pair oligo linkers were annealed using a slow annealing program (95° C.-5mins, 80° C.-10 mins, 70° C.-15 mins, 56° C.-15 mins, 42° C. until use) in buffer containing 0.1M NaCl, 10 mM Tris-HCl pH7.4 and cloned using the XhoI and NotI restriction sites.
The linkers encompassed 3 (Gly4Ser) (SEQ ID NO: 7) units and a stuffer region housed between SalI and NotI cloning sites (scheme 1). In order to reduce the possibility of monomeric dAbs being selected for by phage display, the stuffer region was designed to include 3 stop codons, a SacI restriction site and a frame shift mutation to put the region out of frame when no second dAb was present. For pEDA5U and 7U, due to the length of the linkers required, overlapping oligo-linkers were designed for each vector, annealed and elongated using Klenow. The fragment was then purified and digested using the appropriate enzymes before cloning using the XhoI and NotI restriction sites.
1.1.2 Library Preparation
The N-terminal V gene corresponding to the guiding dAb was cloned upstream of the linker using NcoI and XhoI restriction sites. VH genes have existing compatible sites, however cloning VK genes required the introduction of suitable restriction sites. This was achieved by using modifying PCR primers (VK-DLIBF: 5′ cggccatggcgtcaacggacat-3′; VKXhoIR: 5′ atgtgcgctcgagcgtttgattt-3′) in 30 cycles of PCR amplification using a 2:1 mixture of SuperTaq (HTBiotechnology Ltd)and pfu turbo (Stratagene). This maintained 5 the NcoI site at the 5′ end while destroying the adjacent SalI site and introduced the XhoI site at the 3′ end. 5 guiding dAbs were cloned into each of the 3 dimer vectors: TAR1-5 (VK), TAR1-27(VK), TAR2-5(VH), TAR2-6(VK) and TAR2-7(VK). All constructs were verified by sequence analysis.
Having cloned the guiding dAbs upstream of the linker in each of the vectors (pEDA3U, 5U and 7U): TAR1-5 (VK), TAR1-27(VK), TAR2-5(VH) or TAR2-6(VK) a library of corresponding second dAbs were cloned after the linker. To achieve this, the complimentary dAb libraries were PCR amplified from phage recovered from round 1 selections of either a VK library against Human TNF-α (at approximately 1×106 diversity after round 1) when TAR1-5 or TAR1-27 are the guiding dAbs, or a VH or VK library against human p55 TNF receptor (both at approximately 1×105 diversity after round 1) when TAR2-5 or TAR2-6 respectively are the guiding dAbs. For VK libraries PCR amplification was conducted using primers in 30 cycles of PCR amplification using a 2:1 mixture of SuperTaq and pfu turbo. VH libraries were PCR amplified using primers in order to introduce a SalI restriction site at the 5′ end of the gene. The dAb library PCRs were digested with the appropriate restriction enzymes, ligated into the corresponding vectors down stream of the linker, using SalI/NotI restriction sites and electroporated into freshly prepared competent TG1 cells.
The titres achieved for each library are as follows:
TAR1-5: pEDA3U=4×108, pEDA5U=8×107, pEDA7U=1×108
TAR1-27: pEDA3U=6.2×108, pEDA5U=1×108, pEDA7U=1×109
TAR2h-5: pEDA3U=4×107, pEDA5U=2×108, pEDA7U=8×107
TAR2h-6: pEDA3U=7.4×108, pEDA5U=1.2×108, pEDA7U=2.2×108
1.2 Selections
1.2.1 TNF-α
Selections were conducted using human TNFa passively coated on immunotubes. Briefly, Immunotubes were coated overnight with 1-4 mls of the required antigen. The immunotubes were then washed 3 times with PBS and blocked with 2% milk powder in PBS for 1-2hrs and washed a further 3 times with PBS. The phage solution is diluted in 2% milk powder in PBS and incubated at room temperature for 2 hrs. The tubes are then washed with PBS and the phage eluted with 1 mg/ml trypsin-PBS. Three selection strategies were investigated for the TAR1-5 dimer libraries. The first round selections were carried out in immunotubes using human TNFa coated at 1 μg/ml or 20 μg/ml with 20 washes in PBS 0.1% Tween. TG1 cells are infected with the eluted phage and the titres are determined (eg, Marks et al. J Mol Biol. Dec. 5, 1991; 222(3):581-97, Richmann et al Biochemistry. Aug. 31, 1993; 32(34) :8848-55).
The titres recovered were:
pEDA3U=2.8×107 (1 μg/ml TNF) 1.5×108 (20 μg/ml TNF),
pEDA5U=1.8×107 (1 μg/ml TNF), 1.6×108 (20 μg/ml TNF)
pEDA7U=8×106 (1 μg/ml TNF), 7×107 (20 μg/ml TNF).
The second round selections were carried out using 3 different methods.
1. In immunotubes, 20 washes with overnight incubation followed by a further 10 washes.
2. In immunotubes, 20 washes followed by 1 hr incubation at RT in wash buffer with (1 μg/ml TNF-α) and 10 further washes.
3. Selection on streptavidin beads using 33 pmoles biotinylated human TNF-α (Henderikx et al., 2002, Selection of antibodies against biotinylated antigens. Antibody Phage Display: Methods and protocols, Ed. O'Brien and Atkin, Humana Press). Single clones from round 2 selections were picked into 96 well plates and crude supernatant preps were made in 2 ml 96 well plate format.
For TAR1-27, selections were carried out as described previously with the following modifications. The first round selections were carried out in immunotubes using human TNF-α coated at 1 μg/ml or 20 μg/ml with 20 washes in PBS 0.1% Tween. The second round selections were carried out in immunotubes using 20 washes with overnight incubation followed by a further 20 washes. Single clones from round 2 selections were picked into 96 well plates and crude supernatant preps were made in 2 ml 96 well plate format.
TAR1-27 titres are as follows:
1.2.2 TNF Receptor 1 (p55 RECEPTOR; TAR2)
Selections were conducted as described previously for the TAR2 h-5 libraries only. 3 rounds of selections were carried out in immunotubes using either 1 μg/ml human p55 TNF receptor or 10 μg/ml human p55 TNF receptor with 20 washes in PBS 0. 1% Tween with overnight incubation followed by a farther 20 washes. Single clones from round 2 and 3 selections were picked into 96 well plates and crude supernatant preps were made in 2ml 96 well plate format.
0 TAR2h-5 titres are as follows:
1.3 Screening
Single clones from round 2 or 3 selections were picked from each of the 3U, 5U and 7U libraries from the different selections methods, where appropriate. Clones were grown in 2× TY with 100 μg/ml ampicillin and 1% glucose overnight at 37° C. A 1/100 dilution of this culture was inoculated into 2 mls of 2× TY with 100 μg/ml ampicillin and 0.1% glucose in 2 ml, 96 well plate format and grown at 37° C. shaking until OD600 was approximately 0.9. The culture was then induced with 1 mM IPTG overnight at 30° C.
The supernatants were clarified by centrifugation at 4000 rpm for 15 mins in a Sorval plate centrifuge. The supernatant preps were used for initial screening.
1.3.1 ELISA
Binding activity of dimeric recombinant proteins was compared to monomer by Protein A/L ELISA or by antigen ELISA. Briefly, a 96 well plate is coated with antigen or Protein A/L overnight at 4° C. The plate is washed with 0.05% Tween-PBS, blocked for 2hrs with 2% Tween-PBS. The sample is added to the plate, and incubated for 1 hr at room temperature. The plate is 1 5 washed and incubated with the secondary reagent for 1 hr at room temperature. The plate is washed and developed with TMB substrate. Protein A/L HRP or India-HRP was used as a secondary reagent. For antigen ELISAs, the antigen concentrations used were 1 μg/ml in PBS for Human TNFa and human TNF receptor 1. Due to the presence of the guiding dAb in most cases dimers gave a positive ELISA signal—therefore off rate determination was examined by BIAcore.
1.3.2 BIAcore
BIAcore analysis was conducted for TAR1-5 and TAR2h-5 clones. For screening, Human TNF-α was coupled to a CM5 chip at high density (approximately 10,000 RUs).
50 μl of Human TNFa (50 μg/ml) was coupled to the chip at 5 μl/min in acetate buffer pH5.5. Regeneration of the chip following analysis using the standard methods is not possible due to the instability of Human TNF-α. Ttherefore after each sample was analysed, the chip was washed for 10 mins with buffer.
For TAR1-5, clone supernatants from the round 2 selection were screened by BIAcore. 48 clones were screened from each of the 3U, 5U and 7U libraries obtained using the following selection methods:
R1: 1 μg/ml human TNF-α immunotube, R2 1 μg/ml human TNF-α immunotube, overnight wash.
R1: 20 μg/ml human TNF-α immunotube, R2 20 μg/ml human TNF-α immunotube, overnight wash.
R1: 1 μg/ml human TNF-α immunotube, R2 33 pmoles biotinylated human TNF-α on beads.
R1: 20 μg/ml human TNF-α immunotube, R2 33 pmoles biotinylated human TNF-α beads.
For screening, human p55 TNF receptor was coupled to a CM5 chip at high density (approximately 4,000 RUs). 100 μl of human p55 TNF receptor (10 10 μg/ml) was coupled to the chip at 5 μl/min in acetate buffer—pH5.5. Standard regeneration conditions were examined (glycine pH2 or pH3) but in each case antigen was removed from the surface of the chip—therefore as with TNF-α, after each sample was analysed, the chip was washed for 10 mins with buffer.
For TAR2-5, clones supernatants from the round selection were screened.
48 clones were screened from each of the 3U, 5U and 7U libraries, using the following selection methods:
R1: 1 μg/ml human p55 TNF receptor immunotube, R2 1 μg/ml human p55 TNF receptor immunotube, overnight wash.
R1: 10 μg/ml human p55 TNF receptor immunotube, R2 10 μg/ml human p55 TNF receptor immunotube, overnight wash.
1.3.3 Receptor and Cell Assays
The ability of the dimers to neutralise in the receptor assay was conducted as follows:
Receptor Binding
Anti-TNF dAbs were tested for the ability to inhibit the binding of TNF to recombinant TNF receptor 1 (p55). Briefly, Maxisorp plates were incubated overnight with 30 mg/ml anti-human Fc mouse monoclonal antibody (Zymed, San Francisco, USA). The wells were washed with phosphate buffered saline (PBS) containing 0.05% Tween-20 and then blocked with 1% BSA in PBS before being incubated with 100 ng/ml TNF receptor 1 Fc fusion protein (R&D Systems, Minneapolis, USA). Anti-TNF dAb was mixed with TNF which was added to the washed wells at a final concentration of 10 ng/ml. TNF binding was detected with 0.2 mg/ml biotinylated anti-TNF antibody (HyCult biotechnology, Uben, Netherlands) followed by 1 in 500 dilution of horse radish peroxidase labelled streptavidin (Amersham Biosciences, UK) and then incubation with TMB substrate (KPL, Gaithersburg, USA). The reaction was stopped by the addition of HCl and the absorbance was read at 450 nm. Anti-TNF dAb activity lead to a decrease in TNF binding and therefore a decrease in absorbance compared with the TNF only control.
L929 Cytotoxicity Assay Anti-TNF dAbs were also tested for the ability to neutralise the cytotoxic activity of TNF on mouse L929 fbroblasts (Evans, T. (2000) Molecular Biotechnology 15, 243-248). Briefly, L929 cells plated in microtitre plates were incubated overnight with anti-TNF dAb, 100 pg/ml TNF and 1 mg/ml actinomycin D (Sigma, Poole, UK). Cell viability was measured by reading absorbance at 490 nm following an incubation with [3-(4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-5-(3-carbboxymethoxyphenyl)-2-(4-sulfophenyl)-2H-tetrazolium (Promega, Madison, USA). Anti-TNF dAb activity lead to a decrease in TNF cytotoxicity and therefore an increase in absorbance compared with the TNF only control.
In the initial screen, supernatants prepared for BLAcore analysis, described above, were also used in the receptor assay. Further analysis of selected dimers was also conducted in the receptor and cell assays using purified proteins.
HeLa IL-8 Assay
Anti-TNFR1 or anti-TNF alpha dAbs were tested for the ability to neutralise the induction of IL-8 secretion by TNF in HeLa cells (method adapted from that of Akeson, L. et al. (1996) Journal of Biological Chemistry 271, 30517-30523, describing the induction of IL-8 by IL-1 in HUVEC; here we look at induction by human TNF alpha and we use HeLa cells instead of the HUVEC cell line). Briefly, HeLa cells plated in microtitre plates were incubated overnight with dAb and 300 pg/ml TNF. Post incubation the supernatant was aspirated off the cells and IL-8 concentration measured via a sandwich ELISA (R&D Systems). Anti-TNFR1 dAb activity lead to a decrease in IL-8 secretion into the supernatant compared with the TNF only control.
The L929 assay is used throughout the following experiments; however, the use of the HeLa IL-8 assay is preferred to measure anti-TNF receptor 1 (p55) ligands; the presence of mouse p55 in the L929 assay poses certain limitations in its use.
1.4 Sequence Analysis
Dimers that proved to have interesting properties in the BIAcore and the receptor assay screens were sequenced. Sequences are detailed in the sequence listing, Figures and Examples herein below.
1.5 Formatting
1.5.1 TAR1-5-19 Dimers
The TAR1-5 dimers that were shown to have good neutralization properties were re-formatted and analysed in the cell and receptor assays. The TAR1-5 guiding dAb was substituted with the affinity matured clone TAR1-5-19. To achieve this TAR1-5 was cloned out of the individual dimer pair and substituted with TAR1-5-19 that had been amplified by PCR. In addition TAR1-5-9 homodimers were also constructed in the 3U, 5U and 7U vectors. The N terminal copy of the gene was amplified by PCR and cloned as described above and the C-terminal gene fragment was cloned using existing SalI and NotI restriction sites.
1.5.2 Mutagenesis
The amber stop codon present in dAb2, one of the C-terminal dAbs in the TAR1-5 dimer pairs was mutated to a glutamine by site-directed mutagenesis.
1.5.3 Fabs
The dimers containing TAR1-5 or TAR1-5-19 were re-formatted into Fab expression vectors. dAbs were cloned into expression vectors containing either the CK or CH genes using SfiI and NotI restriction sites and verified by sequence analysis. The CK vector is derived from a pUC based ampicillin resistant vector and the CH vector is derived from a pACYC chloramphenicol resistant vector. For Fab expression the dAb-CH and dAb-CK constructs were co-transformed into HB2151 cells and grown in 2× TY containing 0.1% glucose, 100 μg/ml anpicillin and 10 μg/ml chloramphenicol.
1.5.3 Hinge Dimerisation
Dimerisation of dAbs via cystine bond formation was examined. A short sequence of amino acids EPKSGDKTHTCPPCP (SEQ ID NO: 11) a modified form of the human IgGC1 hinge was engineered at the C terminal region on the dAb. An oligo linker encoding for this sequence was synthesised and annealed, as described previously. The linker was cloned into the pEDA vector containing TAR1-5-19 using XhoI and NotI restriction sites. Dimerisation occurs in situ in the periplasm.
1.6 Expression and Purification
1.6.1 Expression
Supernatants were prepared in the 2 ml, 96-well plate format for the initial screening as described previously. Following the initial screening process selected dimers were analysed further. Dimer constructs were expressed in TOP10F′ or HB2151 cells as supernatants. Briefly, an individual colony from a freshly streaked plate was grown overnight at 37° C. in 2× TY with 100 μg/ml ampicillin and 1% glucose. A 1/100 dilution of this culture was inoculated into 2× TY with 100 μg/ml ampicillin and 0.1% glucose and grown at 37° C. shaking until OD600 was approximately 0.9. The culture was then induced with 1 mM IPTG overnight at 30° C. The cells were removed by centrifugation and the supernatant purified with protein A or L agarose.
Fab and cysteine hinge dimers were expressed as periplasmic proteins in HB2152 cells.
A 1/100 dilution of an overnight culture was inoculated into 2× TY with 0. 1% glucose and the appropriate antibiotics and grown at 37° C. with shaking until OD600 was approximately 0.9. The culture was then induced with 1 mM IPTG for 3-4 hours at 30° C. The cells were harvested by centrifugation and the pellet resuspended in periplasmic preparation buffer (30 mM Tris-HCl pH8.0, 1 mM EDTA, 20% sucrose). Following centrifugation the supernatant was retained and the pellet resuspended in 5mM MgSO4. The supernatant was harvested again by centrifugation, pooled and purified.
1.6.2 Protein A/L Purification
Optimisation of the purification of dimer proteins from Protein L agarose (Affitech, Norway) or Protein A agarose (Sigma, UK) was examined. Protein was eluted by batch or by column elusion using a peristaltic pump. Three buffers were examined: 0.1M Phosphate-citrate buffer pH2.6; 0.2M Glycine pH2.5; and 0.1M Glycine pH2.5.
The optimal condition was determined to be under peristaltic pump conditions using 0.1M Glycine pH2.5 over 10 column volumes. Purification from protein A was conducted peristaltic pump conditions using 0.1M Glycine pH2.5.
1.6.3 FPLC Purification
Further purification was carried out by FPLC analysis on the AKTA Explorer 100 system (Amersham Biosciences Ltd). TAR1-5 and TAR1-5-19 dimers were fractionated by cation exchange chromatography (1 ml Resource S—Amersham Biosciences Ltd) eluted with a 0-1 M NaC1 gradient in 50mM acetate buffer pH4. Hinge dimers were purified by ion exchange (1 ml Resource Q Amersham Biosciences Ltd) eluted with a 0-1 M NaC1 gradient in 25 mMTris HCl pH 8.0. Fabs were purified by size exclusion chromatography using a superose 12 (Amersham Biosciences Ltd) column run at a flow rate of 0.5 ml/min in PBS with 0.05% tween. Following purification, samples were concentrated using Vivaspin 5K cut off concentrators (Vivascience Ltd).
2.0 Results
2.1 TAR1-5 Dimers
6×96 clones were picked from the round 2 selection encompassing all the libraries and selection conditions. Supernatant preps were made and assayed by antigen and Protein L ELISA, BIAcore and in the receptor assays. In ELISAs, positive binding clones were identified from each selection method and were distributed between 3U, 5U and 7U libraries. However, as the guiding dAb is always present it was not possible to discriminate between high and low affinity binders by this method—therefore BLAcore analysis was conducted.
BIAcore analysis was conducted using the 2 ml supernatants. BIAcore analysis revealed that the dimer Koff rates were vastly improved compared to monomeric TAR1-5. Monomer Koff rate was in the range of 10−1M compared with dimer Koff rates which were in the range of 10−3-10−4M. 16 clones that appeared to have very slow off rates were selected, these came from the 3U, 5U and 7U libraries and were sequenced. In addition the supernatants were analysed for the ability to neutralize human TNF-α in the receptor assay.
6 lead clones (d1-d6 below) that neutralized in these assays and have been sequenced. The results show that out of the 6 clones obtained there are only 3 different second dAbs (dAb1, dAb2 and dAb3) however where the second dAb is found more than once they are linked with different length linkers.
TAR1-5d1: 3U linker 2nd dAb=dAb1-1 μg/ml Ag immunotube overnight wash
TAR1-5d2: 3U linker 2nd dAb=dAb2-1 μg/ml Ag immunotube overnight wash
TAR1-5d3: 5U linker 2nd dAb=dAb2-1 μg/ml Ag immunotube overnight wash
TAR1-5d4: 5U linker 2nd dAb=dAb3-20 μg/ml Ag immunotube overnight wash
TAR1-5d5: 5U linker 2nd dAb=dAb1-20 μg/ml Ag immunotube overnight wash
TAR1-5d6: 7U linker 2nd dAb=dAb1-R1:1 μg/ml Ag immunotube overnight wash, R2:beads
The 6 lead clones were examined further. Protein was produced from the periplasm and supernatant, purified with protein L agarose and examined in the cell and receptor assays. The levels of neutralization were variable (Table 1). The optimal conditions for protein preparation were determined. Protein produced from HB2151 cells as supernatants gave the highest yield (approximately 10 mgs/L of culture). The supernatants were incubated with protein L agarose for 2 hrs at room temperature or overnight at 4° C. The beads were washed with PBS/NaCl and packed onto an FPLC column using a peristaltic pump. The beads were washed with 10 column volumes of PBS/NaC1 and eluted with 0.1M glycine pH2.5. In general, dimeric protein is eluted after the monomer.
TAR1-5d1-6 dimers were purified by FPLC. Three species were obtained, by FPLC purification and were identified by SDS PAGE. One species corresponds to monomer and the other two species corresponds to dimers of different sizes. The larger of the two species is possibly due to the presence of C terminal tags. These proteins were examined in the receptor assay. The data presented in Table 1 represent the optimum results obtained from the two dimeric species (
2.1.2 TAR1-5-19 Dimers
TAR1-5-19 was substituted for TAR1-5 in the 6 lead clones. Analysis of all TAR1-5-19 dimers in the cell and receptor assays was conducted using total protein (protein L purified only) unless otherwise stated (Table 2). TAR1-5-19d4 and TAR1-5-19d3 have the best ND50 (˜5 nM) in the cell assay, this is consistent with the receptor assay results and is an improvement over TAR1-5-19 monomer (ND50˜30 nM). Although purified TAR1-5 dimers give variable results in the receptor and cell assays, TAR1-5-19 dimers were more consistent. Variability was shown when using different elution buffers during the protein purification. Elution using 0.1M Phosphate-citrate buffer pH2.6 or 0.2M Glycine pH2.5 although removing all protein from the protein L agarose in most cases rendered it less functional.
TAR1-5-19d4 was expressed in the fermenter and purified on cation exchange FPLC to yield a completely pure dimer. As with TAR 1-5d4 three species were obtained by FPLC purification, corresponding to monomer and two dimer species. This dimer was amino acid sequenced. TAR1-5-19 monomer and TAR1-5-19d4 were then examined in the receptor assay and the resulting IC50 for monomer was 30 nM and for dimer was 5 nM.
The results of the receptor assay comparing TAR1-5-19 monomer, TAR1-5-19d4 and TAR1-5d4 are shown in
TAR1-5-19 homodimers were made in the 3U, 5U and 7U vectors, expressed and purified on Protein L. The proteins were examined in the cell and receptor assays and the resulting IC50s (for receptor assay) and ND50s (for cell assay) were determined (Table 3,
TAR1-5 and TAR1-5-19 dimers were also cloned into Fab format, expressed and purified on protein L agarose. Fabs were assessed in the receptor assays (Table 4). The results showed that for both TAR1-5-19 and TAR1-5 dimers the neutralization levels were similar to the original Gly4Ser linker dimers from which they were derived. A TAR1-5-19 Fab where TAR1-5-19 was displayed on both CH and CK was expressed, protein L purified and assessed in the receptor assay. The resulting IC50 was approximately 1 nM.
2.3 TAR1-27 Dimers
3×96 clones were picked from the round 2 selection encompassing all the libraries and selection conditions. 2 ml supernatant preps were made for analysis in ELISA and bioassays. Antigen ELISA gave 71 positive clones. The receptor assay of crude supernatants yielded 42 clones with inhibitory properties (TNF binding 0-60%). In the majority of cases inhibitory properties correlated with a strong ELISA signal. 42 clones were sequenced, 39 of these have unique second dAb sequences. The 12 dimers that gave the best inhibitory properties were analysed further.
The 12 neutralizing clones were expressed as 200 ml supernatant preps and purified on protein L. These were assessed by protein L and antigen ELISA, BIAcore and in the receptor assay. Strong positive ELISA signals were obtained in all cases. BIAcore analysis revealed all clones to have fast on and off rates. The off rates were improved compared to monomeric TAR1-27, however the off rate of TAR1-27 dimers was faster (Koff is approximately in the range of 10−1 and 10−2M) than the TAR1-5 dimers examined previously (Koff is approximately in the range of 10−3-10−4M). The stability of the purified dimers was questioned and therefore in order to improve stability, the addition on 5% glycerol, 0.5% Triton X100 or 0.5% NP40 (Sigma) was included in the purification of 2 TAR1-27 dimers (d2 and dl6). Addition of NP40 or Triton X100 improved the yield of purified product approximately 2 fold. Both dimers were assessed in the receptor assay. TAR1-27d2 gave IC50 of 30 nM under all purification conditions. TAR1-27d16 showed no neutralization effect when purified without the use of stabilising agents but gave an IC50 of 50 nM when purified under stabilising conditions. No further analysis was conducted.
2.4 TAR1-5 Dimers
3×96 clones were picked from the second round selections encompassing all the libraries and selection conditions. 2 ml supernatant preps were made for analysis. Protein A and antigen ELISAs were conducted for each plate. 30 interesting clones were identified as having good off-rates by BIAcore (Koff ranges between 10−2-10−3M). The clones were sequenced and 13 unique dimers were identified by sequence analysis.
*note dimer 2 and dimer 3 have the same second dAb (called dAb2), however have different linker lengths (d2=(Gly4Ser)3, d3=(Gly4Ser)3). dAb1 is the partner dAb to dimers 1, 5 and 6. dAb3 is the partner dAb to dimer 4. None of the partner dAbs neutralise alone. FPLC purification is by cation exchange unless otherwise stated. The optimal dimeric species for each dimer obtained by FPLC was determined in these assays.
PCR Construction of TAR1-5-19CYS Dimer
See example 8 describing the dAb trimer. The trimer protocol gives rise to a mixture of monomer, dimer and trimer.
Expression and Purification of TAR1-5-19CYS Dimer
The dimer was purified from the supernatant of the culture by capture on Protein L agarose as outlined in the example 8.
Separation of TAR1-5-19CYS Monomer from the TAR1-5-19CYS Dimer
Prior to cation exchange separation, the mixed monomer/dimer sample was buffer exchanged into 50 mM sodium acetate buffer pH 4.0 using a PD-10 column (Amersham Pharmacia), following the manufacturer's guidelines. The sample was then applied to a 1 mL Resource S cation exchange column (Amersham Pharmacia), which had been pre-equilibrated with 50 mM sodium acetate pH 4.0. The monomer and dimer were separated is using the following salt gradient in 50 mM sodium acetate pH 4.0:
150 to 200 mM sodium chloride over 15 column volumes
200 to 450 mM sodium chloride over 10 column volumes
450 to 1000 mM sodium chloride over 15 column volumes.
Fractions containing dimer only were identified using SDS-PAGE and then pooled and the pH increased to 8 by the addition of ⅕ volume of 1 M Tris pH 8.0.
In vitro Functional Binding Assay: TNF Receptor Assay and Cell Assay
The affinity of the dimer for human TNFcz was determined using the TNF receptor and cell assay. IC50 in the receptor assay was approximately 0.3-0.8 nM; ND50 in the cell assay was approximately 3-8 nM.
Other Possible TAR1-5-19CYS Dimer Formats
PEG Dimers and Custom Synthetic Maleimide Dimers
Nektar (Shearwater) offer a range of bi-maleimide PEGs [mPEG2-(MAL)2 or mPEG-(MAL)2] which would allow the monomer to be formatted as a dimer, with a small linker separating the dAbs and both being linked to a PEG ranging in size from 5 to 40 kDa. It has been shown that the 5kDa mPEG-(MAL)2 (i.e., [TAR1-5-19]-Cys-maleimide-PEG×2, wherein the maleimides are linked together in the dimer) has an affinity in the TNF receptor assay off ˜1-3 nM. Also the dimer can also be produced using TMEA (Tris[2 5 maleimidoethyl]amine) (Pierce Biotechnology) or other bi-functional linkers.
It is also possible to produce the disulphide dimer using a chemical coupling procedure using 2,2′-dithiodipyridine (Sigma Aldrich) and the reduced monomer.
Addition of a Polypeptide Linker or Hinge to the C-Terminuls of the dAb.
A small linker, either (Gly4Ser)n where n=1 to 10, eg, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7, an immunoglobulin (e.g., IgG hinge region or random peptide sequence (e.g., selected from a library of random peptide sequences) can be engineered between the dAb and the terminal cysteine residue. This can then be used to make dimers as outlined above.
Summary
For dAb trimerisation, a free cysteine is required at the C-terminus of the protein. The cysteine residue, once reduced to give the free thiol, can then be used to specifically couple the protein to a trimeric maleimide molecule, for example TMEA (Tris[2 maleimidoethyl]amine).
PCR Construction of TAR1-5-19CYS
The following oligonucleotides were used to specifically PCR TAR1-5-19 with a SalI and BamHI sites for cloning and also to introduce a C-terminal cysteine residue:
The PCR reaction (50 μL volume) was set up as follows: 200 μM dNTPs, 0.4 μM of each primer, 5 μL of 10× PfuTurbo buffer (Stratagene), 100 ng of template plasmid (encoding TAR1-5-19), 1 μL of PfuTurbo enzyme (Stratagene) and the volume adjusted to 50 μL using sterile water. The following PCR conditions were used: initial denaturing step 94° C. for 2 mins, then cycles of 94° C. for 30 sees, 64° C. for 30 sec and 72° C. for 30 sec. A final extension also included of 72° C. for 5 mins. The PCR product was purified and digested with SalI and BamHI and ligated into the vector which had also been cut with the seine reskiction enzymes. Correct clones were verified by DNA sequencing.
Expression and Purification of TAR1-5-19CYS
TAR1-5-19CYS vector was transformed into BL21 (DE3) pLysS chemically competent cells (Novagen) following the manufacturer's protocol. Cells carrying the dAb plasmid were selected for using 100 μg/mL carbenicillin and 37 μg/mL chloramphenicol. Cultures were set up in 2 L baffled flasks containing 500 mL of terrific broth (Sigma-Aldrich), 100 μg/mL carbenicillin and 37 μg/mL chloramphenicol. The cultures were grown at 30° C. at 200 rpm to an O. D.600 of 1-1.5 and then induced with 1 mM IPTG (isopropyl-beta-D-thiogalactopyranoside, from Melford Laboratories). The expression of the dAb was allowed to continue for 12-16 hrs at 30° C. It was found that most of the dAb was present in the culture medium. Therefore, the cells were separated from the medium by centrifugation (8,000×g for 30 min), and the supernatant used to purify the dAb. Per litre of supernatant, 30 mL of Protein L agarose (Afftech) was added and the dAb allowed to batch bind with stirring for 2 hours. The resin was then allowed to settle under gravity for a further hour before the supernatant was siphoned off. The agarose was then packed into a XK 50 column (Amersham Phamacia) and was washed with 10 column volumes of PBS. The bound dAb was eluted with 100 mM glycine pH 2.0 and protein containing fractions were then neutralized by the addition of ⅕ volume of 1 M Tris pH 8.0. Per litre of culture supernatant 20 mg of pure protein was isolated, which contained a 50:50 ratio of monomer to dimer.
Trimerisation of TAR1-5-19CYS
2.5 ml of 100 M TAR1-5-19CYS was reduced with 5 mM dithiothreitol and left at room temperature for 20 minutes. The sample was then buffer exchanged using a PD-10 column (Amersham Pharmacia). The column had been pre-equilibrated with 5 mM EDTA, 50 mM sodium phosphate pH 6.5, and the sample applied and eluted following the manufacturer's guidelines. The sample was placed on ice until required. TMEA (Tris[2-maleimidoethyl]amine) was purchased from Pierce Biotechnology. A 20 mM stock solution of TMEA was made in 100% DMSO (dimethyl sulphoxide). It was found that a concentration of TMEA greater than 3:1 (molar ratio of dAb:TMEA) caused the rapid precipitation and cross-linking of the protein. Also the rate of precipitation and cross-linking was greater as the pH increased. Therefore using 100 μM reduced TAR1-5-19CYS, 25 μM TMEA was added to trimerise the protein and the reaction allowed to proceed at room temperature for two hours. It was found that the addition of additives such as glycerol or ethylene glycol to 20% (v/v), significantly reduced the precipitation of the trimer as the coupling reaction proceeded. After coupling, SDS-PAGE analysis showed the presence of monomer, dimer and trimer in solution.
Purification of the Trimeric TAR1-5-19CYS
40 μL of 40% glacial acetic acid was added per mL of the TMEA-TAR1-5-19cys reaction to reduce the pH to 4. The sample was then applied to a 1 mL Resource S cation exchange column (Amersham Pharmacia), which had been pre-equilibrated with 50 mM sodium acetate pH 4.0. The dimer and trimer were partially separated using a salt gradient of 340 to 450 mM Sodium chloride, 50 mM sodium acetate pH 4.0 over 30 column volumes. Fractions containing trimer only were identified using SDS-PAGE and then pooled and the pH increased to 8 by the addition of ⅕ volume of 1M Tris pH 8.0. To prevent precipitation of the trimer during concentration steps (using 5K cut off Viva spin concentrators; Vivascience), 10% glycerol was added to the sample.
In vitro Functional Binding Assay: TNF Receptor Assay and Cell Assay
The affinity of the trimer for human TNF-α was determined using the TNF receptor and cell assay. IC50 in the receptor assay was 0.3 nM; ND50 in the cell assay was in the range of 3 to 10 nM (e.g., 3 nM).
Other Possible TAR1-5-19CYS Trimer Formats
TAR1-5-19CYS may also be formatted into a trimer using the following reagents:
PEG Trimers and Custom Synthetic Maleimide Trimers
Nektar (Shearwater) offers a range of multi arm PEGs, which can be chemically modified at the terminal end of the PEG. Therefore using a PEG trimer with a maleimide functional group at the end of each arm would allow the trimerisation of the dAb in a manner similar to that outlined above using THEA. The PEG may also have the advantage in increasing the solubility of the trimer thus preventing the problem of aggregation. Thus, one could produce a dAb trimer in which each dAb has a C-terminal cysteine that is linked to a maleimide functional group, the maleimide functional groups being linked to a PEG trimer.
Addition of a Polypeptide Linker or Hinge to the C-terminus of the dAb
A small linker, either (Gly4Ser)n where n=1 to 10, eg, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7, an inmunoglobulin (eg, IgG hinge region) or random peptide sequence (eg, selected from a library of random peptide sequences) could be engineered between the dAb and the terminal cysteine residue. When used to make multimers (eg, dimers or trimers), this again would introduce a greater degree of flexibility and distance between the individual monomers, which may improve the binding characteristics to the target, eg a multisubunit target such as human TNF-α.
Selection of a Collection of Single Domain Antibodies (dAbs) Directed Against Human Serum Albumin (HSA) and Mouse Serum Albumin MSA).
This example explains a method for making a single domain antibody (dAb) directed against serum albumin. Selection of dAbs against both mouse serum albumin (MSA) and human serum albumin (HSA) is described. Three human phage display antibody libraries were used in this experiment, each based on a single human framework for VH (see
Library 1 (VH):
Diversity at positions: H30, H31, H33, H35, H50, H52, H52a, H53, H55, H56, H58, H95, H97, H98.
Library size: 6.2×109
Library 2 (VH):
Diversity at positions: H30, H31, H33, H35, H50, H52, H52a, H53, H55, H56, H58, H95, H97, H98, H99, H100, H100a, H100b.
Library size: 4.3×109
Library 3 (Vκ):
Diversity at positions: L30, L31, L32, L34, L50, L53, L91, L92, L93, L94, L96
Library size: 2×109
The VH and Vκ libraries have been preselected for binding to generic ligands protein A and protein L respectively so that the majority of clones in the unselected libraries are functional. The sizes of the libraries shown above correspond to the sizes after preselection. Two rounds of selection were performed on serum albumin using each of the libraries separately. For each selection, antigen was coated on immunotube (nunc) in 4 ml of PBS at a concentration of 100 μg/ml. In the first round of selection, each of the three libraries was panned separately against HSA (Sigma) and MSA (Sigma). In the second round of selection, phage from each of the six first round selections was panned against (i) the same antigen again (eg 1st round MSA, 2nd round MSA) and (ii) against the reciprocal antigen (eg 1st round MSA, 2nd round HSA) resulting in a total of twelve 2nd round selections. In each case, after the second round of selection 48 clones were tested for binding to HSA and MSA. Soluble dAb fragments were produced as described for scFv fragments by Harrison et al., Methods Enzymol. 1996;267:83-109 and standard ELISA protocol was followed (Hoogenboom et al. (1991) Nucleic Acids Res., 19: 4133) except that 2% tween PBS was used as a blocking buffer and bound dAbs were detected with either protein L-HRP (Sigma) (for the Vκs) and protein A-HRP (Amersham Pharmacia Biotech) (for the VHs).
dAbs that gave a signal above background indicating binding to MSA, HSA or both were tested in ELISA insoluble form for binding to plastic alone but all were specific for serum albumin. Clones were then sequenced (see table below) revealing that 21 unique dAb sequences had been identified. The minimum similarity (at the amino acid level) between the VK dAb clones selected was 86.25% ((69/80)×100; the result when all the diversified residues are different, eg clones 24 and 34). The minimum similarity between the VH dAb clones selected was 94% ((127/136)×100).
Next, the serum albumin binding dAbs were tested for their ability to capture biotinylated antigen from solution. ELISA protocol (as above) was followed except that ELISA plate was coated with 1 μg/ml protein L (for the Vκclones) and 1 μg/ml protein A (for the VH clones). Soluble dAb was captured from solution as in the protocol and detection was with biotinylated MSA or HSA and streptavidin HRP. The biotinylated MSA and HSA had been prepared according to the manufacturer's instructions, with the aim of achieving an average of 2 biotins per serum albumin molecule. Twenty four clones were identifed that captured biotinylated MSA from solution in the ELISA. Two of these (clones 2 and 38 below) also captured biotinylated HSA. Next, the dAbs were tested for their ability to bind MSA coated on a CM5 biacore chip. Eight clones were found that bound MSA on the biacore.
In all cases the frameworks were identical to the frameworks in the corresponding dummy sequence, with diversity in the CDRs as indicated in the table above.
Of the eight clones that bound MSA on the BIAcore, two clones that are highly expressed in E. coli (clones MSA16 and MSA26) were chosen for further study (see Example 10).
Full nucleotide and amino acid sequences for MSA16 and 26 are given in
Determination of Affinity and Serum Half-Life in Mouse of MSA Binding dAbs MSA16 and MSA26.
dαbs MSA16 and MSA26 were expressed in the periplasm of E. coli and purified using batch absorption to protein L-agarose affinity resin (Affitech, Norway) followed by elution with glycine at pH 2.2. The purified dAbs were then analysed by inhibition biacore to determine Kd. Briefly, purified MSA16 and MSA26 were tested to determine the concentration of dAb required to achieve 200 RUs of response on a biacore CM5 chip coated with a high density of MSA. Once the required concentrations of dAb had been determined, MSA antigen at a range of concentrations around the expected Kd was premixed with the dAb and incubated overnight. Binding to the MSA coated biacore chip of dAb in each of the premixes was then measured at a high flow-rate of 30 μl/minute. The resulting curves were used to create Klotz plots, which gave an estimated Kd of 200 nM for MSA16 and 70 nM for MSA 26 (
Next, clones MSA16 and MSA26 were cloned into an expression vector with the HA tag (nucleic acid sequence: TATCCTTATGATGTTCCTGATTATGCA (SEQ ID NO: 91) and amino acid sequence: YPYDVPDYA (SEQ ID NO: 92) and 2-10 mg quantities were expressed in E. coli and purified from the supernatant with protein L-agarose affinity resin (Affitech, Norway) and eluted with glycine at pH2.2. Serum half life of the dAbs was determined in mouse. MSA26 30 and MSA16 were dosed as single i.v. injections at approx 1.5 mg/kg into CD1 mice.
Analysis of serum levels was by goat anti-HA (Abcam, UK) capture and protein L-HRP (Invitrogen) detection ELISA which was blocked with 4% Marvel. Washing was with 0.05% tween PBS. Standard curves of known concentrations of dAb were set up in the presence of 1× mouse serum to ensure comparability with the test samples. Modelling with a 2 compartment model showed MSA-26 had a t1/2α of 0.16 hr, a t1/2β of 14.5 hr and an area under the curve (AUC) of 465 hr.mg/ml (data not shown) and MSA-16 had a t1/2α of 0.98 hr, a t1/2β of 36.5 hr and an AUC of 913 hr.mg/ml (
Creation of VH-VH and Vκ-Vκ Dual Specific Fab Like Fragments.
This example describes a method for making VH and Vκ dual specifics as Fab like fragments. Before constructing each of the Fab like fragments described, dAbs that bind to targets of choice were first selected from dAb libraries similar to those described in Example 9. A VH dAb, HEL4, that binds to hen egg lysozyme (Sigma) was isolated and a second VH dAb (TAR2h-5) that binds to TNF-α receptor (R and D Systems) was also isolated. The sequences of these are given in the sequence listing. A Vκ dAb that binds TNF-α (TAR1-5-19) was isolated by selection and affinity maturation and the sequence is also set forth in the sequence listing. A second Vκ dAb (MSA 26) described in Example 9 whose sequence is in
DNA from expression vectors containing the four dAbs described above was digested with enzymes SalI and NotI to excise the DNA coding for the dAb. A band of the expected size (300-400 bp) was purified by running the digest on an agarose gel and excising the band, followed by gel purification using the Qiagen gel purification kit (Qiagen, UK). The DNA coding for the dAbs was then inserted into either the CH or CK vectors (
The VH CH and VH Cκ constructs were cotransformed into HB2151 cells. Separately, the Vκ CH and Vκ Cκ constructs were cotransformed into HB2151 cells. Cultures of each of the cotransformed cell lines were grown overnight (in 2× TY containing 5% glucose, 10 μg/ml chloramphenicol and 100 μg/ml ampicillin to maintain antibiotic selection for both CH and Cκ plasmids). The overnight cultures were used to inoculate fresh media (2× TY, 10 μg/ml chloramphenicol and 100 μg/ml ampicillin) and grown to OD 0.7-0.9 before induction by the addition of IPTG to express their CH and Cκ constructs.
Expressed Fab like fragment was then purified from the periplasm by protein A purification (for the contransformed VH CH and VH Cκ) and MSA affinity resin purification (for the contransformed Vκ CH and Vκ Cκ).
VH-VH Dual Specific
Expression of the VH CH and VH Cκ dual specific was tested by running the protein on a gel. The gel was blotted and a band the expected size for the Fab fragment could be detected on the Western blot via both the myc tag and the flag tag, indicating that both the VH CH and VH Cκ parts of the Fab like fragment were present. Next, in order to determine whether the two halves of the dual specific were present in the same Fab-like fragment, an ELISA plate was coated overnight at 4° C. with 100 μl per well of hen egg lysozyme (HEL) at 3 mg/ml in sodium bicarbonate buffer. The plate was then blocked (as described in Example 1) with 2% tween PBS followed by incubation with the VH CH/VH Cκ dual specific Fab like fragment. Detection of binding of the dual specific to the HEL was via the non cognate chain using 9e10 (a monoclonal antibody that binds the myc tag, Roche) and anti mouse IgG-HRP (Amersham Pharmacia Biotech). The signal for the VH CH/VH Cκ dual specific Fab like fragment was 0.154 compared to a background signal of 0.069 for the VH Cκ chain expressed alone. This demonstrates that the Fab like fragment has binding specificity for target antigen.
Vκ-Vκ Dual Specific
After purifying the contransformed Vκ CH and Vκ Cκ dual specific Fab like fragment on an MSA affinity resin, the resulting protein was used to probe an ELISA plate coated with 1 μg/ml TNF-α and an ELISA plate coated with 10 μg/ml MSA. As predicted, there was signal above background when detected with protein L-HRP on both ELISA plates (data not shown). This indicated that the fraction of protein able to bind to MSA (and therefore purified on the MSA affinity column) was also able to bind TNF-α in a subsequent ELISA, confirming the dual specificity of the antibody fragment. This fraction of protein was then used for two subsequent experiments. Firstly, an ELISA plate coated with 1 μg/ml TNF-α was probed with dual specific Vκ CH and Vκ Cκ Fab like fragment and also with a control TNF-α binding dAb at a concentration calculated to give a similar signal on the ELISA. Both the dual specific and control dAb were used to probe the ELISA plate in the presence and in the absence of 2 mg/ml MSA. The signal in the dual specific well was reduced by more than 50% but the signal in the dAb well was not reduced at all (see
Creation of a Vκ-Vκ Dual Specific cys Bonded Dual Specific with Specificity for Mouse Serum Albumin and TNFa
This example describes a method for making a dual specific antibody fragment specific for both mouse serum albumin and TNF-α by chemical coupling via a disulphide bond. Both MSA16 (from Example 1) and TAR1-5-19 dAbs were recloned into a pET based vector with a C terminal cysteine and no tags. The two dAbs were expressed at 4-10 mg levels and purified from the supernatant using protein L-agarose affinity resin (Affitiech, Norway). The cysteine tagged dAbs were then reduced with dithiothreitol. The TAR1-5-19 dAb was then coupled with dithiodipyridine to block reformation of disulphide bonds resulting in the formation of PEP 1-5-19 homodimers. The two different dAbs were then mixed at pH 6.5 to promote disulphide bond formation and the generation of TAR1-5-19, MSA16 cys bonded heterodimers. This method for producing conjugates of two unlike proteins was originally described by King et al. (King T P, Li Kochoumian L Biochemistry. 1978 vol 17: 1499-506 Preparation of protein conjugates via intermolecular disulfide bond formation.) Heterodimers were separated from monomeric species by cation exchange. Separation was confirmed by the presence of a band of the expected size on a SDS gel. The resulting heterodimeric species was tested in the TNF receptor assay and found to have an IC50 for neutralising TNF of approximately 18 nM. Next, the receptor assay was repeated with a constant concentration of heterodimer (18 nM) and a dilution series of MSA and HSA. The presence of HSA at a range of concentrations (up to 2 mg/ml) did not cause a reduction in the ability of the dimer to inhibit TNF-α.
However, the addition of MSA caused a dose dependent reduction in the ability of the dimer to inhibit TNF-α: (
Data Summary
A summary of data obtained in the experiments set forth in the foregoing examples is set forth in Annex 4.
Throughout the course of studies regarding the anti-TNF-α dAbs described herein, a number of different dAbs have been identified that bind human and/or mouse TNF-α. Sequences and further information are provided herein below.
Clones that Bind Mouse TNF-α:
The nucleotide and amino acid sequences for four anti-mouse TNF-α dAbs are provided below. Two of these (TAR1-2m-9 and TAR1-2m-30) inhibit the activity of mouse TNF-α, and two bind but do not inhibit (TAR1-2m-1 and TAR1-2m-2).
TAR1-2m-9:
TAR-2m-9 is a Vk clone, with an IC50 of 6 μM and an ND50 of 5 μM. The IC50 and ND50 are not improved upon Protein L cross-linking. This clone has no effect against human TNF-α (species cross-reactivity has been assessed in cell assays at two concentrations), but has similar neutralizing activity against rat TNF-α.
TAR1-2m-30:
TAR1-2m-30 is a Vk clone, with an ND50 of 10 μM. ND50 is not improved upon Protein L cross-linking. This clone has no effect against human TNF-α (species cross-reactivity has been assessed in cell assays at two concentrations), and is slightly less effective against rat TNF when compared to mouse.
TAR1-2m-1:
This clone binds mouse TNF-α but does not inhibit receptor binding activity.
TAR1-2m-2:
This clone binds mouse TNF-α but does not inhibit receptor binding activity.
dAb Clones that Bind Human TNF-α
The following is a listing of the nucleotide sequences of dAbs identified for binding human TNF-α. Corresponding amino acid sequences are provided in
Additional anti-human TNF-α dAb clones include the following:
Several clones have been subjected to affinity maturation. Clone TAR1-100-47 is an affinity-matured clone with an ND50 of 30-50 nM in the L929 cell assay, and 3-5 nM when cross-linked with protein L. TAR1-100-47 cross-reacts with rhesus TNF. Its amino acid sequence and those of a number of other clones are as provided bleow. TAR1-2-100 and TAR1-2-109 are parent clones used for construction of the library. The good TAR1 clones in this group have the following consensus sequence:
D/E30, W32, R94 and F96, as indicated in bold in TAR1-100-47
The sequence of the TAR1-5-19 anti-human TNF-α dAb adapted to various formats in these examples is as follows:
Tg197 mice are transgenic for the human TNF-globin hybrid gene and heterozygotes at 4-7 weeks of age develop a chronic, progressive polyarthritis with histological features in common with rheumatoid arthritis [Keffer, J., Probert, L., Cazlaris, H., Georgopoulos, S., Kaslaris, E., Kioussis, D., Kollias, G. (1991). Transgenic mice expressing human tumor necrosis factor: a predictive genetic model of arthritis. EMBO J., Vol. 10, pp. 4025-4031.]
To test the efficacy of a PEGylated dAb (PEG format being 2×20 k branched with 2 sites for attachment of the dAb [i.e. 40K mPEG2 MAL2], the dAb being TAR1-5-19cys) in the prevention of arthritis in the Tg197 model, heterozygous transgenic mice were divided into groups of 10 animals with equal numbers of male and females. Treatment commenced at 3 weeks of age with weekly intraperitoneal injections of test items. The expression and PEGylation of TAR1-5-19cys monomer is outlined in Section 1.3.3, example 1. All protein preparations were in phosphate buffered saline and were tested for acceptable levels of endotoxins.
The study was performed blind. Each week the animals were weighed and the macrophenotypic signs of arthritis scored according to the following system: 0=no arthritis (normal appearance and flexion), 1=mild arthritis (joint distortion), 2=moderate arthritis (swelling, joint deformation), 3=heavy arthritis (severely impaired movement).
The outcome of the study clearly demonstrated that 10 mg/kg PEGylated TAR1 -5-19 inhibited the development of arthritis with a significant difference between the arthritic scoring of the saline control and treated group. The 1 mg/kg dose of PEGylated TAR1-5-19 also produced a statistically significantly lower median arthritic score than saline control group (P<0.05% using normal approximation to the Wilcoxon Test).
To test the efficacy of a PEGylated dAb in the therapeutic model of arthritis in the Tg197 model, heterozygous transgenic mice were divided into groups of 10 animals with equal numbers of male and females. Treatment commenced at 6 weeks of age when the animals had significant arthritic phenotypes. Treatment was twice weekly with 4.6 mg/kg intraperitoneal injections of test items. The sample preparation and disease scoring are as described above in Example 14.
The arthritic scoring clearly demonstrated that PEGylated TAR1-5-19 inhibited the progression of arthritis in a therapeutic model. The 4.6 mg/kg dose of PEGylated TAR1-5-19 produced a statistically significantly lower median arthritic score than saline control group at week 9 (P<0.01% using normal approximation to the Wilcoxon Test).
To test the efficacy of a dAb from a slow release format, a dAb with a small PEG molecule (where the PEG is 4×5 k with four sites for attachment of a dAb with a C-terminal cys residue, the dAb being TAR1-5-19 [i.e. 20K PEG 4 arm MAL]) was loaded into a 0.2 ml osmotic pump. The pump had a release rate of 0.2 ml over a 4 week period was implanted subcutaneously into mice at week 6 in the therapeutic Tg197 model as described above. The arthritic scores of these animals increased at a clearly slower rate when compared to animals implanted with pumps loaded with saline. This demonstrates that dAbs are efficacious when delivered from a slow release format.
The dAb monomer TAR1-5-19 described herein is an affinity matured dAb monomer derived from a dAb initially selected using passively coated TNF-α. The initial clone had a ND50 in the L929 TNF-cytotoxicity neutralization assay greater than 5 μM. TAR1-5-19 has an ND50 of less than 30 nM. When formatted as an Fc Fusion as described herein, the TAR1-5-19 clone has an ND50 of less than 5 nM in the L929 assay.
The serum half-life of TAR1-5-19 dAb Fc-fusion was examined following injection into mice. Results are shown in
The TAR1-5-19 dAb Fc fusion construct was tested in the Tg197 mouse model of RA described herein above. Mice were divided into five groups of 10, with equal numbers of male and female mice per group. Treatment with twice weekly IP injections of TAR1-5-19 dAb Fc fusion, ENBREL or saline was begun at 3 weeks of age, a time at which RA symptoms have not yet manifested. The study was conducted for 7 weeks. As shown in
Animals were assessed for arthritic scores as described herein, in a blinded manner. At the end of the 7 week course of treatment, animals receiving the twice weekly dosage of 10 mg/kg of the TAR1-5-19 dAb Fc fusion had lower arthritic scores than the animals receiving ENBREL at 10 mg/kg, and had experienced essentially complete prevention of arthritic disease relative to non-treated animals or animals receiving the negative control dAb Fc fusion.
TNF-α is associated with cachexia. Animals were weighed throughout the course of anti-TNF-α dAb treatment. The weights of the animals receiving the TAR1-5-19 dAb Fc fusion were significantly greater than those receiving negative control dAb Fc fusion and no treatment and similar to the weights of the animals receiving ENBREL injections.
In summary, 10 mg/kg TAR1-5-19 completely prevented the onset of arthritis in the Tg197 model. This response was dose-dependent, with a partial effect resulting from a 1 mg/kg dose, and the response was superior to that observed with a similar dose of the existing anti-TNF-α drug ENBREL. This study demonstrates the efficacy of dAbs as therapeutics in a clinically accepted model of human disease.
Histopathological analyses of fixed sections from the joints of the animals are in agreement with these data (not shown).
In one series of studies, three different extended half-life anti-TNF-α dAb formats were examined for their effect on arthritic score. These formats were an anti-TNF-α dAb Fc fusion (two anti-human TNF-α dAbs homodimerized by fusion to human IgG CH2/CH3 region), two different PEG-linked anti-TNF-α dAb constructs (a homodimer formed by the cys-maleimide linkage of two identical dAbs to a 2×20K branched PEG and a homotetramer formed by the cys-maleimide linkage of four identical dAbs to a 4×10K branched PEG) and a dual-specific anti-TNF-α/Anti SA dAb comprising two identical anti-TNF-α dAbs followed by an anti-mouse serum albumin dAb.
In separate studies, drug compositions were administered either weekly at 10 mg/kg or 1 mg/kg as shown in
The PEGylated anti-TNF dAb homodimer was effective at 10 mg/kg in the weekly injection protocol for the complete prevention of arthritis based on arthritic score. Current anti-TNF-α drug used for comparison had a reduced arthritic score relative to untreated animals, but the score was higher in a statistically significant manner than the score achieved with the PEGylated dAb construct. The anti-TNF-α/anti-SA dual specific and the Fc fusion showed effect relative to no treatment.
In the 1 mg/kg weekly injection regimen, while none of the treatments was 100% effective at preventing the onset of disease, the PEGylated anti-TNF-α dAb construct was still highly effective in preventing the progression of disease symptoms relative to no treatment and current anti-TNF-α drug. In this dosing regimen, the anti-TNF-α dAb Fc fusion and the dual-specific construct were also more effective than the current drug.
In summary, the weekly dosing regimen studies with three different formats of half-life-extended dAbs further validates the efficacy of treatment in a clinically accepted model of human disease.
In this study, the efficacy of various formats and dosage regimens of anti-TNF-α dAb constructs against established disease was compared to that of equal molar doses of the current anti-TNF-α therapeutics ENBREL, HUMIRA and REMICADE in the Tg197 RA model. Animals were administered the therapeutics starting at 6 weeks, instead of at 3 weeks, such that arthritic symptoms had already manifested. Symptoms were monitored by histology (at 9 weeks) and arthritic scoring (weekly) in a blinded manner.
The various formats and dosages for twice-weekly administration are shown in
The results of the study showed not one of the current biologics appreciably reversed the arthritic score by 9 weeks. The TAR formats all to a greater or lesser degree stabilized the arthritic score when compared with the saline control, and this was statistically significant. Moreover when compared with the week 6 score there were signs of disease reversal.
The arthritic joints at week 9 when examined for histopathological disease status also showed a reduction in disease severity following treatment with the TAR formats when compared with the joints at week 6. This confirms that the TAR formats can elicit a reversal of the arthritic phenotype of the established disease.
These studies demonstrate the effectiveness of the tested anti-TNF-α dAb constructs against established arthritic disease, including the ability of a TNF-α dAb to at least partially reverse the course of disease.
A Efficacy Study of TAR1-5-19/Anti-Serum Albumin dAb Fusion a Prophylactic Model of Arthritis.
Tg197 mice are transgenic for the human TNF-globin hybrid gene and heterozygotes at 4-7 weeks of age develop a chronic, progressive polyarthritis with histological features in common with rheumatoid arthritis [Keffer, J., Probert, L., Cazlaris, H., Georgopoulos, S., Kaslaris, E., Kioussis, D., Kollias, G. (1991). Transgenic mice expressing human tumour necrosis factor: a predictive genetic model of arthritis. EMBO J., Vol. 10, pp. 4025-4031.]
To test the efficacy of a TAR1-5-19/anti-serum albumin dAb fusion (a inline trimer of 3 dAbs, being TAR1-5-19, TAR1-5-19 and an anti-mouse serum albumin dAb) in the prevention of arthritis in the Tg197 model, heterozygous transgenic mice were divided into groups of 10 animals with equal numbers of male and females. Treatment commenced at 3 weeks of age with weekly intraperitoneal injections of test items. TAR1-5-19/anti-serum albumin dAb fusion was expressed in E. coli with a C-terminal hexa histidine tag and purified by Ni affinity chromatography, IEX and gel filtration. All protein preparations were in phosphate buffered saline and were tested for acceptable levels of endotoxins.
The study was performed blind. Each week the animals were weighed and the macrophenotypic signs of arthritis scored according to the following system: 0=no arthritis (normal appearance and flexion), 1=mild arthritis (joint distortion), 2=moderate arthritis (swelling, joint deformation), 3=heavy arthritis (severely impaired movement).
The outcome of the study clearly demonstrated that 10 mg/kg TAR1-5-19/anti-serum albumin dAb fusion inhibited the development of arthritis with a significant difference between the arthritic scoring of the saline control and treated group. The 1 mg/kg dose of TAR1-5-19/anti-serum albumin dAb fusion also produced a statistically significantly lower median arthritic score than saline control group (P<2% using normal approximation to the Wilcoxon Test).
B Efficacy Study of TAR1-5-19/Anti-Serum Albumin dAb Fusion in a Therapeutic Model of Arthritis.
To test the efficacy of a TAR1-5-19/anti-serum albumin dAb fusion in the therapeutic model of arthritis in the Tg197 model, heterozygous transgenic mice were divided into groups of 10 animals with equal numbers of male and females. Treatment commenced at 6 weeks of age when the animals had significant arthritic phenotypes. Treatment was twice weekly with 2.7 mg/kg intraperitoneal injections of test items. The sample preparation and disease scoring are as described above.
The arthritic scoring clearly demonstrated that TAR1-5-19/anti-serum albumin dAb fusion inhibited the progression of arthritis in a therapeutic model. The 2.7 mg/kg dose of TAR1-5-19/anti-serum albumin dAb fusion produced a statistically significantly lower median arthritic score than saline control group at week 9 (P<0.05% using normal approximation to the Wilcoxon Test).
This clearly demonstrates that anti-TNF dAbs can be effective in a format with anti-SA dAbs and that the anti-SA dAb has extended the serum half life of the anti-TNF dAb from that which would be expected for an anti-TNF dAb alone.
Two additional studies were carried out examining the effects of anti-TNF-α dAbs on arthritic and histopathologic scores in the Tg197 model of RA.
In the first study, a TAR1-5-19 dAb Fc fusion as described above was administered at 10 mg/kg, twice weekly commencing at 3 weeks of age—before the onset of RA symptoms. Results were judged in comparison with saline, ENBREL and control Fc fusion dAb injection on the same schedule.
The TAR1-5-19 dAb Fc fusion was more effective than ENBREL in preventing the onset of RA symptoms in the mice as judged by arthritic score and from analysis of the histology slides.
In the second study, the effects of weekly injections of anti-TNF-α dAb Fc fusion, PEG dimer and dual-specific anti-TNF/antiSA at 10 or 1 mg/kg, commencing at 3 weeks of age. Comparison is to ENBREL and HUMIRA.
The arthritic scores for all the TAR formats, given as either 1 mg/kg or 10 mg/kg doses, were reduced when compared with the saline control. Moreover there was evidence of a delay in the onset of the disease. The PEGylated and anti-SA dual specific formats were more effective at reducing the severity of the arthritis when compared with Humira and Enbrel. In addition analysis of the histology of the joints at week 10 also showed that the TAR formats had been efficacious and reduced the disease severity when compared with the saline control.
In summary, the TAR1-5-19 anti-TNF-dAb in the Fc fusion, PEGylated and anti-SA dual specific formats are all effective against RA symptoms in the Tg197 model system, whether administered before or after the onset of arthritic symptoms. The most effective anti-TNF dAb formats are either equivalent to or more effective than HUMIRA, and the most effective anti-TNF dAb formats are significantly more effective than ENBREL in all studies.
TAR15 (Anti-Human VEGF)
VK dAbs that bind human VEGF are described below. RBA refers to the VEGF receptor 2 binding assay described herein.
The TAR15-1 clone has a Kd of 50-80 nM when tested at various concentrations on a low density BIAcore chip. Other VK clones were passed over the low density chip at one concentration (50 nM). Different clones show different kinetic profiles.
Amino acid sequences:
Consensus sequence: W28, G30, E32, S34, H50 and Y93.
Additional TAR15 anti-human VEGF dAb clones have a consensus sequence:
W28, G30, E32, S34, H50 and Y93, as shown in TAR15-10 below.
VH dAbs that bind human VEGF are described below. These clones give a reduction (more than 50%) in the supernatant RBA (R2):
VH clones were passed over the low density VEGF chip on a BIAcore at one concentration (50 nM). Different clones give different kinetic profiles.
Amino acid sequences:
Anti VEGF dAbs as described herein can be tested for efficacy in various formats as described above for the anti-TNF-α dAbs, including, for example, Fc fusion, Fabs, PEGylated forms, dimers, tetramers, and anti-SA dual specific forms. The anti-VEGF dAbs can also be evaluated not only with anti-TNF-α dAbs as described herein, but also with other anti-TNF-α preparations, such as HUMIRA, ENBREL, and/or REMICADE.
The additional studies can be carried out to examine the effects of anti-VEGF dAbs on, for example, arthritic and histopathologic scores in the Tg197 model of RA.
For example, a TAR15 dAb Fc fusion similar to the TAR1-5-19 Fc fusions described herein above are administered IP at 1 mg/kg or 10 mg/kg, weekly or twice weekly commencing at 3 weeks of age (before the onset of RA symptoms), or at 6 weeks of age (after the onset of symptoms) and continuing for up to 7 weeks or more. Results are judged in comparison with saline, control Fc fusion (anti-β-gal), TAR1-5-19 alone, ENBREL, REMICADE and/or HUMIRA, preferably in equal molar amounts.
Animals are scored for macrophenotypic indicia (e.g., arthritic score) and histopathological scores as described above. Efficacy is demonstrated by any of
i) a failure to develop disease symptoms (as evidenced by arthritic or histopathological scores) when administered to animals beginning at 3 weeks of age,
ii) lessened severity of disease symptoms appearing when administered starting at 3 weeks of age, relative to control animals,
iii) failure to progress to more severe disease or progression at a lower rate relative to control animals when administered beginning at 6 weeks of age,
iv) reversal of symptoms (again, by arthritic score or hostopathological score) at any of 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, or 14 weeks when administered to an animal beginning at 6 weeks of age.
Similar studies can be carried out with each of the different formats described above, e.g., Fabs, PEGylated forms, dimers, tetramers, and anti-SA dual specific forms.
Anti VEGF dAbs such as TAR15 dAb can also be administered to the Tg197 mouse model in combination with HUMIRA, ENBREL, and/or REMICADE. Such studies are performed in the same manner as described above for the testing of VEGF dAbs alone, and efficacy is also determined in the same manner.
To evaluate the effectiveness of anti-TNF-α dAbs (and/or anti-VEGF dAbs) in Crohn's disease, the TnfΔARE transgenic mouse model of Crohn's disease originally described by Kontoyiannis et al., 1999, Immunity 10: 387-398 is used (the DSS model can also be used in a similar fashion). The animals develop an IBD phenotype with similarity to Crohn's disease starting between 4 and 8 weeks of age. Therefore, anti-TNF-a dAb, e.g., TAR1-5-19 in various formats (Fc fusion, Fab, PEGylated (dimeric, tetrameric, etc.), dual specific with VEGF, dual specific with anti-SA, etc.) are administered at either 3 weeks of age (to test prevention of disease) or 6 weeks of age (to test stabilization, prevention of progression or reversal of disease symptoms), and animals are scored by weight and histologically as described herein. IP dosages of 1 mg/kg and 10 mg/kg are used for initial studies, with adjustments made in accord to the results of these initial studies. Test compositions are administered either weekly or twice weekly, or can be administered continuously, for example, using an osmotic pump. Alternatively, oral delivery formulations, e.g., by oral gavage with Zantac or by enteric coated formulations can also be applied. The studies are continued for up to 7 weeks or more once initiated.
Efficacy in the TNFΔARE model of Crohn's disease is shown by any of:
i) a failure to develop disease symptoms when administered to animals beginning at 3 weeks of age,
ii) lessened severity of disease symptoms appearing when administered starting at 3 weeks of age, relative to control animals,
iii) failure to progress to more severe disease or progression at a lower rate relative to control animals when administered beginning at 6 weeks of age,
iv) reversal of symptoms at any of 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, or 14 weeks when administered to an animal beginning at 6 weeks of age.
In particular, treatment is considered effective if the average histopathological disease score is lower in treated animals (by a statistically significant amount) than that of a vehicle control group. Treatment is also considered effective if the average histopathological score is lower by at least 0.5 units, at least 1.0 units, at least 1.5 units, at least 2.0 units, at least 2.5 units, at least 3.0 units, or by at least 3.5 units relative to the vehicle-only control group. Alternatively, the treatment is effective if the average histopatholigical score remains at or is lowered to 0 to 0.5 throughout the course of the therapeutic regimen.
As with the RA model, the effect of combination therapies with dAbs specific for VEGF or with other anti-TNF-a compositions (e.g., ENBREL, REMICADE and/or HUMIRA) are also evaluated in this model.
All publications, patents and published patent applications mentioned in the present specification, and references cited in said publications, are herein incorporated by reference. Various modifications and variations of the described methods and system of the invention will be apparent to those skilled in the art without departing from the scope and spirit of the invention. Although the invention has been described in connection with specific preferred embodiments, it should be understood that the invention as claimed should not be unduly limited to such specific embodiments. Indeed, various modifications of the described modes for carrying out the invention which are obvious to those skilled in molecular biology or related fields are intended to be within the scope of the following claims.
Annex 1: Polypeptides which Enhance Half-Life in vivo.
Annex 2
Annex 3: Oncology Combinations
Annex 4:
| Number | Date | Country | Kind |
|---|---|---|---|
| 0230202.4 | Dec 2002 | GB | national |
| 115841.9 | Jun 2001 | GB | national |
| 0327706.8 | Nov 2003 | GB | national |
| Number | Date | Country | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 60535076 | Jan 2004 | US | |
| 60509613 | Oct 2003 | US |
| Number | Date | Country | |
|---|---|---|---|
| Parent | 10744774 | Dec 2003 | US |
| Child | 10925366 | Aug 2004 | US |
| Parent | PCT/GB03/02804 | Jun 2003 | US |
| Child | 10925366 | Aug 2004 | US |
| Parent | PCT/GB02/03014 | Jun 2002 | US |
| Child | 10925366 | Aug 2004 | US |
| Parent | PCT/GB04/02829 | Jun 2004 | US |
| Child | 10925366 | Aug 2004 | US |
| Parent | PCT/GB03/05646 | Dec 2003 | US |
| Child | 10925366 | Aug 2004 | US |
